DASH 8 Q400

MAINTENANCE TRAINING
MANUAL
VOLUME 3B
ATA 32, 27
REVISION 0.4

FlightSafety International, Inc.

Marine Air Terminal, LaGuardia Airport
Flushing, New York 11371
(718) 565-4100
www.FlightSafety.com
 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

NOTICE

The material contained in this training manual is based on information obtained from
the aircraft manufacturer’s Maintenance Manuals and Pilot Manuals. It is to be used for
familiarization and training purposes only.

At the time of printing it contained then-current information. In the event of conflict between
data provided herein and that in publications issued by the manufacturer or the FAA, that
of the manufacturer or the FAA shall take precedence.

We at FlightSafety want you to have the best training possible. We welcome any suggestions
you might have for improving this manual or any other aspect of our training program.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

NOTICE These commodities, t echnology o r softwar e were exported from t he U nited States i n acco rdance w ith t he Expor t
Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
Courses for the Dash 8 Series and other deHavilland aircraft are taught at the following
FlightSafety International learning centers:

FlightSafety International Toronto Learning Center

95 Garratt Boulevard
Downsview, Ontario
M3K 2A5

For course information please contact us:

1-416-638-9313
1-877-FLY-DASH
[email protected]
www.flightsafety.com

Copyright © 2015 FlightSafety International, Inc.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution is prohibited.
All rights reserved.
 INSERT LATEST REVISED PAGES, DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Second Edition..... 0.............. August 2013 Revision............... 0.3............... April 2015

Revision............... 0.1............... April 2014 Revision............... 0.4......... October 2015
Revision............... 0.2........... August 2014

THIS PUBLICATION CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page *Revision Page *Revision

No. No. No. No.

32-i - xi.................................................... 0.4 32-125..................................................... 0.4

32-xii - 32-6............................................. 0.3 32-126 - 32-138...................................... 0.3
32-7......................................................... 0.4 32-139..................................................... 0.4
32-8 - 32-22............................................ 0.3 32-140 - 32-142...................................... 0.3
32-23....................................................... 0.4 32-143..................................................... 0.4
32-24 - 32-42.......................................... 0.3 32-144 - 32-148...................................... 0.3
32-43....................................................... 0.4 32-149..................................................... 0.4
32-44 - 32-60.......................................... 0.3 32-150..................................................... 0.3
32-61....................................................... 0.4 32-151..................................................... 0.4
32-62 - 32-78.......................................... 0.3 32-152 - 32-154...................................... 0.3
32-79....................................................... 0.4 32-155..................................................... 0.4
32-80 - 32-86.......................................... 0.3 32-156 - 32-161...................................... 0.3
32-87....................................................... 0.4 32-162 - 32-163..................................... 0.4
32-88 - 32-100........................................ 0.3 32-164 - 32-166...................................... 0.3
32-101..................................................... 0.4 32-167..................................................... 0.4
32-102..................................................... 0.3 32-168 - 32-169...................................... 0.3
32-103..................................................... 0.4 32-170..................................................... 0.4
32-104..................................................... 0.3 32-171 - 32-175...................................... 0.3
32-105..................................................... 0.4 32-176 - 32-177...................................... 0.4
32-106 - 32-108...................................... 0.3 32-178 - 32-179...................................... 0.3
32-109..................................................... 0.4 32-180..................................................... 0.4
32-110..................................................... 0.3 32-181 - 32-182...................................... 0.3
32-111 - 32-112...................................... 0.4 32-183 - 32-185...................................... 0.4
32-113 - 32-120...................................... 0.3 32-186 - 32-187...................................... 0.3
32-121..................................................... 0.4 32-188 - 190............................................ 0.4
32-122..................................................... 0.3 27-i - 27-xii.............................................. 0.4
32-123..................................................... 0.4 27-xiii - 27-6............................................ 0.3
32-124..................................................... 0.3 27-7......................................................... 0.4
Page *Revision Page *Revision
No. No. No. No.

27-8......................................................... 0.3 27-108..................................................... 0.4

27-9......................................................... 0.4 27-109 - 27-112...................................... 0.3
27-10....................................................... 0.3 27-113..................................................... 0.4
27-11....................................................... 0.4 27-114 - 27-120...................................... 0.3
27-12 - 27-14.......................................... 0.3 27-121 - 27-122...................................... 0.4
27-15....................................................... 0.4 27-123 - 27-126...................................... 0.3
27-16 - 27-18.......................................... 0.3 27-127..................................................... 0.4
27-19....................................................... 0.4 27-128 - 27-144...................................... 0.3
27-20 - 27-22.......................................... 0.3 27-145..................................................... 0.4
27-23....................................................... 0.4 27-146..................................................... 0.3
27-24 - 27-26.......................................... 0.3 27-147..................................................... 0.4
27-27....................................................... 0.4 27-148 - 27-152...................................... 0.3
27-28 - 27-44.......................................... 0.3 27-153..................................................... 0.4
27-45....................................................... 0.4 27-154 - 27-164...................................... 0.3
27-46 - 27-50.......................................... 0.3 27-165..................................................... 0.4
27-51....................................................... 0.4 27-166 - 27-168...................................... 0.3
27-52 - 27-56.......................................... 0.3 27-169..................................................... 0.4
27-57....................................................... 0.4 27-170 - 27-172...................................... 0.3
27-58....................................................... 0.3 27-173..................................................... 0.4
27-59....................................................... 0.4 27-174..................................................... 0.3
27-60....................................................... 0.3 27-175..................................................... 0.4
27-61....................................................... 0.4 27-176 - 27-184...................................... 0.3
27-62 - 27-66.......................................... 0.3 27-185..................................................... 0.4
27-67....................................................... 0.4 27-186 - 27-190...................................... 0.3
27-68 - 27-70.......................................... 0.3 27-191 - 27-192...................................... 0.4
27-71....................................................... 0.4 27-193 - 27-200...................................... 0.3
27-72 - 27-74.......................................... 0.3 27-201..................................................... 0.4
27-75....................................................... 0.4 27-202..................................................... 0.3
27-76 - 27-82.......................................... 0.3 27-203 - 27-204...................................... 0.4
27-83....................................................... 0.4 27-205 - 27-211...................................... 0.3
27-84 - 27-88.......................................... 0.3 27-212..................................................... 0.4
27-89....................................................... 0.4 27-213 - 27-224...................................... 0.3
27-90....................................................... 0.3 27-225 - 22-227...................................... 0.4
27-91....................................................... 0.4 27-228..................................................... 0.3
27-92 - 27-94.......................................... 0.3 27-229..................................................... 0.4
27-95....................................................... 0.4 27-230 - 27-244...................................... 0.3
27-96 - 27-102........................................ 0.3 27-245..................................................... 0.4
27-103..................................................... 0.4 27-246 - 27-251...................................... 0.3
27-104 - 27-106...................................... 0.3 27-252 - 27-253...................................... 0.4
27-107..................................................... 0.4
 CONTENTS
VOLUME 3B
Chapter Title ATA Number
LANDING GEAR 32
FLIGHT CONTROLS 27
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
CONTENTS
Page
32-00-00 INTRODUCTION........................................................................................ 32-1

General................................................................................................................ 32-1

32-11-00 MAIN LANDING GEAR............................................................................. 32-5

General ............................................................................................................... 32-5

System Description.............................................................................................. 32-5

Component Description........................................................................................ 32-6

Shock Strut................................................................................................... 32-6

Installation of the MLG Electrical Harness................................................... 32-7

Axles............................................................................................................. 32-8

Shock Strut Torque Links.............................................................................. 32-9

Drag Strut .................................................................................................. 32-10

Stabilizer Brace........................................................................................... 32-11

Yoke............................................................................................................ 32-12

Shock Strut Fairings.................................................................................... 32-12

32-12-00 MAIN LANDING GEAR DOORS............................................................. 32-14

Introduction....................................................................................................... 32-14

General.............................................................................................................. 32-14

System Description............................................................................................ 32-15

Component Description...................................................................................... 32-16

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Page
Aft MLG Doors........................................................................................... 32-16

Aft MLG Doors Connecting Rods............................................................... 32-16

Aft Door Mechanism................................................................................... 32-17

Forward MLG Doors................................................................................... 32-18

32-12-00 DVI MAIN LANDING GEAR DOOR MECHANISMS............................. 32-19

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 32-21

Open and Lock the Landing Gear Doors..................................................... 32-23

Installation of the Main Landing Gear Lock Pins........................................ 32-23

32-20-00 NOSE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS.................................................... 32-27

Introduction....................................................................................................... 32-27

General.............................................................................................................. 32-28

Component Description...................................................................................... 32-31

Nose Landing Gear Shock Strut.................................................................. 32-31

Nose Landing Gear Trailing Arm................................................................ 32-32

NLG Drag Strut.......................................................................................... 32-32

NLG Electrical Harness.............................................................................. 32-34

32-22-00 NOSE LANDING GEAR DOORS............................................................. 32-35

Introduction....................................................................................................... 32-35

General.............................................................................................................. 32-35

System Description............................................................................................ 32-35

Component Description...................................................................................... 32-37

Aft NLG Doors........................................................................................... 32-37

32-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Page
Aft NLG Doors Connecting Rods................................................................ 32-37

NLG Forward Doors ................................................................................... 32-39

NLG Forward Doors Connecting Rods........................................................ 32-39

32-22-00 DVI NOSE LANDING GEAR DOOR MECHANISMS.............................. 32-39

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 32-41

32-25-00 NOSE LANDING GEAR GROUND LOCK............................................... 32-42

Introduction....................................................................................................... 32-42

General ............................................................................................................. 32-42

System Description ........................................................................................... 32-42

Component Description...................................................................................... 32-43

Nose Gear Ground-Lock Position Indication System (Optional).................. 32-43

32-30-00 LANDING GEAR EXTENSION AND RETRACTION.............................. 32-45

Introduction....................................................................................................... 32-45

General.............................................................................................................. 32-45

System Description............................................................................................ 32-45

32-31-00 PRIMARY EXTENSION AND RETRACTION.......................................... 32-45

Introduction....................................................................................................... 32-45

General.............................................................................................................. 32-45

Component Description...................................................................................... 32-46

Landing Gear Selector Valve....................................................................... 32-46

MLG Retraction Actuator............................................................................ 32-47

MLG Downlock Actuator............................................................................ 32-48

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Page
MLG Uplock Assembly............................................................................... 32-49

Mechanical Sequence Valve........................................................................ 32-50

Inline Restrictors......................................................................................... 32-50

MLG Solenoid Sequence Valve .................................................................. 32-51

NLG Solenoid Sequence Valve.................................................................... 32-51

NLG Retraction Actuator ........................................................................... 32-52

NLG Lock Actuator..................................................................................... 32-53

NLG Inline Restrictors................................................................................ 32-53

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 32-55

Fault Isolation............................................................................................. 32-55

Maintenance Practices........................................................................................ 32-56

32-31-00 PRIMARY EXTENSION AND RETRACTION.......................................... 32-59

Operation........................................................................................................... 32-59

Normal System Operation........................................................................... 32-59

MLG Retraction Sequence.......................................................................... 32-59

NLG Retraction Sequence........................................................................... 32-61

Landing Gear Retraction............................................................................. 32-63

Nose Landing Gear Extension..................................................................... 32-69

Landing Gear Normal Extension................................................................. 32-71

32-34-00 ALTERNATE EXTENSION SYSTEM....................................................... 32-75

Introduction....................................................................................................... 32-75

General ............................................................................................................. 32-75

32-iv FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Page
System Description ........................................................................................... 32-77

Servicing of the Alternate Landing-Gear

Extension Hydraulic Reservoir.................................................................... 32-79

Component Description...................................................................................... 32-80

Main Gear Alternate Release Handle........................................................... 32-80

Nose Gear Alternate Release Handle........................................................... 32-81

Alternate Extension Actuator...................................................................... 32-82

Alternate Extension Downlock Indicators and Switch................................. 32-83

Bypass Valve............................................................................................... 32-85

MLG Alternate Release Control Cables....................................................... 32-87

Operational Check of the Main Landing Gear

Alternate Extension Cam Assembly (MRB#323400-204)............................ 32-87

NLG Alternate Release Control Cables....................................................... 32-88

Landing Gear Inhibit Switch....................................................................... 32-89

29-21-01 HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP..................................................................... 32-91

29-21-03 HAND-PUMP LEVER............................................................................... 32-91

29-21-06 SECONDARY MLG SELECTOR VALVE.................................................. 32-93

Operation........................................................................................................... 32-97

Alternate Extension..................................................................................... 32-97

32-41-00 WHEELS................................................................................................... 32-99

General.............................................................................................................. 32-99

System Description............................................................................................ 32-99

Components Description.................................................................................... 32-99

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-v

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Page
Main Wheels............................................................................................... 32-99

Installation of the Main Wheel and Tire Assembly....................................32-101

MLG Axle Bullet......................................................................................32-101

Nosewheels...............................................................................................32-103

Installation of the Nosewheel and Tire Assembly.......................................32-103

Fill Valve Gauge (Optional).......................................................................32-105

Tire Wear..................................................................................................32-105

32-42-00 MAIN LANDING GEAR BRAKE SYSTEM...........................................32-107

Introduction.....................................................................................................32-107

General............................................................................................................32-107

System Description .........................................................................................32-107

Component Description....................................................................................32-109

Main Wheel Brake Units...........................................................................32-109

Installation of the Main Wheel Brake Units...............................................32-109

Bleed the Brakes with Main Brake System................................................32-111

Brake Bleeding Kit....................................................................................32-112

Brake Control Valve..................................................................................32-113

Fuse/Shuttle Valves...................................................................................32-114

Brake Pedals.............................................................................................32-115

Brake Control Cables................................................................................32-116

Brake Pressure Transducers.......................................................................32-117

32-44-00 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................................32-119

32-vi FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Page
Introduction.....................................................................................................32-119

General............................................................................................................32-119

System Description..........................................................................................32-119

Component Description....................................................................................32-121

Parking Brake Control Valve.....................................................................32-121

Parking Brake Hand pump.........................................................................32-121

Post SB 84-32-99 Reposition of the Parking

Brake Hand Pump Lever to the Nose Compartment...................................32-122

Charge Valve and Gauge...........................................................................32-125

Servicing of the Parking Brake Accumulator with Nitrogen......................32-125

Functional Check of Park Brake Accumulator Pre-Charge Pressure..........32-125

Parking Brake Control Quadrant...............................................................32-126

Parking Brake Control Cable.....................................................................32-127

Controls and Indications .................................................................................32-129

Interfaces..................................................................................................32-129

32-46-00 ANTI-SKID SYSTEM.............................................................................32-133

Introduction.....................................................................................................32-133

General............................................................................................................32-133

System Description .........................................................................................32-133

Components Description..................................................................................32-135

Anti-Skid Control Unit..............................................................................32-135

Skid Control Valves...................................................................................32-136

Wheel Speed Transducer...........................................................................32-137

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-vii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Page
Installation of the Wheel-Speed Transducer Electrical Harness.................32-139

Anti-Skid Switch..............................................................................................32-140

Controls and Indications .................................................................................32-141

Functional Test of the Anti-Skid Control System (Built-in Test)................32-143

Touchdown Protection Test........................................................................32-143

Wheel Speed Transducer Test....................................................................32-143

ANTI-SKID SYSTEM............................................................................................32-145

Operation.........................................................................................................32-145

Anti-Skid Operation..................................................................................32-145

Initialization..............................................................................................32-145

Individual Wheel.......................................................................................32-145

Locked Wheel...........................................................................................32-145

Interfaces..................................................................................................32-146

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES IMPORTANT

TO THE MLG BRAKING SYSTEM.......................................................................32-149

Fault Isolation..................................................................................................32-149

INBD ANTISKID and OUTBD ANTISKID (Caution lights).....................32-149

PARKING BRAKE, indication discrepancy (Caution Light).....................32-151

32-51-00 NOSEWHEEL STEERING SYSTEM......................................................32-153

Introduction.....................................................................................................32-153

General............................................................................................................32-153

System Description..........................................................................................32-153

Nosewheel Steering Hand Control.............................................................32-153

32-viii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Page
Rudder Pedal Control................................................................................32-153

Shimmy Damping......................................................................................32-153

Component Description....................................................................................32-155

Steering Control Unit (SCU).....................................................................32-155

BITE Test of the Nosewheel Steering System............................................32-155

Nosewheel Steering Hand Control.............................................................32-156

Rudder Pedal Potentiometer......................................................................32-157

Nosewheel Steering Manifold....................................................................32-159

Nosewheel Centering Mechanism..............................................................32-160

Power Steering Unit..................................................................................32-161

Removal of Power Steering Unit................................................................32-163

Steering Feedback Assembly.....................................................................32-165

Steering Switch.........................................................................................32-167

Controls and Indications .................................................................................32-167

Rigging of the RVDT................................................................................32-167

Operation.........................................................................................................32-169

Normal System Operation................................................................................32-169

Operation in the Passive Mode..................................................................32-169

Operational Test of the Nosewheel Steering System..................................32-170

Functional Test of the Nosewheel Steering System....................................32-170

32-61-00 PROXIMITY SENSOR SYSTEM ...........................................................32-173

Introduction.....................................................................................................32-173

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-ix

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Page
General ...........................................................................................................32-173

System Description .........................................................................................32-173

Component Description....................................................................................32-175

Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit..............................................................32-175

Built-In-Test-Equipment............................................................................32-175

Installation of the Proximity Sensor Electronic-Unit.................................32-176

Retrieval of Data from the Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit (PSEU).......32-176

Erase the Data from the Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit (PSEU)...........32-177

Operational Check of the Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit......................32-177

Proximity Sensors.....................................................................................32-179

Installation of the Proximity Sensors.........................................................32-180

Rigging of the Proximity Sensors..............................................................32-180

Controls and Indications..................................................................................32-181

Landing Gear Control................................................................................32-181

Landing Gear Indications..........................................................................32-181

Alternate Downlock Indications.......................................................................32-181

Operational Check of the Weight On Wheels System ...............................32-183

32-00-00 APPENDIX..............................................................................................32-184

Maintenance Consideration..............................................................................32-184

Safety Precautions.....................................................................................32-184

Main Landing Gear Lower Bearing Seal....................................................32-185

Standard Configuration for an ‘On-Jacks’

Weight-On-Wheels (WOW) Condition.......................................................32-185

32-x FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Page
Standard Configuration for an ‘On-Ground’
Weight-Off-Wheels (WOFFW) Condition.................................................32-185

32-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT..................................................32-186

32-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................32-188

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-xi

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page
32-1 Landing Gear Functional Block Diagram...................................................32-2

32-2 Main Landing Gears - Details....................................................................32-4

32-4 Main Landing Gear - Shock Strut..............................................................32-6

32-3 Shock Strut................................................................................................32-6

32-5 MLG Axle.................................................................................................32-8

32-6 Shock Strut Torque Links...........................................................................32-9

32-7 MLG Drag Strut .....................................................................................32-10

32-9 MLG Stabilizer Brace..............................................................................32-11

32-8 MLG Ground Lock Pin............................................................................32-11

32-10 MLG Yoke and Actuator..........................................................................32-12

32-11 Shock Strut Fairings................................................................................32-12

32-12 CDL - MLG Shock Strut Fairings............................................................32-13

32-13 Main Gear Doors.....................................................................................32-14

32-14 MLG Doors - Detail................................................................................32-15

32-15 MLG Aft Doors and Connecting Rods.....................................................32-16

32-16 MLG Doors and Connecting Rods...........................................................32-17

32-17 Forward MLG Doors and Connecting Rods.............................................32-18

32-18 Landing Gear Control Panel....................................................................32-20

32-19 Proximity Sensor.....................................................................................32-21

32-20 Landing Gear Doors - Open and Lock/Unlock and Close (1 of 2)............32-22

32-21 Landing Gear Doors - Open and Lock/Unlock and Close (2 of 2)............32-24

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-xiii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure Title Page

32-22 Nose Landing Gear and Doors.................................................................32-26

32-23 NLG Dressed Shock Strut Assembly (1 of 2)...........................................32-28

32-24 NLG Dressed Shock Strut Assembly (2 of 2)...........................................32-29

32-25 NLG Shock Strut Assembly.....................................................................32-30

32-26 NLG Shock Strut Assembly.....................................................................32-31

32-27 NLG Trailing Arm...................................................................................32-32

32-28 NLG Drag Strut.......................................................................................32-32

32-29 NLG Drag Strut.......................................................................................32-33

32-30 NLG Latest Electrical Harness................................................................32-34

32-31 NLG Aft Doors and Connecting Rods......................................................32-36

32-32 CDL - Nose Landing Gear Aft Doors.......................................................32-37

32-33 NLG Forward Doors and Connecting Rods..............................................32-38

32-34 Main Landing Gear Control Panel...........................................................32-40

32-35 NLG Door Proximity Sensor....................................................................32-41

32-36 NLG Ground-Lock Control Handle..........................................................32-42

32-37 Nose Gear Ground-Lock Position Indication System...............................32-43

32-38 Landing Gear Block Diagram..................................................................32-44

32-39 Landing Gear Selector Valve - Detail.......................................................32-46

32-40 MLG Retraction Actuator - Detail...........................................................32-47

32-41 MLG Downlock Actuator - Detail............................................................32-48

32-43 MLG Uplock Actuator - Detail................................................................32-49

32-42 MLG Uplock Assembly...........................................................................32-49

32-xiv FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Figure Title Page
32-44 MLG Doors Inline Restrictors.................................................................32-50

32-45 Landing Gear Doors Solenoid Sequence Valve........................................32-51

32-46 NLG Doors Sequence Valve.....................................................................32-51

32-48 NLG Retraction and Lock Actuator.........................................................32-52

32-47 NLG Retraction Actuator.........................................................................32-52

32-50 NLG Inline Restrictor..............................................................................32-53

32-49 NLG Lock Actuator.................................................................................32-53

32-51 Landing Gear - Controls and Indications.................................................32-54

32-52 (32-31-00) UP Selection Doors Open......................................................32-58

32-53 (32-31-00) Gear UP and Doors Locked Closed........................................32-60

32-54 (32-31-00) Landing Gear Retraction (Sheet 1 of 3)..................................32-62

32-55 (32-31-00) Landing Gear Retraction (Sheet 2 of 3)..................................32-64

32-56 (32-31-00) Landing Gear Retraction (Sheet 3 of 3)..................................32-66

32-57 Initial DOWN Selection Doors Opening..................................................32-68

32-58 Selection Completed Doors Closed..........................................................32-70

32-59 (32-31-00) Landing Gear Normal Extension............................................32-72

32-60 Alternate Extension System Block Diagram............................................32-74

32-61 Alternate Extension Hydraulic Synoptic..................................................32-76

32-62 Servicing of the Auxiliary System Hydraulic Reservoir...........................32-78

32-63 Main Gear Alternate Release Handle.......................................................32-80

32-64 NLG Alternate Release Handle................................................................32-81

32-65 Alternate Extension Actuator...................................................................32-82

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-xv

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure Title Page

32-66 Landing Gear Downlock Verification Switch...........................................32-83

32-67 Bypass Valve and Alternate Release Cables.............................................32-84

32-68 MLG Alternate Extension System Cam Mechanism Assembly.................32-86

32-69 NLG Alternate Release Cable..................................................................32-88

32-70 Landing Gear Alternate Release - Inhibit Switch.....................................32-89

32-71 Hydraulic Hand Pump and Hand Pump Lever..........................................32-90

32-72 Secondary MLG Selector Valve - Removal and Installation.....................32-92

32-73 LG Downlock Verification Lights - Controls and Indications...................32-94

32-74 Landing Gear Extension and Retraction...................................................32-96

32-75 Main Wheel and Tire Assembly...............................................................32-98

32-76 Main Wheel and Tire Assembly - Removal and Installation.................. 32-100

32-77 MLG Axle Bullet.................................................................................. 32-101

32-78 
Nosewheel and Tire Assembly............................................................... 32-102

32-79 Fill Valve Gauge................................................................................... 32-104

32-80 Brakes System Hydraulic Synoptic....................................................... 32-106

32-82 Main Wheel Brake Unit - Removal and Installation.............................. 32-108

32-81 Brake Wear Indicator Pins.................................................................... 32-108

32-83 Main Landing Gear Brake System - Bleed............................................ 32-110

32-84 Brake Bleeding Kit............................................................................... 32-112

32-85 CDL - Brake Assembly Wear Indicator Pin........................................... 32-112

32-86 Brake Control Valve.............................................................................. 32-113

32-88 Fuse - Shuttle Valve.............................................................................. 32-114

32-xvi FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Figure Title Page
32-87 Fuse - Shuttle Valve.............................................................................. 32-114

32-89 Brake Pedals......................................................................................... 32-115

32-90 Brake Control Cables............................................................................ 32-116

32-91 Brake Pressure Transducers.................................................................. 32-117

32-92 Parking Brake Hydraulic System.......................................................... 32-118

32-93 Park Brake Control Valve...................................................................... 32-120

32-94 Park Brake Control Valve...................................................................... 32-120

32-95 Parking Brake Handle Reposition......................................................... 32-122

32-96 CDL - Parking Brake Hand Pump Handle............................................. 32-123

32-97 Parking Brake Accumulator.................................................................. 32-124

32-98 Charge Valve and Gauge....................................................................... 32-125

32-99 Park Brake Control Quadrant................................................................ 32-126

32-100 Parking Brake Control Cable................................................................ 32-127

32-101 Parking Brake Micro-Switch................................................................. 32-128

32-102 Controls and Indications - Parking Brake System................................. 32-130

32-103 CDL - Parking Brake Pressure Indications............................................ 32-131

32-104 Anti-Skid System - Hydraulic Schematic.............................................. 32-132

32-105 Anti-Skid System Control Unit............................................................. 32-134

32-106 Anti-Skid System Control Unit ............................................................ 32-134

32-108 Skid Control Valve ............................................................................... 32-136

32-107 Skid Control Valve................................................................................ 32-136

32-110 Wheel Speed Transducer....................................................................... 32-137

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-xvii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure Title Page

32-109 Wheel Speed Transducer....................................................................... 32-137

32-111 Wheel Speed Transducer Harness - Removal/Installation...................... 32-138

32-112 Anti-Skid Switch.................................................................................. 32-140

32-113 Anti-Skid Caution Lights...................................................................... 32-141

32-114 Anti-Skid System Functional Test......................................................... 32-142

32-115 Anti-Skid System Electrical Schematic................................................. 32-144

32-116 
ARCDU CDS ANTISKID System........................................................ 32-148

32-118 ASC - Current Faults............................................................................ 32-148

32-117 PSEU - Present Faults........................................................................... 32-148

32-119 ASC - No Current Faults....................................................................... 32-150

32-120 Parking Brake Caution Light................................................................ 32-150

32-121 Nosewheel Steering System Schematic................................................. 32-152

32-122 Steering Control Unit............................................................................ 32-154

32-123 Steering Control Unit............................................................................ 32-154

32-124 Nosewheel Steering Hand Control ....................................................... 32-156

32-125 Rudder Forward Assembly (Right Side)................................................ 32-157

32-126 Nosewheel Steering Hydraulic Synoptic............................................... 32-158

32-127 
Nosewheel Centering Actuator.............................................................. 32-160

32-128 
Nosewheel Centering Mechanism......................................................... 32-160

32-129 Power Steering Unit.............................................................................. 32-161

32-130 Hydraulic Steering Motor..................................................................... 32-164

32-131 Steering Feedback Assembly................................................................. 32-164

32-xviii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Figure Title Page
32-132 Nosewheel Steering Switch................................................................... 32-166

32-133 Nosewheel Steering System Caution Lights.......................................... 32-166

32-134 Nosewheel Steering - Electrical Schematic........................................... 32-168

32-135 PSEU Input and Output Block Diagram................................................ 32-172

32-136 Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit......................................................... 32-174

32-137 
Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit......................................................... 32-175

32-138 Proximity Sensors - Locations.............................................................. 32-178

32-139 Proximity Sensors................................................................................. 32-179

32-140 CAWP with WOW Caution................................................................... 32-182

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-xix

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR

32-00-00 INTRODUCTION
The landing gear supports the weight of the aircraft on the ground. It is also used to
maneuver the aircraft while on the ground.

GENERAL
The landing gear is electrically controlled, if the gear is not extended and the aircraft is
hydraulically operated and mechanically locked. in a landing configuration.

The tricycle gear is a retractable dual wheel A Proximity Sensor Electronics Unit (PSEU)
installation. The main gear retract aft into monitors and controls the operation of the landing
the nacelles, with the nose gear retracting gear components.
forward into the nose section. The gear
doors completely enclose the landing gear An alternate landing gear extension system can be
when it is retracted and partially enclose used to extend the gear if the primary extension
the gear bays when it is extended. Flight system fails. There is also an alternate down lock
compartment advisory lights show position verification system.
of gear and doors. An aural warning sounds

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-1

32-2 32  LANDING GEAR

PILOT RUDDER
WOW 1 NW HAND CONTROL PEDALS
WOW 2 CENTER

DASH 8 Q400
ALTERNATE
EXTENSION
INDICATION

STEERING
CONTROL UNIT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

LANDING GEAR

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SELECTOR CONTROL & NLG SOLENOID
VALVE SEQUENCE VALVE
INDICATION PSEU

ANTI-SKID
CONTROL
UNIT
MLG SOLENOID
SEQUENCE VALVES

LEFT MLG UPLOCK RIGHT MLG UPLOCK

DOWNLOCK 1 DOWNLOCK 1
DOWNLOCK 2 DOWNLOCK 2

NGDL 1
LEFT NOSE RIGHT
NGDL 2
MLG DOOR MLG
NGL 1
AFT DOOR AFT DOOR
NGL 2

Figure 32-1.  Landing Gear Functional Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Refer to Figure 32-1. Landing Gear Functional NOTES
Block Diagram.

The landing gear system is comprised of the

following subsystems:
•• Main Landing Gear (MLG) and doors
•• Nose Landing Gear (NLG) and doors
•• Landing gear extension and retraction
•• Wheels and brakes
•• Steering system
•• Position and warning.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

NOTE
Left gear shown.
Right gear similar.

A 6
7
5
8

4
9

LEGEND
1. Drag Strut
FWD
2. Shock Strut
3. Stabilizer Brace
4. Stabilizer Lock
5. Alternate Extension Actuator 2
6. Yoke
7. Retraction Actuator
8. Uplock Assembly
9. Door Operative Mechanism.
1

Figure 32-2.  Main Landing Gears - Details

32-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-11-00 MAIN LANDING An up-lock assembly is attached to the top aft
section of the wheel well. It locks the MLG in
GEAR the retracted position.

The shock strut piston absorbs landing forces.

GENERAL
A jack pad on the bottom of the shock strut allows
Refer to Figure 32-2. Main Landing Gears
for jacking the aircraft from a single point.
- Details.
Proximity sensors send signals to the PSEU of
Each MLG assembly is installed on the airframe
the status of the MLG.
structure in the wheel well of the related engine
nacelle. Each of the MLG has two wheel and
A proximity sensor on the uplock assembly
tire assemblies.
signals the gear is up and locked.
The main landing gear includes the listed
Two proximity sensors on the stabilizer brace
components:
send signals to the PSEU when the MLG is
•• Drag strut down and locked.
•• Shock strut Two proximity sensors on the torque links
•• Stabilizer brace send signals to the PSEU of Weight-On-
Wheels (WOW) or a Weight-Off-Wheels
•• Lock actuator (WOFW) condition.
•• Alternate extension actuator
•• Yoke assembly
•• Retraction actuator
•• Uplock assembly
•• Door operating mechanism.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer to Figure 32-2. Main Landing Gears
- Details.

A retraction actuator is attached to the yoke and the

shock strut, it is used to extend and retract the MLG.

A locking actuator on the stabilizer brace holds

the MLG in the down position, it will also
unlock the stabilizer brace to allow the main
gear to be retracted.

An auxiliary extension actuator is attached

between aircraft structure in the aft section of
the wheel well, and to the forward face of the
yoke. The auxiliary extension actuator extends
the MLG during an alternate extension sequence.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Shock Strut
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-3. Shock Strut.
•• Figure 32-4. M
 ain Landing Gear -
Shock Strut.

The shock strut is part of the main gear

assembly. The dressed shock strut is attached
between the yoke and the drag.

The shock strut outer cylinder is a Y-shaped

component with a single stage nitrogen and oil
filled shock absorbing piston fitted inside a cylinder.

The function of the shock strut is to absorb the

landing forces of aircraft landings.

1 Figure 32-3.  Shock Strut

FWD

2 10
LEGEND
1. Electrical Harness
11 2. Drag Strut
3
3. Hydraulic Brake Line
4. Shock Strut
12 5. Upper Torque Link
4 6. Shock Strut Piston
5 7. Lower Torque Link
6 8. Axle
7 13 9. Jack Pad
10. Fairings
11. Electrical Harness
12. Uplock Roller
8 13. Proximity Sensors
14
14. Wheel and Brake Assembly
15. Hydraulic Brake Line.
9 15

Figure 32-4.  Main Landing Gear - Shock Strut

32-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Installation of the MLG Electrical NOTES
Harness
The main landing-gear (MLG) electrical harnesses
includes the weight-on-wheels and the wheel speed
sensors electrical harnesses are installed on the
drag strut. You can also find them on the shock
strut. The downlock electrical harness is installed
on the MLG stabilizer brace assembly.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-7

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Axles NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-5. MLG Axle.

The axle is attached to the shock strut piston

with a barrel nut and piston plug.

The axle is made of steel with chrome-plated

bearing surfaces. The axle is removable and
interchangeable.

Figure 32-5.  MLG Axle

32-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Shock Strut Torque Links NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-6. Shock Strut Torque Links.

The lower torque link is attached to two lugs

on the rear of the shock strut piston. The upper
torque link is attached to two lugs on the
bottom of the outer cylinder.

The torque links, made of heat-treated steel, are

the structural link between the shock strut outer
cylinder and the piston.

Rotation of the shock strut piston and the axle

is prevented by these torque links.

The upper torque links are the targets for the

WOW sensors.

LEGEND
1. Lower Torque Link
2. Upper Torque Link
3. Axle.

Figure 32-6.  Shock Strut Torque Links

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-9

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Drag Strut The electrical harnesses for the proximity sensors,

wheel speed transducers, and hydraulic pipes for
Refer to Figure 32-7. MLG Drag Strut. the brakes attach to the drag strut with brackets.
The drag strut is attached at the lower end to A grounding point is fitted to the top of the
the shock strut outer cylinder. It is attached drag strut.
with a lubricated hinge point. The upper end
of the drag strut is attached to the airframe The landing gear pivots at the drag strut upper
structure of the forward section of the wheel end hinge during retraction and extension.
well with a lubricated hinge point.

The drag strut is a fixed length tubular component.

A bracket assembly near the top end provides an
attach point for the forward door linkage.

FWD

A
FWD

MAIN LANDING GEAR

5
LEGEND
1. Grounding Point
2. Electrical Harness
3. Drag Strut NOTE
4. Hydraulic Brake Line Left gear shown.
5. Shock Strut. Right gear similar. A

Figure 32-7.  MLG Drag Strut

32-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Stabilizer Brace
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-9. MLG Stabilizer Brace.
•• Figure 32-8. MLG Ground Lock Pin.

The stabilizer brace is attached to the airframe

structure in the forward section of the wheel
well with two lubricated hinge points. The aft
section of the stabilizer strut is attached to the
yoke with two lubricated hinge points.

The stabilizer strut has an overcenter link attached

between the two sections of the stabilizer strut.
The overcenter link supplies a mechanical lock
for the MLG in the down position. Figure 32-8.  MLG Ground Lock Pin

LEGEND
1. Downlock Actuator
2. Overcenter Link
3. Yoke
4. Lock Spring
A
5. Proximity Sensors
6. Stabilizer Brace.
2

FWD

MAIN LANDING GEAR

NOTE 4
FWD
Left gear shown.
Right gear similar.
A

Figure 32-9.  MLG Stabilizer Brace

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-11

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Yoke Shock Strut Fairings

Refer to Figure 32-10. MLG Yoke and Actuator. Refer to Figure 32-11. Shock Strut Fairings.

The top of the yoke is attached to the rear spar The shock strut fairings are installed on the
by two lubricated hinge points. The bottom of shock struts of the MLG.
the yoke is attached to the top of the shock strut
by two lubricated hinge points. Mounting lugs on the outer cylinder of the
shock strut allow installation of the aluminum
The yoke attaches to the stabilizer brace at the fairings to the MLG with standard hardware.
cross beam with two lubricated hinge points.
The function of the fairings is to reduce the
The retraction actuator cylinder attaches to the cross aerodynamic drag induced by the extended
beam of the yoke with two lubricated hinge points. MLG in flight.

The rod end of the alternate retraction actuator

is attached to lugs at the top of the yoke with
lubricated hinge points.

The yoke assembly is an H-shaped structural

component.

1 2

Aft Fairings Fwd Fairings

LEGEND
1. Aft Fairings
2. Fwd Fairings.

Figure 32-10.  MLG Yoke and Actuator Figure 32-11.  Shock Strut Fairings

32-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

SYSTEM 32 1. NUMBER OF PARTS REQUIRED FOR ALL FLIGHT
CONDITIONS EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN COLUMN 2.
LANDING GEAR
ATA
SUB-SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION 2. REMARKS AND/OR EXCEPTIONS

32---1 MLG SHOCK STRUT FAIRINGS 14 All MLG fairings may be missing provided
performance limited weights obtained from the
DOT approved Airplane Flight Manual,
excluding Sub-Sections 5.7, 5.11 and 5.12, are
reduced by 450 kg (1,000 lb).
Any or all of the following MLG fairings may be
missing provided performance limited weights
obtained from the DOT approved Airplane
Flight Manual, excluding Sub-Sections 5.7,
5.11 and 5.12, are reduced by 340 kg (750 lb).

46712 Leading Edge, Center

46702 Trailing Edge, Sides
46703 or 46730 Center Aft
46711 or 46731 Lower
NOTE
1. MLG fairings 46702, 46703 or 46730,
and, 46711 or 46731, must be removed
if MLG fairing 46712 is removed.
2. MLG fairing 46711 or 46731 must be
removed if MLG fairing 46703 or 46730
is removed.
Any or all of the following MLG fairings may be
missing provided performance limited weights
obtained from the DOT approved Airplane
Flight Manual, excluding Sub-Sections 5.7,
5.11 and 5.12, are reduced by 160 kg (350 lb).

46709 Leading Edge, Upper Center

46710 Trailing Edge, Upper Center

Figure 32-12.  CDL - MLG Shock Strut Fairings

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-13

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

32-12-00 MAIN LANDING The status of the doors is shown on the LANDING
GEAR control panel in the flight compartment.
GEAR DOORS
The MLG in Figure 32-13 include the
components that are listed below:
INTRODUCTION
1. Forward door
The four doors on each engine nacelle provide
an aerodynamic enclosure for the MLG when 2. Aft door
it is in the retracted position.
3. Push rods
GENERAL 4. Aft door
5. Door seal
Refer to Figure 32-13. Main Gear Doors.
6. Forward door
Two mechanically operated doors enclose the 7. Door seal
forward section of the MLG wheel well and
open and close with movement of the gear. 8. Door seal
9. Forward door connecting rods
Two hydraulically operated doors enclose
the aft section of the MLG wheel well. The 10. Door seal.
aft doors are closed when the MLG is fully
retracted and extended. They will open
whenever the gear is in transition.

3
2 4

FWD
1

5
6

10 7
9 8

Figure 32-13.  Main Gear Doors

32-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The aft doors are opened and closed by a single
hydraulic actuator, with a mechanical sequence valve.
Refer to Figure 32-14. MLG Doors - Detail.
Lock links supply an overcenter lock for the
The forward doors are operated by mechanical doors in the closed position.
links attached to the drag strut.
A proximity sensor sends a signal to the PSEU.
When the MLG is extended the forward doors
will open. When the MLG is retracted the doors
will close.

4
5 6
3
7
8
9

10
2

FWD LEGEND
1. Forward Doors Connecting Rods
2. Forward Door
3. Alternate Extension Actuator
4. Yoke
NOTE 5. Mechanical Sequence Valve
Left gear shown. 6. Retraction Actuator
Right gear similar. 7. Uplock Assembly
8. Aft Doors Mechanism
9. Alternate Release Arm
10. Aft Door.

Figure 32-14.  MLG Doors - Detail

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-15

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Aft MLG Doors Connecting Rods

Refer to Figure 32-15. MLG Aft Doors and
Aft MLG Doors Connecting Rods.
Refer to Figure 32-15. MLG Aft Doors and
Connecting Rods. The connecting rods are installed between the
pivot arm assembly and attached to the forward
The two aft doors have a hinge on both the forward hinges of the aft doors.
and aft corners. The doors are symmetrical and
meet at the center line when closed.

The aft doors are opened and closed by a single

hydraulic actuator and a linkage mechanism.
The mechanism is attached to the forward
hinges of the doors.

1
2 3 4
A

7
FWD

LEGEND
1. Mechanical Sequence Valve
2. Pivot Arm
3. Tension Spring
4. Actuator
NOTE 5. Lock Link
6. Aft Door
Left side shown.
7. Proximity Sensor
Right side similar. 8. Connecting Rods.

6
fs661a01.cgm
A

Figure 32-15.  MLG Aft Doors and Connecting Rods

32-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Aft Door Mechanism During the alternate extension of the MLG, the
alternate release arm rotates to move the lock
Refer to Figure 32-16. MLG Doors and links out from an over center position. A tension
Connecting Rods. spring attached to the pivot arm and to the side
of the aft section of the wheel well, provides the
The pivot arm is attached to a frame assembly force to open the doors in alternate operation.
on the left side aft section of the wheel well.
The pivot arm has hinge points to form a bell The system also utilizes a proximity sensor which
crank between the push rods and the lock links. is installed on 2 brackets below the lock link.
The lock links are attached to the bottom of the The function of the aft MLG doors mechanism
pivot arm as well as the side of the aft section is to open and close the aft MLG doors.
of the wheel well.

1
3

2
4

8
7

LEGEND
1. Mechanical Sequence Valve
2. Pivot Arm
3. Tension Spring
4. Actuator
5. Lock Link
6. Proximity Sensor
7. Connecting Rods
8. Alternate Release Arm.

Figure 32-16.  MLG Doors and Connecting Rods

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-17

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Forward MLG Doors

Refer to Figure 32-17. Forward MLG Doors
and Connecting Rods.

The doors are connected to the bottom of the

center section of the engine nacelle by hinges.

Each door has a hinge on the forward and aft

corner. The doors are symmetrical and meet
at the engine nacelle center line when closed.

The forward doors are operated by adjustable A

connecting rods attached between the drag strut
and the forward doors.

LEGEND
B
1. Door Fitting
2. Push Rods
3. Forward Door
4. Bracket Assembly
5. Drag Strut.

D A MLG DOOR
FW

FWD
4
B
5

Figure 32-17.  Forward MLG Doors and Connecting Rods

32-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-12-00 DVI MAIN NOTES
LANDING GEAR DOOR
MECHANISMS
Inspect the door mechanisms for:
•• Damage
•• Corrosion
•• Cracks
•• Failure
•• Defects
•• Hydraulic Leaks
•• Correct Installation
•• Security.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-19

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

L. DOOR N. DOOR R. DOOR MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

LEFT NOSE RIGHT
RIGHT
“Amber” Door Open
LEFT NOSE RIGHT
RIGHT

LANDING GEAR
LANDING GEA R
DN UP

LOCK
RELEASE HORN
MUTE

TEST

fs507a01.cgm

Figure 32-18.  Landing Gear Control Panel

32-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS The proximity sensor sends a signal to the
PSEU, which will send a signal to the
Refer to: LANDING GEAR control panel. This will show
the status of the aft doors.
•• Figure 32-18. Landing Gear Control Panel.
When the doors are open the amber L DOOR
•• Figure 32-19. Proximity Sensor.
and R DOOR lights come on.
A proximity sensor for the aft doors is installed
on a bracket below the aft door mechanism.

1
2 3 4

LEGEND
1. Mechanical Sequence Valve
8 2. Pivot Arm
3. Tension Spring
4. Actuator
7 5. Lock Link
6. Aft Door
7. Proximity Sensor
8. Push Rods.

FWD

6
fs661a01.cgm

Figure 32-19.  Proximity Sensor

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-21

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Handle
A 2. Access Door
3. Access Door
4. Guard
5. Switch
6. Handle.

br842a01.dg, gg, 04/01/99

3
6
4
5

B VIEW LOOKING UP B VIEW LOOKING UP

DOOR OPEN DOOR CLOSED

Figure 32-20.  Landing Gear Doors - Open and Lock/Unlock and Close (1 of 2)

32-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Open and Lock the Landing 5. At the forward end of the LANDING GEAR
ALTERNATE EXTENSION access door
Gear Doors pull the NOSE L/G RELEASE handle to
The following is an abbreviated description of open the NLG doors.
the maintenance practice and is intended for
6. Install the lock pin through the hole in the
training purposes only. For a more detailed
guard and the door mechanism in the NLG
description of the practice, refer to the task in
wheel well.
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
7. Install the lock pins in the hole in the brackets
Refer to: of the MLG doors. Make sure that the lock
pins go through the hole in the brackets.
•• Figure 32-20. Landing Gear Doors - Open
and Lock/Unlock and Close (1 of 2).
Installation of the Main Landing
•• Figure 32-21. Landing Gear Doors - Open Gear Lock Pins
and Lock/Unlock and Close (2 of 2).
The following is an abbreviated description of
WARNING the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
MAKE SURE THAT THE description of the practice, refer to the task in
AREA AROUND THE NOSE the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
LANDING GEAR (NLG) DOORS
IS CLEAR OF PERSONNEL WARNING
AND EQUIPMENT. DO THIS
BEFORE YOU OPERATE THE DO NOT USE FORCE WHEN
ALTERNATE EXTENSION YOU INSTALL OR REMOVE
RELEASE HANDLE OF THE THE LOCKPIN. IF FORCE IS
NLG. IF YOU DO NOT DO THIS, NECESSARY, THE LANDING
YOU CAN CAUSE INJURIES GEAR MAY NOT BE SAFE AND
TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE CAN RETRACT ACCIDENTALLY.
TO THE EQUIPMENT. THIS CAN CAUSE INJURIES TO
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO
Open the landing gear doors as follows: THE AIRCRAFT.

1. In the flight compartment ceiling, above 1. Install the MLG lockpins in the lockpin holes
the co-pilot position, lift the guard then set of the stabilizer down-lock mechanism.
the LG DOWN SELECT INHIBIT switch
2. If you cannot put the MLG lockpin in its hole
to the INHIBIT position.
easily, the main landing gear is not safe. To
2. I n t h e f l i g h t c o m p a r t m e n t c e i l i n g , ensure the safety of the aircraft and personnel,
above the co-pilot position, fully open support the weight of the aircraft with the
the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE appropriate nose or main jack BEFORE
RELEASE access door. investigating the cause of the problem.
3. Behind the access door, pull the MAIN L/R
RELEASE handle to open the MLG doors.
4. On the flight compartment floor, open
the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE
EXTENSION access door.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-23

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Bracket

Lock Pin

Hide

TRONAIR

REMOV E

Lock Pin
REMOVE

Figure 32-21.  Landing Gear Doors - Open and Lock/Unlock and Close (2 of 2)

32-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-25

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

2
A

LEGEND
1. Forward Door
2. Forward Door Operating Mechanism
3. Shock Strut Assembly
4. Aft Door
3 5. Aft Door Actuating Linkage.
1

FWD

Figure 32-22.  Nose Landing Gear and Doors

32-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-20-00 NOSE LANDING NOTES
GEAR AND DOORS
INTRODUCTION
Refer to Figure 32-22. Nose Landing Gear and
Doors.

The NLG absorbs the shock of landing and

gives stability and direction control during
aircraft taxi.

The NLG doors enclose the retracted NLG and

add to the aerodynamic efficiency of the aircraft.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-27

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

32-21-00 NOSE LANDING The nose landing gear assembly is comprised

of the following:
GEAR •• Shock strut assembly
GENERAL •• Drag strut assembly and
The NLG is installed in the wheel well in the •• Harness electrical.
nose fuselage. It is located forward of the
forward pressure bulkhead.

The NLG retracts forward. When retracted, the

aft doors will enclose it in the wheel well.

Electrical Harness

Electrical Harness

Steering Gearbox

Upper Cable Guide

Assembly

Trunnion Arm
Taxi Light
Location

Centering Actuator

WOW Proximity
Switch Cover

Tow-Fitting
Assembly

Figure 32-23.  NLG Dressed Shock Strut Assembly (1 of 2)

32-28 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

A

Outer Cylinder

Jacking Point

Inner
Cylinder

Trailing Arm

A
Piston
Assembly

Link

DETAIL A-A

Figure 32-24.  NLG Dressed Shock Strut Assembly (2 of 2)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-29

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Downlock Actuator. 11. Electrical Harness.
2. Upper Cable Guide Assembly. 12. Retraction Actuator.
3. Upper Drag Strut. 13. Steering Gearbox.
4. Lower Drag Strut. 14. Trunnion Arms.
5. Steering Hydraulic Lines. 15. Outer Cylinder.
6. Taxi Light. 16. Centering Spring.
7. Proximity Sensor Cover. 17. Piston Assembly.
8. Tow-Fitting Assembly. 18. Link.
9. Trailing Arm. 19. Axle.
10. Wheels. 20. Jacking Point.

1
FWD

11

2
12
3

13

4 14

15
6

16
7
17

18

9
NOTE
19
Left wheel removed
for clarity. 20
10

ft273a02.cgm A

Figure 32-25.  NLG Shock Strut Assembly

32-30 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A low pressure valve located on the top surface
of the inner cylinder, is used to service the piston
Nose Landing Gear Shock Strut assembly with hydraulic fluid and dry nitrogen.
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-25. N
 LG Shock Strut
Assembly.
•• Figure 32-26. N
 LG Shock Strut
Assembly.

The NLG shock strut is attached to the NLG

wheel well structure, retraction actuator, and
the NLG drag strut.

The shock strut has an outer cylinder, inner

cylinder, piston assembly, a link and a trailing arm.

The trailing arm has a jacking point for jacking

of the NLG.

Two trunnion arms are installed at the upper

rear portion of the outer cylinder.

The retraction actuator is attached to the mounting

lugs on the top of the right trunnion arm.

At the top forward side of the outer cylinder,

there are two mounting lugs. The lower drag
strut is attached to these two mounting lugs.

The taxi light is installed on the bottom right

side of the outer cylinder.
Figure 32-26.  NLG Shock Strut Assembly
The power steering hydraulic motor and
gearbox assembly are installed on the top of
the shock strut between the trunnion arms.

The NLG steering centering actuator assembly,

steering sensor, and the centering cam are installed
on the aft lower side of the outer cylinder.

The outer cylinder has attachment points for

the electrical harnesses. The WOW proximity
sensors are installed on the inner cylinder
above the tow fitting assembly.

The piston assembly in the inner cylinder is

attached to a link. This link is installed between
two lugs on the trailing arm.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-31

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Nose Landing Gear Trailing Arm NLG Drag Strut

Refer to Figure 32-27. NLG Trailing Arm. Refer to:
•• The NLG Trailing Arm is part of the •• Figure 32-28. NLG Drag Strut.
nose gear shock strut assembly.
•• Figure 32-29. NLG Drag Strut.
•• The forward end of the trailing arm is
attached to the steerable inner cylinder. The NLG drag strut is attached to the wheel
well structure, retraction actuator, lock
•• The midpoint of the trailing arm
actuator, and the shock strut.
is attached to the shock strut piston
assembly with a link assembly.
The drag strut assembly contains the following
•• The link assembly is installed between subcomponents:
two lugs on the trailing arm.
•• Upper drag strut
•• The aft end of the trailing arm carries
the removable nosewheels and axle. •• Lower drag strut
•• The trailing arm has a jacking point for •• Pivot tube assembly
jacking the NLG, for tire change, and •• Spring assemblies (2)
servicing.
•• Link assembly
•• The link assembly transmits ground
loads from the trailing arm to the piston •• Upper lock link and
assembly. •• Lower lock link.

Figure 32-27.  NLG Trailing Arm Figure 32-28.  NLG Drag Strut

32-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

The two spring and the pivot tube assemblies The lower lock link is installed on the lower drag
are installed on the upper drag strut. The pivot strut and is connected to the upper lock link. The
tube assembly has six arms: upper lock link is installed on the upper drag strut
and is connected to the lock link assembly.
•• Two for the spring assemblies
•• One for the downlock actuator The over centering action of the upper and lower
lock links makes a mechanical lock when the gear
•• One for the link assembly is in the retracted and the extended positions.
•• One for the emergency uplock release
mechanism and The function of the drag strut assembly is to
stabilize the shock strut in either the retracted
•• One for the ground lock mechanism. or the extended position.

FWD
B

2
1

A NOSE LANDING GEAR

10
3

8 4 LEGEND
5 1. Pivot Tube Assembly
2. Pivot Tube Arm Downlock Actuator
FWD for Ground Lock Attachment Point
3. Pivot Tube Arm for Emergency
Uplock Release
7
4. Lock Link Assembly
6 5. NLG Alternate Lock Proximity Sensor
6. Lower Drag Strut
7. NLG Primary-Lock Proximity Sensor
8. Upper Lock Link
9. Upper Drag Strut
B
ft149a01.cgm
10. Spring Assembly.

Figure 32-29.  NLG Drag Strut

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-33

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

NLG Electrical Harness

The Nose Landing Gear electrical harnesses
are attached to the NLG wheel well structure,
shock strut, and the drag strut.

Three harnesses on the shock strut give power/

signal input for the listed components:
•• WOW1/Taxi light harness
•• WOW2/Centering actuator harness and
•• Nosewheel steering harness.

Figure 32-30.  NLG Latest Electrical Harness

32-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-22-00 NOSE LANDING NOTES
GEAR DOORS
INTRODUCTION
The NLG doors enclose the retracted NLG in
the forward fuselage wheel well. They add to
the aerodynamic efficiency of the aircraft.

GENERAL
The NLG doors are comprised of the following
components:
•• NLG forward doors
•• NLG forward doors connecting rods
•• NLG aft doors and
•• NLG aft doors connecting rods.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The two NLG forward doors are hydraulically
operated and close after the gear is extended
or retracted.

The two NLG aft doors are connected to the

NLG shock strut. They travel with the NLG on
extension and retraction.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-35

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Aft Doors Connecting Rods
2. Aft Doors.

2
FWD
A

Figure 32-31.  NLG Aft Doors and Connecting Rods

32-36 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Aft NLG Doors Connecting Rods
Refer to Figure 32-31. NLG Aft Doors and
Aft NLG Doors Connecting Rods.
Refer to Figure 32-31. NLG Aft Doors and
Connecting Rods. The two adjustable connecting rods connect the
NLG shock strut to the doors for mechanical
The two aft, NLG doors are hinged to the operation. This allows the doors be rigged
fuselage. Each door is made of an inner correctly, in the closed position.
and outer skin. The two NLG aft doors are
connected to the NLG shock strut by two
adjustable connecting rod assemblies.

These doors are open when the NLG is extended

and closed when the NLG is retracted. Each NLG
aft door is hinged to the fuselage at two places.

The NLG AFT doors provide an aerodynamic

fairing following nose gear retraction.

SYSTEM 32 1. NUMBER OF PARTS REQUIRED FOR ALL FLIGHT

CONDITIONS EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN COLUMN 2.
LANDING GEAR

ATA
SUB-SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION 2. REMARKS AND/OR EXCEPTIONS

32---2 NOSE LANDING GEAR AFT 2 One may be missing provided the airspeed is
DOORS (714, 715) limited to a maximum of 190 KIAS and
operable headsets are made available to each pilot.

NOTE
LRC cruise data may be used for
flight planning. Where LRC speed is
greater than 190 KIAS, LRC fuel flow
data for a given weight, altitude and
temperature condition may be
conservatively used when flying at
190 KIAS.

Figure 32-32.  CDL - Nose Landing Gear Aft Doors

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-37

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Door Attachment Bracket
2. Toggle Link Assembly
3. Forward Door Actuator Assembly
4. Link Assembly
5. Mechanical Sequence Valve
6. Alternate Release Cable
7. Bell Crank
8. Spring Assembly
9. Door Attachment Bracket
10. Forward Door
11. Forward Door A
12. Forward Doors Connecting Rods.

7
4 5 6
8

9
3
10

13

12
FWD

11

Figure 32-33.  NLG Forward Doors and Connecting Rods

32-38 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

NLG Forward Doors 32-22-00 DVI NOSE
Refer to Figure 32-33. NLG Forward Doors and
Connecting Rods.
LANDING GEAR DOOR
MECHANISMS
The two NLG forward doors are hinged to the
fuselage at two places. The forward hinges form the Inspect the door mechanisms for:
attachment brackets for the operating mechanism.
•• Damage
Each door is made up of an inner skin and an outer •• Corrosion
skin. The inner skin is contoured to give clearance
•• Cracks
for the nosewheels in the retracted position.
•• Failure
The operating mechanism is comprised of the
•• Defects
following;
•• Hydraulic Leaks
•• Two adjustable connecting rods
•• Correct Installation
•• Extension spring
•• Security.
•• Bell crank
•• Toggle link assembly
•• Link assembly
•• Mechanical sequence valve
•• Hydraulic actuator.

This operating mechanism is attached to the

forward wall of the nosewheel bay and is
protected by a removable debris guard.

NLG Forward Doors Connecting

Rods
Refer to Figure 32-33. NLG Forward Doors and
Connecting Rods.

The two adjustable connecting rods connect the

bell crank to the doors. To be rigged correctly
the doors must be in the closed position.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-39

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

L. DOOR N. DOOR R. DOOR MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

LEFT NOSE RIGHT
RIGHT
“Amber” Door Open
LEFT NOSE RIGHT
RIGHT

LANDING GEAR
LANDING GEA R
DN UP

LOCK
RELEASE HORN
MUTE

TEST

fs507a01.cgm

Figure 32-34.  Main Landing Gear Control Panel

32-40 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS The PSEU sends a signal to the LANDING
GEAR control panel, to show the status of the
Refer to: forward doors.
•• Figure 32-34. M
 ain Landing Gear When the doors are open the amber N DOOR
Control Panel. light comes on.
•• Figure 32-35. N
 LG Door Proximity
Sensor.

A proximity sensor is installed on the forward

wall of the nosewheel bay. The target of the
proximity sensor is on the toggle link assembly.

The toggle link assembly is part of the NLG

door mechanism. When the doors operate the
toggle link assembly moves.

This movement is sensed by the proximity

sensor. The proximity sensor sends the signal
to the PSEU.

Figure 32-35.  NLG Door Proximity Sensor

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-41

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

32-25-00 NOSE LANDING The ground-lock control handle has a momentary

action pushbutton.
GEAR GROUND LOCK
Pushing the pushbutton releases the nose gear
control handle from the fuselage. This will
INTRODUCTION cause the control handle to spring partly out.
A remotely operated nose gear ground lock
The control handle must be pulled fully out
mechanism is controlled from the outside of
and rotated 90º clockwise to point the chevrons
the aircraft.
towards the ground. This will lock the nose gear.
GENERAL The nose gear ground-lock is engaged when the
downlock arm of the pivot tube assembly is on
The ground lock control is on the left side nose
the drag strut of the NLG.
fuselage.
When the control handle is in and flush with
The ground lock mechanically prevents NLG
the fuselage, the nose gear is unlocked.
retraction.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION

Refer to Figure 32-36. NLG Ground-Lock If the nose gear ground-lock
Control Handle. cannot be engaged, support the
aircraft with the nose fuselage
The nose gear ground-lock control handle jack before investigation.
engages the downlock safety lever.

A
PRESS BUTTON
TO RELEASE
TO RELEASE
PRESS BUTTON
TO GROUND LOCK
NOSE GEAR

PULL AND TURN

PULL AND TURN

TO GROUND LOCK
NOSE GEAR

DISENGAGED (FULLY RETRACTED) ENGAGED (FULLY EXTENDED)

A

Figure 32-36.  NLG Ground-Lock Control Handle

32-42 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Nose Gear Ground-Lock Position
Indication System (Optional)
Refer to Figure 32-37. Nose Gear Ground-Lock
Position Indication System.

This system is optional for aircraft with

Modsum 4-429586. The switch and, cable
assembly are located in the nose landing gear
wheel well.

The ground-lock position indication system is

connected to the ground lock control system.
A
When you engage the ground-lock system, an
advisory indication shows on the pilot’s side panel.

4
LEGEND
1. Cable Switch Assembly
2. Lever Assembly
3. Striker Plate
4. Advisory Light.

NOSE
GEAR
LOCK

3
B

bram44a01.dg, sw, 17/06/02

Figure 32-37.  Nose Gear Ground-Lock Position Indication System

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-43

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

PROXIMITY SENSOR
ELECTRONIC UNIT LDG GEAR
INOP

CAUTION & WARNING PANEL

CONTROL
SEQUENCING MAIN/NOSE
GEAR AND DOOR
CONTROL VALVES

MAIN/NOSE
GEAR AND
DOOR
GEAR POSITION POSITIONS
AND LOCKED
INDICATION

WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS MAIN GEAR ASSEMBLY

LOGIC AIRCRAFT
PROCESSING SYSTEMS

Figure 32-38.  Landing Gear Block Diagram

32-44 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-30-00 LANDING 32-31-00 PRIMARY
GEAR EXTENSION AND EXTENSION AND
RETRACTION RETRACTION
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION
The landing gear Retraction Control System The Primary RCS controls the extension and
(RCS) controls the hydraulic retraction and retraction of the landing gear and the landing
extension of the landing gear. The RCS shows gear doors.
the landing gear and landing gear door status
in the flight compartment. GENERAL
GENERAL There are three conditions required for the
PSEU to activate the selector valve. These
The main gear retracts aft. The nose gear retracts conditions are as follows:
forward. There is an alternate method for
extending the landing gear. Advisory lights give •• Landing gear selector lever is moved to
extension/retraction and fail/safe information. the UP position
•• PSEU receives the signal that the
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION aircraft is WOFW
Refer to Figure 32-38. Landing Gear Block Diagram. •• NLG is centered.

The LANDING GEAR selector lever and the

PSEU control the operation of the landing gear.
The No.2 hydraulic system supplies the power
to move the landing gear.

Hydraulic retraction and extension starts when the

landing gear selector lever is unlocked and moved to
the desired position. The PSEU checks the landing
gear and landing gear door status, comparing the
status of both to the position selected. The PSEU
then controls the hydraulic sequences to either fully
extend or fully retract the landing gear.

The indicator lights installed on the landing

gear control panel assembly show the landing
gear and the landing gear door status. A LDG
GEAR INOP caution light is shown on the
flight compartment caution and warning panel
in the event of a system malfunction.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-45

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Landing Gear Selector Valve
Refer to Figure 32-39. Landing Gear Selector
Valve - Detail.

The landing gear selector valve is installed in the

right wing to fuselage area. The valve is a self
contained assembly which has two solenoid valves.

The valve controls the supply of hydraulic

pressure to either the extend or retract hydraulic
circuits of the landing gear system.

LEGEND
1. Electrical Connector
2. Hydraulic Line
3. Selector Valve.

FWD
2

Figure 32-39.  Landing Gear Selector Valve - Detail

32-46 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

MLG Retraction Actuator
Refer to Figure 32-40. MLG Retraction
Actuator - Detail.

The MLG retraction actuator cylinder is

attached to the lower front of the MLG yoke
cross beam. The rod end is attached to the
center top of the MLG shock strut.

The actuator is a hydraulic device that has two

ports. There are restrictors in both ports. The
rod end of the actuator piston has a ball and
race with a lubrication fitting.

FWD

MAIN LANDING GEAR (MLG)

2
4

LEGEND
A 1. Retraction Actuator
2. Hydraulic Line Extension
3. Hydraulic Line Retraction
4. Yoke Assembly.
FWD

Figure 32-40.  MLG Retraction Actuator - Detail

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-47

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

MLG Downlock Actuator

Refer to Figure 32-41. MLG Downlock
Actuator - Detail.

The MLG downlock actuator is attached to the

MLG stabilizer brace assembly.

The MLG downlock actuator has two ports. The

rod end of the actuator has a ball and race with
a lubrication fitting. Hydraulic lines are attached
to the two ports and are sealed with O-rings.

The MLG downlock actuator locks the landing

gear in the down position.
A

FWD

MAIN LANDING GEAR

Figure 32-41.  MLG Downlock Actuator - Detail

32-48 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

MLG Uplock Assembly
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-42. MLG Uplock Assembly.
•• Figure 32-43. M
 LG Uplock Actuator
- Detail.

The uplock assembly is attached to a frame at

the top of the wheel well.

The uplock roller of the MLG engages the inner

face of the latch assembly. The latch assembly
pivots into the locked position assisted by the
two extension springs of the uplock assembly.

A lock link prevents the latch assembly from rotating Figure 32-42.  MLG Uplock Assembly
to the UNLOCK position until the piston of the
uplock actuator extends during a MLG extension.

1 A

FWD

FWD

2 MLG UPLOCK ACTUATOR

LEGEND
1. MLG Uplock Assembly
2. External Spring
3. MLG Uplock Actuator.
3

Figure 32-43.  MLG Uplock Actuator - Detail

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-49

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Mechanical Sequence Valve Inline Restrictors

The mechanical sequence valve is installed at Refer to Figure 32-44. MLG Doors Inline
the forward end of the MLG aft doors. The MLG Restrictors.
mechanical sequence valve is a bolt-on assembly.
Two inline restrictors are installed in the
The function of the mechanical sequence valve is hydraulic lines. Between the mechanical
to correctly sequence the operation of the MLG sequence valves and the retraction actuators.
uplock release and the MLG retraction actuators.
The MLG door inline restrictors reduce the flow
of hydraulic pressure to the retraction actuators
until the gear doors are almost fully open.

1
A

MLG DOORS

LEGEND
1. Inline Restrictors
2. Mechanical Sequence.

FWD 2

Figure 32-44.  MLG Doors Inline Restrictors

32-50 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

MLG Solenoid Sequence Valve The NLG sequence valve is a bolt-on assembly
with four ports. The valve is operated by a
Refer to Figure 32-45. Landing Gear Doors single coil solenoid.
Solenoid Sequence Valve.
The NLG solenoid sequence valve controls the
The MLG solenoid sequence valves are located opening and closing of the doors by porting
in the wheel-well on the left side, they are hydraulic fluid to the door actuator.
forward of the aft doors actuator.

The valve is a self contained, bolt-on assembly.

It is directly operated by a single coil solenoid.

The valve controls opening and closing of aft

doors. This is done by porting hydraulic fluid to
the door actuators.

NLG Solenoid Sequence Valve

Refer to:
•• Figure 32-45. L a n d i n g G e a r D o o r s
Solenoid Sequence Valve.
•• Figure 32-46. N LG Doors Sequence
Valve. Figure 32-46.  NLG Doors Sequence Valve
The NLG solenoid sequence valve is located
in the lower right section of the NLG bay, on
the outer wall.

FWD

A
A fs133a01.cgm

Figure 32-45.  Landing Gear Doors Solenoid Sequence Valve

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-51

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

NLG Retraction Actuator

Refer to:
•• Figure 32-47. NLG Retraction Actuator.
•• Figure 32-48. NLG Retraction and Lock
Actuator.

The NLG retraction actuator piston is attached

to the top right side of the NLG shock strut. The
cylinder itself is attached to the aircraft structure.

The nose landing gear retraction actuator has

two ports. The rod end of the piston which is
installed with bushings and a lubrication fitting.

The cylinder end of the actuator which has a ball

and race with a lubrication fitting.

Figure 32-47.  NLG Retraction Actuator

FW
D

LEGEND
1. NLG Lock Actuator
2. NLG Retraction Actuator.
ft130a01.cgm
A

Figure 32-48.  NLG Retraction and Lock Actuator

32-52 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

NLG Lock Actuator
Refer to Figure 32-49. NLG Lock Actuator.

The lock actuator is installed between the

airframe fitting and the drag strut pivot tube
near the lock links.

The NLG Lock Actuator unlocks the drag strut

lock links.

NLG Inline Restrictors

Refer to Figure 32-50. NLG Inline Restrictor.

Two inline restrictors are installed in the tee

fittings between the mechanical sequence valve
and the retraction actuator.

The inline restrictors are two-way fluid fittings

that restrict hydraulic flow but not pressure.

Figure 32-49.  NLG Lock Actuator

Tee
Fitting
(REF)

Inline
Restrictors
FWD

Figure 32-50.  NLG Inline Restrictor

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-53

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

L. DOOR N. DOOR R. DOOR

LEFT NOSE RIGHT
RIGHT
LEFT NOSE RIGHT
RIGHT
LDG GEAR
INOP
LANDING GEAR
LANDING GEA R
DN UP

LOCK
RELEASE HORN
MUTE

TEST

Figure 32-51.  Landing Gear - Controls and Indications

32-54 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-51. Landing Gear - Controls
and Indications.

The PSEU controls the sequencing logic for the

RCS and indications.

The Landing Gear Control Panel indicator

lights are as follows:
•• LEFT, NOSE, RIGHT green lights
indicate the gear is down and locked
•• L E F T , N O S E , R I G H T r e d l i g h t s
indicate the gear is not locked up, or
locked down (Transit)
•• L DOOR, N DOOR, R DOOR amber lights
indicate landing gear doors not closed.

An alternate downlock indication system is

available. The green indicator lights (One for
each landing gear) indicate a down and locked
condition. These lights are installed in the flight
compartment floor, under the ALTERNATE
EXTENSION door.

A fault in the landing gear RCS causes the

LDG GEAR INOP caution light on the CAWP
to illuminate.

Fault Isolation
The CAWP shows the LDG GEAR INOP on
when the:
•• Proximity sensor electronic unit (PSEU)
landing gear control has failed
•• Landing Gear Inhibit Switch is not
stowed correctly in its normal position.

For details see the related fault message on the

PSEU face panel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-55

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES WARNING

If gear retraction and extension is required,
MAKE SURE THAT ALL
then make sure:
PERSONS AND EQUIPMENT
•• That the lower cowl is in the closed ARE CLEAR OF THE LANDING
position, it is recommended that you close GEAR AND THE AREA OF
the lower cowl to make sure that it is not DOOR MOVEMENT. IF YOU
damaged during landing gear movement. DO NOT DO THIS, YOU
CAN CAUSE INJURIES TO
NOTE PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO
THE EQUIPMENT.
If it is necessary for the lower cowl
to be open for other maintenance, To retract the nlg only:
you can also remove the lower
cowl if it cannot be closed. •• Open and lock the landing gear doors.
•• Install the main landing gear lock pins.
•• That the fuel tank access-panels are
installed. Movement of the landing •• Engage the nose landing gear ground
gear with these panels removed is not lock.
permitted.
•• Lift the aircraft at the jacking point near
•• To disengage the nose gear ground lock. the fuselage, nose only.
•• To remove the main landing gear lock •• Disengage the nose gear ground lock.
pins.
•• Disconnect the main landing gear
downlock actuator from the forward
•• That the controls in the flight compartment
lock link assembly.
are set as follows:
•• Secure the downlock actuator to make
°° The landing-gear selector is in the sure the actuator piston does not make
DN position contact with attaching structure or doors
°° The landing-gear inhibit switch is in during the retraction or extension.
the NORMAL position •• Install MLG WOW proximity sensor
°° The nosewheel steering control is (copper) test target to simulate a target
in the NEUTRAL position and the FAR (air) state.
selector switch is in the OFF position
°° The FLAPS selector lever to the 0° WARNING
position
DO NOT LIFT THE AIRCRAFT
°° The POWER levers are at or above ON JACKS IF YOU THINK
the FLT IDLE position. THE LOAD AT THE NOSE-
FUSELAGE JACKING POINT
WILL BE 4,700 LB (2,132 KG)
OR MORE. IF YOU DO, YOU
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE.
THIS CAN CAUSE INJURY TO
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO
THE AIRCRAFT.

32-56 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-57

32-58 32  LANDING GEAR

FROM POWER
SOLENOID A ENERGIZED TRANSFER UNIT
SOLENOID B
(DOWN) (UP) LEGEND
PRESSURE No.2 HYD

NO. 2 HYD RETRACT PRESSURE

DASH 8 Q400
(UP SOLENOID ENERGIZED) RETURN PRESSURE
TO NOSEWHEEL
STEERING SYSTEM CHECK VALVE
LANDING GEAR
SELECTOR VALVE RESTRICTOR
LANDING GEAR
PRESSURE
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

BYPASS VALVE DOWN

UP

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CLOSE OPEN
NOSE DOOR
ACTUATOR MECHANICAL
TO LEFT SEQUENCE
MAIN GEAR VALVE

ENERGIZED
SOLENOID MAIN GEAR
SEQUENCE RETRACTION
VALVE CLOSE ACTUATOR
OPEN LOCK DOWN UP
RELEASE
MECHANICAL
SEQUENCE
VALVE AUXILIARY
ENERGIZED UPLOCK
REAR DOOR SOLENOID ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
NOSE GEAR ACTUATOR SEQUENCE
RETRACTION VALVE
ACTUATOR
UP DOWN DOWNLOCK
ACTUATOR

LOCK
LOCK ACTUATOR RELEASE
UPLOCK DOWNLOCK
RELEASE
RIGHT MAIN GEAR
RELEASE

Figure 32-52.  (32-31-00) UP Selection Doors Open

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-31-00 PRIMARY •• MLG wheel well door actuators close
aft doors. When MLG wheel well
EXTENSION AND doors are approximately 7% closed the
RETRACTION mechanical sequence valve is closed
•• Landing gear selector valve UP solenoid
OPERATION is de-energized by PSEU when the
associated proximity sensors indicate
Normal System Operation that all landing gear are up and locked,
and all wheel well doors are closed
Refer to: (following a 10 second delay).
•• Figure 32-52. ( 32-31-00) UP Selection
Doors Open.
•• Figure 32-53. ( 32-31-00) Gear UP and
Doors Locked Closed.

MLG Retraction Sequence

The main landing gear retraction sequence is
as follows:

•• L A N D I N G G E A R l o c k r e l e a s e d ,
selector lever is moved to UP position
•• L a n d i n g g e a r s e l e c t o r v a l v e D N
solenoid is de-energized and UP
solenoid is energized. (Retraction
circuit is pressurized)
•• MLG solenoid sequence valves remains
energized by PSEU from end of
extension cycle
•• MLG wheel well door actuators open
aft doors
•• M L G s t a b i l i z e r b r a c e o v e r c e n t e r
downlocks are released
•• MLG begin to retract slowly through
inline restrictors
•• W h e n M L G w h e e l d o o r s a r e
approximately 93% open, the
mechanical sequence valve is opened
and the MLG retracts at full rate
•• MLG engages uplocks
•• MLG solenoid sequence valves are
de-energized by PSEU when the uplock
proximity sensors indicate that the
MLG are up and locked

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-59

32-60 32  LANDING GEAR

SOLENOID A SOLENOID B FROM POWER

(DOWN) (UP) TRANSFER UNIT
LEGEND
PRESSURE NO.2 HYD
NO.2 HYD
RETURN PRESSURE
CHECK VALVE

DASH 8 Q400
GEAR UP AND LOCKED
(BOTH SOLENOIDS DE-ENERGIZED) RESTRICTOR
PRESSURE

LANDING GEAR
BYPASS VALVE
DOWN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

UP

CLOSE OPEN

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOSE DOOR
ACTUATOR
TO LEFT MECHANICAL
MAIN GEAR SEQUENCE
VALVE

MAIN GEAR
SOLENOID RETRACTION
SEQUENCE ACTUATOR
VALVE CLOSE
LOCK DOWN UP
OPEN RELEASE
MECHANICAL
SEQUENCE
VALVE AUXILIARY
SOLENOID UPLOCK ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR SEQUENCE
VALVE
NOSE GEAR
RETRACTION
ACTUATOR
UP DOWN STABILIZER
STRUT
ACTUATOR
LOCK
RELEASE
LOCK ACTUATOR
UPLOCK DOWNLOCK RIGHT MAIN GEAR
RELEASE RELEASE

*ALL SOLENOIDS DE-ENERGIZED

Figure 32-53.  (32-31-00) Gear UP and Doors Locked Closed

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

NLG Retraction Sequence NOTES
The nose landing gear retraction sequence is
as follows:

•• LANDING GEAR selector lever is

moved to UP position
•• L a n d i n g g e a r s e l e c t o r v a l v e D N
solenoid is de-energized and UP
solenoid is energized (Retraction circuit
is pressurized)
•• NLG solenoid sequence valve remains
energized by PSEU from end of
extension cycle
•• NLG wheel well door actuator opens
forward doors
•• NLG drag strut overcenter downlock is
released
•• NLG begins to retract slowly through
inline restrictors
•• When NLG wheel doors are approximately
92% open, the mechanical sequence
valve is opened and the NLG retracts
at full rate NLG drag strut overcenter
uplock is energized
•• N L G s o l e n o i d s e q u e n c e v a l v e i s
de-energized by PSEU when the NGDN
and NGLK proximity sensors indicate
that the NLG is up and locked
•• NLG wheel well door actuator closes
forward doors. When NLG wheel well
doors are approximately 8% closed the
mechanical sequence valve is closed
•• Landing gear selector valve UP solenoid
is de-energized by PSEU when the
associated proximity sensors indicate
that all landing gear are up and locked,
and all wheel well doors are closed
(following a 10 second delay).

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-61

32-62 32  LANDING GEAR

DASH 8 Q400
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOSE WHEEL
CENTERED

Figure 32-54.  (32-31-00) Landing Gear Retraction (Sheet 1 of 3)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Landing Gear Retraction NOTES
Refer to:

Figure 32-54. (32-31-00) Landing Gear

Retraction (Sheet 1 of 3).

Before landing gear retraction can start, the

PSEU must receive the signals as follows:

•• LG control handle is in the RETRACT

position
•• WOW sensors show that the aircraft is
in the air as reported
•• LG control is NOT inhibited
•• The nosewheel is centered
•• The landing gear doors are OPEN.

When these conditions are achieved the PSEU

de-energizes the EXTEND solenoid and at the
same time outputs 28 VDC to Pin L of the LG
control panel.

Because the LG control handle is in the retract

position, the LG selector switch is positioned
to output the 28 VDC through Pin R to the
RETRACT solenoid of the LG selector valve.

Hydraulic pressure through the retract solenoid

acts on one end of the hydraulic spool valve.
The other end of the hydraulic spool is open
to return through the de-energized EXTEND
solenoid.

The hydraulic spool is moved to the position

that allows the hydraulic pressure to be applied
to the retract manifold through the bypass valve.

At the same time the PSEU energizes the solenoid

sequence valves by outputting 28 VDC to each
valve, the hydraulic pressure then passes through
the valves to the door actuators to open the
landing gear doors.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-63

32-64 32  LANDING GEAR

DASH 8 Q400
LANDING GEAR
CONTROL AND K J J LL LL A A A
INDICATION J K K MM MM B B C
PANEL NN NN C C B
GS2

AFT WING AFT TOP WING

L/G SELECTOR VALVE
ROOT DISC LH X-OVER
PSEU
ADVISORY ATA 32-61 RIGHT WING ROOT
RG SAFE G- 43 43 L L 3C
CONTROL
LG SAFE C- 41 UNIT 41 M M 3E
NG SAFE E- 45 45 N N 3D U U B- B- A
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

F F B
RG NOT SAFE H- 44 44 P P 4C
C
LG NOT SAFE D- 42 42 R R 3B RH U/FLR DISC.
X=-18. FWD WING
NG NOT SAFE F- 46 46 S S 3A GS3
ROOT DISC RH
DOOR SEQUENCE VALVE
RG DOOR OPEN D 64 64 T T 12E

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

1K
LG DOOR OPEN F 62 62 U U 11E RIGHT LG BAY
E44
NG DOOR OPEN E 63 63 V V 11D
GEAR UNSAFE A- 47 47 W W 2A
R R D- D- A
E- E- B
10C
C
UPR LHS DISC GS4
1H X=60 FWD WING
LAMP P1C ROOT DISC LH DOOR SEQUENCE VALVE
17 X X E45
TEST 1
5H
LAMP P1B MAINTENANCE LEFT LG BAY
18 Y Y
TEST 2 PANEL
9A 50
9B 49
FLT. DECK E40 P1B
ABV/FLOOR RH
5E
28VDC J- Z Z
5A
WARDROBE
28VDC P- A- A- E41
CHASSIS T-
GS7
HORN MUTE V B- B- 68
SWITCH W
31-41-00
GS6
HORN TEST X C- C- 65
B-
GS5 P1A
UP A D- D- 10J
LANDING B
GEAR GS8
P
CONTROL
GS9 10H RETRACT
HANDLE
DOWN R E- E- 1G
L F- F- E42
H G- G- 1F
E43 EXTEND
CO-PILOT
F. D. ABV POWER LEVERS BLKHD DISC.

Figure 32-55.  (32-31-00) Landing Gear Retraction (Sheet 2 of 3)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Refer to Figure 32-55. (32-31-00) Landing Gear NOTES
Retraction (Sheet 2 of 3).

The PSEU outputs 28 VDC through Pins 12E,

11D and 11E to the LG Control and Indication
Panel to bring on the door OPEN amber lights.

Hydraulic pressure is applied through a

restrictor to the MLG downlock actuator, the
actuator retracts and unlocks the overcenter
lock in the stabilizer brace assembly.

Pressure is also applied to the NLG lock release

actuator to unlock the overcenter lock condition
of the upper and lower drag strut assemblies.

The PSEU outputs 28 VDC through the

advisory control unit for the following:

•• MLG unsafe red lights through Pin 4C

and Pin 3B to Pins H and D
•• NLG unsafe red light through Pin 3A
to Pin F
•• Light in the control handle through Pin
2A to Pin A on the LG Control and
Indication Panel.

Before the doors are 93% open, the only

pressure going to the retraction actuators passes
through the inline restrictors.

When the doors are approximately 93% open,

the mechanical sequence valve is opened by
operation of the door operating mechanism.

This allows hydraulic pressure and flow to

bypass the inline restrictors, going directly to
the retraction actuators.

The full on restrictors of the landing gear

actuators control the speed of retraction.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-65

32-66 32  LANDING GEAR

28 V DC/OC
A 1J DISCRETE OUTPUT B RIGHT
(PSC A) GEAR B 14B
B UP S16 PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LOCK A 14A (PSC D)

B 12J RIGHT
GEAR B 9B
S04
NOSE GEAR A DOOR S20
12K
WOW 2 CLOSED A 9A

DASH 8 Q400
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT S19 S18
NOSE GEARDRCL NW PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
(PSC A)
S09 S10 RIGHT (PSC B)
D 13J GEAR
NW NOSE GEARDN1 NOSE GEARDN2
B 8J
S18 DOWN
CENTRED S11 S12 S14
E 13K NOSE GEARLK1
LOCK 2
NOSE GEARLK2
A 8K
S03 S04
NOSE GEARWOFW2
NOSE GEARWOFW1
RIGHT
B 8G WEIGHT-ON
NOSE GEAR B 13G
S12 WHEELS 2 PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LOCK 2 S06
A 8H (PSC A)
A 13H
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

(PSC B)
RIGHT
B 7J GEAR
NOSE GEAR B 13B PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
S10 DOWN
DOWN 2 S13 (PSC D)
A 7K LOCK 1 A 13A

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RIGHT
B 7B WEIGHT-ON
NOSE GEAR F 8D PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
S03 WHEELS 1
WOW 1 S05 (PSC E)
A 7A
G 8C
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
S07 S08 S13 S14
(PSC E) LGDLK1 LGDLK2 RGDLK1 RGDLK2

NOSE GEAR B 9D
DOOR S19
CLOSED A 9C
S15 S17 S16 S20
LGUPLK LGDRCL RGUPLK RGDRCL LEFT
WEIGHT-ON B 12G PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
B 13D S01 S02 S05 S06 WHEELS 2 S02 (PSC A)
NOSE GEAR LGWOW1 LGWOW2
S11 RGWOW1 RGWOW2
A 12H
LOCK 1
A 13C
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LEFT
(PSC D) GEAR B 7G PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
B 12B DOWN S08 (PSC E)
NOSE GEAR
S09 LOCK 2 A 7H
DOWN 1
A 12A
LEFT
WEIGHT-ON F 7D PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
WHEELS 1 S01 (PSC E)
G 7C
J/P52
A 1K LEFT
GEAR B 8B PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
B DOOR S17 (PSC B)
CLOSED A 8A
28 V DC/OC
DOOR SEQUENCE
DISCRETE OUTPUT LEFT
VALVE
(PSC A) GEAR B 12D
DOWN S07
LOCK 1 A 12C
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LEFT (PSC D)
J/P51
GEAR B 14D
A 1H
UP S15
LOCK A 14C
B
B

DOOR SEQUENCE 32-61 A1

VALVE PROXIMITY SENSOR 32-61 A1
ELECTRONIC UNIT (PSEU) PROXIMITY SENSOR
ELECTRONIC UNIT (PSEU)

Figure 32-56.  (32-31-00) Landing Gear Retraction (Sheet 3 of 3)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Refer to Figure 32-56. (32-31-00) Landing Gear NOTES
Retraction (Sheet 3 of 3).

When the PSEU gets all the signals listed

below:

•• RMG uplock sensor at Pin D14A and

D14B
•• LMG uplock sensor at Pin D14C and
D14D
•• NG lock 1 at Pins D13C and D13D
•• NG lock 2 at Pins B8G and B8H
• • The solenoid sequence valves are
de-energized.

Hydraulic pressure will now be supplied to the

close side of the door actuators closing the doors.

When the PSEU gets all the signals that follow:

•• RMG Door Closed at Pins B9A and B9B

•• LMG Door Closed at Pins B8A and B8B
•• NG Door Closed at Pins E9C and E9D.

The RETRACT solenoid in the LG selector

valve is de-energized and the door OPEN
amber lights extinguish.

The hydraulic pressure is released from

the end of the hydraulic spool through the
de-energized RETRACT solenoid and, the
spool is centralized by the springs.

All hydraulic pressure to the landing gear

retraction system is removed and both sides of
all actuators in the system are open to return.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-67

32-68 32  LANDING GEAR

FROM POWER
ENERGIZED SOLENOID B TRANSFER UNIT
SOLENOID A (UP) LEGEND
(DOWN)
SYSTEM INPUT PRESSURE

EXTEND PRESSURE
NO.2 HYD
RETURN PRESSURE

DASH 8 Q400
TO NOSEWHEEL LANDING GEAR CHECK VALVE
STEERING SYSTEM SELECTOR VALVE
(DOWN SOLENOID ENERGIZED) RESTRICTOR

LANDING GEAR
BYPASS VALVE
DOWN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

UP

CLOSE OPEN

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOSE DOOR
ACTUATOR
TO LEFT
MAIN GEAR
MECHANICAL
SEQUENCE
VALVE

DE-ENERGIZED MAIN GEAR

SOLENOID RETRACTION
SEQUENCE
VALVE ACTUATOR
CLOSE
LOCK DOWN UP
OPEN RELEASE
MECHANICAL
SEQUENCE
VALVE DE-ENERGIZED AUXILIARY
UPLOCK ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR SOLENOID ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR SEQUENCE
VALVE
NOSE GEAR
RETRACTION
ACTUATOR
UP DOWN DOWNLOCK
ACTUATOR

LOCK
LOCK RELEASE
ACTUATOR
UPLOCK DOWNLOCK
RELEASE RELEASE RIGHT MAIN GEAR

Figure 32-57.  Initial DOWN Selection Doors Opening

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Main Landing Gear Extension Nose Landing Gear Extension
Refer to: The nose landing gear extension sequence is
as follows:
•• Figure 32-57. I nitial DOWN Selection
Doors Opening. •• LANDING GEAR selector lever is
moved to DN position
•• Figure 32-58. Selection Completed Doors
Closed. •• L a n d i n g g e a r s e l e c t o r v a l v e D N
solenoid is energized by PSEU (Normal
The main landing gear extension sequence is extension circuit is pressurized)
as follows: •• NLG solenoid sequence valves remains
de-energized by PSEU from end of
•• LANDING GEAR selector lever is retraction cycle
moved to DN position
•• NLG wheel well door actuator opens
•• Landing gear selector valve DN solenoid forward doors
is energized by PSEU (Normal extension
circuit is pressurized) •• NLG drag strut over-center uplock is
released
•• MLG solenoid sequence valves remains
de-energized by PSEU from end of •• NLG begins to extend slowly through
retraction cycle in-line restrictors
•• MLG wheel well door actuators open •• When NLG wheel doors are approximately
aft doors 92% open, the mechanical sequence
valve is opened and the NLG extends
•• MLG uplocks are released at full rate
•• MLG begin to extend slowly through •• NLG drag strut over-center downlock
in-line restrictors is engaged
•• W h e n M L G w h e e l d o o r s a r e •• N L G s o l e n o i d s e q u e n c e v a l v e i s
approximately 93% open, the energized by PSEU when the NGDN
mechanical sequence valve is opened and NGLK proximity sensors indicate
and the MLG extends at full rate that the NLG is down and locked
•• MLG stabilizer brace over-center •• NLG wheel well door actuator closes
downlocks are engaged forward doors. When NLG wheel well
•• MLG solenoid sequence valves are doors are approximately 8% closed, the
energized by PSEU when the stabilizer mechanical sequence valve is closed
brace proximity sensors indicate that •• L a n d i n g g e a r s e l e c t o r v a l v e D N
the MLG are down and locked solenoid, MLG solenoid sequence
•• MLG wheel well door actuators close valve, and NLG solenoid sequence
aft doors. When MLG wheel well valve remain energized by PSEU after
doors are approximately 7% closed the extension is complete.
mechanical sequence valve is closed
•• L a n d i n g g e a r s e l e c t o r v a l v e D N
solenoid, MLG solenoid sequence
valve, and NLG solenoid sequence
valve remain energized by PSEU after
extension is complete.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-69

32-70 32  LANDING GEAR

ENERGIZED SOLENOID B
SOLENOID A (UP) FROM POWER LEGEND
(DOWN) TRANSFER UNIT
PRESSURE SYSTEM
EXTEND PRESSURE
NO.2 HYD RETURN PRESSURE

CHECK VALVE

DASH 8 Q400
TO NOSEWHEEL LANDING GEAR
STEERING SYSTEM SELECTOR VALVE
(DOWN SOLENOID ENERGIZED) RESTRICTOR

LANDING GEAR
BYPASS VALVE
DOWN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

UP

CLOSE OPEN

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOSE DOOR
TO LEFT ACTUATOR
MAIN GEAR MECHANICAL
SEQUENCE
VALVE

ENERGIZED MAIN GEAR

SOLENOID RETRACTION
SEQUENCE ACTUATOR
VALVE CLOSE
LOCK DOWN UP
OPEN RELEASE
MECHANICAL
SEQUENCE
VALVE ENERGIZED AUXILIARY
UPLOCK ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR SOLENOID ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR SEQUENCE
NOSE GEAR VALVE
RETRACTION
ACTUATOR
UP DOWN DOWNLOCK
ACTUATOR
LOCK
LOCK RELEASE
ACTUATOR
UPLOCK DOWNLOCK
RELEASE RELEASE RIGHT MAIN GEAR
* ALL SOLENOIDS ENERGIZED

Figure 32-58.  Selection Completed Doors Closed

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Landing Gear Normal Extension NOTES
Before the landing gear normal extension can
start, the PSEU must receive the signals that
follow:

•• EXTCMD discrete input on Pin A10H

•• No LDGINH signal at Pin A10K.

The PSEU outputs 28 VDC to Pin H of the LG

Control and Indication panel.

Because the LG control lever is selected,

DOWN 28 VDC is output on Pin J to energize
the EXTEND solenoid in the LG selector valve.

Hydraulic pressure is directed through the

EXTEND solenoid to one end of the hydraulic
spool, the other end is open to return through
the de-energized RETRACT solenoid. The
hydraulic spool is positioned to supply
hydraulic pressure directly to the EXTEND
manifold.

The pressure is supplied through the

de-energized solenoid sequence valves to the
retract side of the door actuators to OPEN the
hydraulically operated doors.

Pressure is also supplied to the following:

•• The extend side of the MLG uplock

actuators to release the uplock
•• The extend side of the NLG lock release
actuator to unlock the overcenter lock in
the upper and lower drag strut assembly
•• Through the inline restrictors to the
retraction/extension actuators.

The PSEU outputs 28 VDC through the

Advisory Control Unit for the following:

•• The MLG unsafe red lights through Pin

4C and Pin 3B to Pins H and D
•• NLG unsafe red light through Pin 3A
to Pin F
•• The light in the control handle through
Pin 2A to Pin A on the LG Control and
Indication Panel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-71

32-72 32  LANDING GEAR

28 V DC/OC
A 1J DISCRETE OUTPUT B RIGHT
NOSE GEAR DOOR (PSC A) GEAR B 14B
SEQUENCE VALVE B UP S16 PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LOCK A 14A (PSC D)

B 12J RIGHT
GEAR B 9B
S04
NOSE GEAR A DOOR S20
12K

DASH 8 Q400
WOW 2 CLOSED A 9A
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT S19 S18
NOSE GEARDRCL NWCENT PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
(PSC A)
S09 S10 RIGHT (PSC B)
D 13J GEAR
NW NOSE GEARDN1 NOSE GEARDN2
B 8J
S18 DOWN
CENTRED S11 S12 S14
E 13K NOSE GEARLK1
LOCK 2
NOSE GEARLK2
A 8K
S03 S04
NOSE GEARWOFW2
NOSE GEARWOFW1
RIGHT
B 8G WEIGHT-ON
NOSE GEAR B 13G
S12 WHEELS 2 PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LOCK 2 S06
A 8H (PSC A)
A 13H
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

(PSC B)
RIGHT
B 7J GEAR
NOSE GEAR B 13B PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
S10 DOWN
DOWN 2 S13 (PSC D)
A 7K LOCK 1 A 13A

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RIGHT
B 7B WEIGHT-ON
NOSE GEAR F 8D PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
S03 WHEELS 1
WOW 1 S05 (PSC E)
A 7A
G 8C
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
S07 S08 S13 S14
(PSC E) LGDLK1 LGDLK2 RGDLK1 RGDLK2

NOSE GEAR B 9D
DOOR S19
CLOSED A 9C
S15 S17 S16 S20
LGUPLK LGDRCL RGUPLK RGDRCL LEFT
WEIGHT-ON B 12G PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
B 13D S01 S02 S05 S06 WHEELS 2 S02 (PSC A)
NOSE GEAR LGWOW1 LGWOW2
S11 RGWOW1 RGWOW2
A 12H
LOCK 1
A 13C
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LEFT
(PSC D) GEAR B 7G PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
B 12B DOWN S08 (PSC E)
NOSE GEAR
S09 LOCK 2 A 7H
DOWN 1
A 12A
LEFT
WEIGHT-ON F 7D PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
WHEELS 1 S01 (PSC E)
G 7C

A 1K LEFT
GEAR B 8B PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
B DOOR S17 (PSC B)
CLOSED A 8A
28 V DC/OC
DOOR SEQUENCE
DISCRETE OUTPUT LEFT
VALVE
(PSC A) GEAR B 12D
DOWN S07
LOCK 1 A 12C
PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT
LEFT (PSC D)
GEAR B 14D
A 1H
UP S15
LOCK A 14C
B
B

DOOR SEQUENCE 32-61 A1

VALVE PROXIMITY SENSOR 32-61 A1
ELECTRONIC UNIT (PSEU) PROXIMITY SENSOR
ELECTRONIC UNIT (PSEU)

Figure 32-59.  (32-31-00) Landing Gear Normal Extension

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Refer to Figure 32-59. (32-31-00) Landing The mechanical sequence valves are closed by
Gear Normal Extension. the action of the door operating mechanism and
pressure is maintained to the landing actuators
When the doors are approximately 93% open, and lock actuators through the inline restrictors.
full hydraulic pressure and flow is supplied to
the actuators to extend the gear. The EXTEND solenoid and the solenoid
selector valves remain energized.
When the main gear is down and locked, the
PSEU receives signals from the MLG sensors
that follow:

•• RMG Downlock 1 on Pins E8C and

E8D
•• RMG Downlock 2 on Pins B8J and B8K
•• LMG Downlock 1 on Pins D12C and
D12D
•• LMG Downlock 2 on Pins E7G and
E7H.

When the nose gear is down and locked, the

PSEU receives signals from the NLG that follow:

•• NG Down 1 on Pins D12A and D12B

•• NG Lock 1 on Pins D13C and D13D
•• NG Down 2 on Pins B7J and B7K
•• NG Lock 2 on Pins B8G and B8H.

When the PSEU has received the down and

locked signals from the LG sensors, it energizes
the solenoid sequence valves.

Hydraulic pressure is supplied to the extend

side of the door actuators closing the doors.

The PSEU receives the following signals from

the door sensors:

•• RG Door Closed on Pins B9A and B9B

•• LG Door Closed on Pins B8A and B8B
•• NG Door Closed on Pins E9C and E9D.

The PSEU turns OFF the amber door lights on

the LG control and indication panel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-73

32-74 32  LANDING GEAR

BY PASS
VALVE
MAIN DOOR MAIN L/G RELEASE
UPLOCK PULL FULLY DOWN
A RELEASE

MAIN GEAR

DASH 8 Q400
UPLOCK
RELEASE

B
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

CAUTION
ENSURE ALL WHEEL WELLS
ARE CLEAR OF OBSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CLOSING ACCESS PANEL

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

TO CLOSE DUMP VALVE.

NOSE DOOR
UPLOCK
RELEASE

LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE

A
NOSE GEAR DOOR (OPEN)
UPLOCK
RELEASE

LEGEND TO MAIN GEAR

CABLE CIRCUIT AUXILIARY
ACTUATORS
CONTROL LINKAGE HAND PUMP
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION
B
DOOR (OPEN)
fsr81a01.cgm

Figure 32-60.  Alternate Extension System Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-34-00 ALTERNATE NOTES
EXTENSION SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The alternate extension system is used to extend
the landing gear when the No.2 hydraulic
system or the PSEU is not serviceable.

The system can also be used, if the normal

extension system fails to lock the landing gear
in the down position.

The system is also used to open the landing

gear doors for service or maintenance.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 32-60. Alternate Extension
System Block Diagram.

The alternate extension system is a self

resetting, cable actuated design. Access to
controls for the alternate extension system is
through the flight compartment.

The alternate extension system includes

a bypass valve to isolate the landing gear
hydraulics from the No.2 hydraulic system.

A manual hand pump hydraulic system is

available to assist in lowering the main landing
gear (only) into the down and locked position.

The landing gear inhibit switch isolates the

PSEU from the landing gear selector output
when it is selected to the INHIBIT position.
The alternate extension system has the listed
components:
•• Alternate release handles (2)
•• Alternate release door
•• Alternate extension door
•• Alternate extension actuators (2)
•• Bypass valve and
•• Control cables.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-75

32-76 32  LANDING GEAR

HAND PUMP EMERGENCY

HYDRAULIC
RESERVOIR

DASH 8 Q400
1.25 U.S. QUARTS
(1.2 LITRES)

A
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

AUXILIARY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ACTUATOR
FW
D

LANDING GEAR
A ALTERNATE EXTENSION
DOOR (OPEN)

NOTE
Left Gear shown.
Right Gear similar.
EMERGENCY
SELECTOR VALVE LOWER RIGHT NOSE
(CLOSED POSITION) COMPARTMENT
MLG STABILIZER BRACE ASSEMBLY

LEGEND
SUCTION LINE
PRESSURE LINE

fsr82a01a.cgm

Figure 32-61.  Alternate Extension Hydraulic Synoptic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-61. Alternate Extension
Hydraulic Synoptic.

The hand pump is located below the flight

compartment floor, adjacent to the co-pilot
seat. The hand pump is used to lower the
landing gear following hydraulic system 2
isolation. A hand pump handle is installed in
the flight compartment on the bulkhead behind
the co-pilot seat. The handle must be installed
into the pump to operate the pump.

The MLG extension selector valve is located

below the flight compartment floor adjacent
to the co-pilot seat. The valve has a 2-way,
2-position control valve, a pressure relief valve,
and a filtered inlet and return port. There is a
pivoting link that attaches the selector valve to
the hand pump access door. The selector valve
moves from the normally open position to the
closed position when the access door is opened.
The pressure relief valve limits the pressure
that may be applied to the alternate gear down
actuators by relieving the hand pump pressure.

The alternate landing gear extension hydraulic

reservoir is located in the nose compartment
of the aircraft. This reservoir is made from
aluminum and has a capacity of 1 US qt (0.95
L). The reservoir has a threaded, vented,
removable lid which has three fittings installed.
One fitting serves as a fill port; the second
fitting is the vent, and the third fitting is the
outlet port to the hand pump. The lid also has
a dipstick with minimum and maximum volume
markings to allow filling of the reservoir to the
correct fluid level.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-77

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Dust Cap

Dipstick

Fill Connection
SAFE

Reservoir

Figure 32-62.  Servicing of the Auxiliary System Hydraulic Reservoir

32-78 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Servicing of the Alternate Landing- NOTES
Gear Extension Hydraulic
Reservoir
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

Refer to Figure 32-62. Servicing of the Auxiliary

System Hydraulic Reservoir.

The auxiliary reservoir is for the emergency

extension of the main landing gear. It is installed
in the bottom right side of the nose compartment.

•• Remove the dipstick to check the fluid

quantity level.
•• If the fluid level is below the SAFE
mark, fill the reservoir to the SAFE
mark.
•• Replace the dipstick in the reservoir.
•• Remove the dust cap from the fill
connection.
•• Connect the quick-disconnect coupling
of the fluid dispenser to the fill
connection.
•• Fill the auxiliary reservoir up to the
SAFE mark on the dipstick.
•• Replace the dipstick.
•• Disconnect the coupling of the fluid
dispenser and replace the dust cap.
•• Clean the area with the lint free cloth.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-79

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Main Gear Alternate Release
Handle
Refer to Figure 32-63. Main Gear Alternate
Release Handle.

The alternate release handle is located in the ceiling

of the flight compartment behind the LANDING
GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE door.

The handle is connected to the MLG uplocks

and the MLG aft doors release mechanisms.

A cam mechanism makes sure that the MLG

aft doors open before the MLG uplocks release
the MLG.

2 3
4

LEGEND
1. Door Compression Spring CAUTION
2. Main Gear Alternate Release Handle
ENSURE ALL WHEEL WELLS
3. Cables to Slide Assembly ARE CLEAR OF OBSTRUCTIONS
4. Cables to Bypass Valve BEFORE CLOSING ACCESS PANEL
5. Door Pulley TO CLOSE DUMP VALVE

6. Landing Gear Alternate Release Door

7. Landing Gear Inhibit Toggle Switch. 6

7
INHIBIT

NORMAL

Figure 32-63.  Main Gear Alternate Release Handle

32-80 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Nose Gear Alternate Release The pulley cam mechanism makes sure that
the NLG forward doors open before the NLG
Handle uplock is opened to release the NLG.
Refer to Figure 32-64. NLG Alternate Release
Handle. After the alternate release handle has been pulled,
gravity and the airstream force the NLG to the
The NLG alternate release handle is located down position, the gear locks by the overcenter
in the floor of the flight compartment mechanism of the upper, and lower drag struts.
under the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE
EXTENSION door.

The handle is connected by cables, turnbuckles

and pulleys to the NLG uplock release arm,
pulley cam mechanism and to the NLG door
release operating arm.

LEGEND
6
1. Landing Gear Alternate Extension Door
2. Landing Gear Downlock Verification Lights
3. Landing Gear Downlock Verification Switch
4. Landing Gear Alternate Extend Hand Pump
5. MLG Alternate Extension Actuator Bypass Valve
6. Nose Gear Alternate Release Handle.

FWD
4

A
3

Figure 32-64.  NLG Alternate Release Handle

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-81

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Alternate Extension Actuator The actuator has a single port for extend
pressure only.
Refer to Figure 32-65. Alternate Extension
Actuator. The alternate extension actuators are used
to extend the landing gear to the down and
The alternate extension actuators are installed locked position.
in the MLG wheel wells between the nacelle
structure and the MLG yoke assembly.

They are located on the right side of each MLG yoke.

The hydraulic pressure required to operate the

actuators is supplied by a hand pump located in
the flight compartment floor.

FWD
FWD

A MLG STABILIZER BRACE AND YOKE ASSEMBLY B

Figure 32-65.  Alternate Extension Actuator

32-82 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Alternate Extension Downlock
Indicators and Switch
Refer to Figure 32-66. Landing Gear Downlock
Verification Switch.

The alternate extension downlock indicator and

switch are installed in a panel located behind the
LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION
door, in the flight compartment floor. The switch
is beside a light panel that contains three green
lights.

It is a two position, momentary type toggle

switch. In the ON position the switch provides
a ground to the three alternate down lock lights.

LEGEND
1. Landing Gear Alternate Extension Door
2. Landing Gear Downlock Verification Lights
3. Landing Gear Downlock Verification Switch.

FWD

A
3

Figure 32-66.  Landing Gear Downlock Verification Switch

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-83

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Operating Lever

Pulleys

Bypass Valve

Restrictor

FWD
Turnbuckles

Cables From Door Pulley

Figure 32-67.  Bypass Valve and Alternate Release Cables

32-84 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Bypass Valve NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-67. Bypass Valve and
Alternate Release Cables.

The landing gear bypass valve is installed in the

forward right wing root area. It is adjacent to the
landing gear selector valve.

The bypass valve is actuated when the LANDING

GEAR ALTERNATE RELEASE door is opened.

During alternate extension, the bypass valve

isolates the No.2 hydraulic supply lines from
the main and nose gear retraction actuators, and
connects the pressure lines to the return lines.
The union attached to the down port is restricted.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-85

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Cable

Cam Mechanism
Assembly

Cable

Cable

To
Uplock
Assy

Figure 32-68.  MLG Alternate Extension System Cam Mechanism Assembly

32-86 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

MLG Alternate Release Control •• Release the input lever. Make sure the
cam assembly moves smoothly, with no
Cables binding or resistance, to its fully rested
Refer to Figure 32-68. MLG Alternate Extension position
System Cam Mechanism Assembly.
•• I f t h e c a m m o v e m e n t i s f u l l a n d
unrestricted, no further action is required
Control cables are routed from the MLG alternate
release handle through a slider mechanism, •• If there is binding or sticking in the cam
located in the ceiling of the aircraft, forward of assembly when you return it to its full
the wing root. rested position, remove the unit and
install a new or serviceable unit.
The slider mechanism lets the full force of the
pull be concentrated first on the release of one
MLG and then on the other.

The control cables are then routed through to the

engine nacelles to the cam mechanisms.

The cam mechanism allows the force of the pull

to be concentrated first on the release of the MLG
aft doors and then on the MLG uplocks.

Operational Check of the Main

Landing Gear Alternate Extension
Cam Assembly (MRB#323400-204)
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

The cam assembly is installed on the left side of

the nacelle, at approximately Sta. XN 190.524.

•• Open and lock the main landing-gear

doors
•• Use your fingers to move (rotate) the
input lever forward, so that the cam
assembly is in the fully deployed position

CAUTION

Do not pull the alternate release

cable to move the cam assembly.
This will bend the cable end at
the turnbuckle assembly.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-87

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

NLG Alternate Release Control NOTES

Cables
Refer to Figure 32-69. NLG Alternate Release Cable.

Control cables are routed from the NLG

alternate release handle through a pulley cam
mechanism located in the forward fuselage
above the nosewheel well.

The pulley cam mechanism lets the full force of

the pull be concentrated first on the release of the
NLG forward doors and then on the NLG uplocks.

D
FW

4
2

LEGEND
1. Front Door Alternate Release 5
Operating Arm and Roller Assembly
2. Pulley Cam Mechanism
3. Nose Gear Alternate Release Handle
(Flight Compartment Floor)
4. NLG Uplock Release Arm
5. Pivot Tube (Nose Gear Release)
6. Link Assembly.
6

1
A

Figure 32-69.  NLG Alternate Release Cable

32-88 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Landing Gear Inhibit Switch Selecting the switch to the INHIBIT position
disables the extension and retraction landing gear
Refer to Figure 32-70. Landing Gear Alternate control outputs of the PSEU.
Release - Inhibit Switch.
“LDG INOP” caution light will come on if not
The LANDING GEAR INHIBIT switch is already on.
installed in the flight compartment ceiling.
This action causes the landing gear selector valve
The inhibit toggle switch has two positions: solenoids and all solenoid sequence valves to be
INHIBIT and NORMAL. It is guarded to the de-energized.
NORMAL (off) position.

FWD
FWD

CAUTION
LANDING GEAR ENSURE ALL WHEEL WELLS
ARE CLEAR OF OBSTRUCTIONS
ALTERNATE RELEASE BEFORE CLOSING ACCESS PANEL
TO CLOSE DUMP VALVE

OPEN DOOR FULLY

INHIBIT INHIBIT

NORMAL NORMAL

A DOOR CLOSED A DOOR OPEN

Figure 32-70.  Landing Gear Alternate Release - Inhibit Switch

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-89

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Hanger Clip

Lever, Hand-Pump

Figure 32-71.  Hydraulic Hand Pump and Hand Pump Lever

32-90 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

29-21-01 HYDRAULIC NOTES
HAND PUMP
Refer to Figure 32-71. Hydraulic Hand Pump
and Hand Pump Lever.

The hand pump is located under the flight

compartment floor, near the co-pilot seat.

The hand pump is used to extend the main

landing gear following isolation, or loss, of
the No.2 hydraulic system. The pump draws
hydraulic fluid from an auxiliary reservoir
located in the nose compartment. Hydraulic
fluid pressurizes the alternate landing-gear
actuators to extend the main landing gear to the
downlock position.

29-21-03 HAND-PUMP
LEVER
Figure 32-71. Hydraulic Hand Pump and Hand
Pump Lever.

The hand-pump lever is stowed on the aft

bulkhead of the flight compartment, on the
co-pilot side with a hanger clip and a rubber
stopper on top.

The lever is used to operate the Alternate hand

pump.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-91

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

2
1 LEGEND
2
3 1. Links
2. Washers
13 3. Cotter Pin
14 4 4. Nut
5 5. Rod End
6
6. Washers
6 7. Selector Valve
8. Bracket
9. Hydraulic Line
10. Hydraulic Line
7
12 11. Spacers
12. Washers
13. Bolts
14. Bolt.
16 8 15. Packing
16. Filter Fitting
11 15

16
10
9

Figure 32-72.  Secondary MLG Selector Valve - Removal and Installation

32-92 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

29-21-06 SECONDARY NOTES
MLG SELECTOR VALVE
Refer to Figure 32-72. Secondary MLG
Selector Valve - Removal and Installation.

The Selector Valve is a 2-way, 2-position control

valve located under the flight compartment
floor, near the co-pilot seat.

The valve has an internal pressure relief and

filtered inlet and return ports. There is a
pivoting link that attaches the selector valve to
the hand pump access door. The selector valve
moves from the normally open position to the
closed position when the access door is opened.
The pressure relief valve limits the pressure
that may be applied to the alternate gear down
actuators by relieving hand pump pressure to
return at 3150 PSI.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-93

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

1
A

LEGEND
1. Landing Gear Alternate Extension Door
2. Landing Gear Downlock Verification Lights
3. Landing Gear Downlock Verification Switch.

FWD

Figure 32-73.  LG Downlock Verification Lights - Controls and Indications

32-94 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-73. LG Downlock Verification
Lights - Controls and Indications.

Below the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE

EXTENSION door is the verification switch and
the three green verification lights.

An alternate landing gear down and locked

verification system is located in the flight
compartment, in the aft section of the LANDING
GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION compartment.
The system has a 2-position, momentary type
toggle switch, a light panel that contains three
green lights, and four proximity sensors. Two
of the proximity sensors are used in series and
are attached to the NLG. One proximity sensor
is installed on each of the MLG. The system
components on each landing gear are activated
when the downlock verification switch is moved
to the ON position. The system indication lights
come on as each landing gear is locked down.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-95

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

MLG Alternate Extension Control

and Inhibit Switch

Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit

NLG Alternate Extension Control

amd MLG Hand Pump

Landing Gear Selector Lever and Control Panel fs571a01.cgm

Figure 32-74.  Landing Gear Extension and Retraction

32-96 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

OPERATION The PSEU extinguishes the red lights and
illuminates the MLG green safe lights on the
Alternate Extension control panel.
Refer to Figure 32-74. Landing Gear Extension Pulling upwards on the release handle operates a
and Retraction. cable mechanism to unlock the overcenter lock in
the NLG door mechanism, allowing the spring to
The landing gear inhibit switch is set to the inhibit contract, opening the doors.
position.
The PSEU will illuminate the door open amber
A ground is supplied from the switch to the PSEU light on the control panel.
at Pin A10K.
Pulling the release handle further operates a
This inhibits Landing Gear Control by Proximity cable mechanism to a lever in the top of the
Sensor Card A. Make sure that the LDG GEAR NLG wheel well.
INOP caution light comes on.
Rotating the lever rotates the pivot tube of the
Open the alternate RELEASE door. The door cable NLG lock system.
system repositions the bypass valve to open. The
open bypass valve causes all of the landing gear Rotating the pivot tube unlocks the overcenter
actuators to bypass to return. lock in the upper and lower lock strut assembly,
causing the NLG to free fall to the down and
Pulling the alternate release handle operates the locked position. This is assisted by the airstream
cable assembly that unlocks the overcenter lock in and the tension springs in the NLG lock system.
the MLG door mechanism. The spring contracts,
operating the door mechanism, opening the doors. The PSEU will illuminate the green NLG safe light
on the control panel.
The PSEU illuminates the MLG door open amber
lights on the LG Control and Indication panel.

Pulling the alternate release handle to the full

down position operates the cable system and
mechanically releases the MLG uplocks. The
MLG extends by gravity.

The PSEU illuminates the MLG unsafe red lights

on the control panel.

Opening the alternate extension door positions the

emergency down selector valve mechanically, and
gives access to the hand pump socket.

Operating the hand pump supplies hydraulic

pressure to the MLG alternate extension
actuators. The actuators extend, push on the
yoke assemblies ensuring the MLG reaches
the down and locked position assisted by the
springs of the stabilizer brace assembly.

The MLG downlock proximity sensors send

target near signals to the PSEU.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-97

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

A
7

1 MAIN LANDING GEAR

3
D
FW
4

6 LEGEND
5 1. Outer Wheel Half
2. Inner Wheel Half
3. Wheel Insert
4. Heat Shield
5. Bearing Cup (Inner)
A 6. Performed Packing (Inside)
7. Main Wheel Tires.

fs144a01.cgm

Figure 32-75.  Main Wheel and Tire Assembly

32-98 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-41-00 WHEELS gasket is installed on the outer wheel half for
protection. An inflation valve is installed in
the outer wheel half. The over inflation plug
GENERAL contains a disk that ruptures, and deflates the
tire to zero pressure.
The wheels support the weight of the aircraft
and permit the aircraft to move on the ground.
Thermal relief plugs are made of fusible metal
The brakes convert energy necessary to bring
that melts at a specified temperature. This will
the aircraft to a stop.
release the pressure in the tire and prevent an
explosion if the wheel gets too hot. The wheel
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION inserts engage the drive slots in the brake disks.
The aircraft has six wheels. Two wheels are
The heatshield decreases the transfer of heat
installed on the nose landing gear, and two are
from the brake to the wheel and tire assembly.
installed on each main landing gear.

Two different wheel assemblies can be used on

the main landing gear:

•• Main wheel assembly with a 32 × 8.8-16

(227 psi 18 ply) tubeless tire
•• Main wheel assembly with a 34×10.75-16
(141 psi 16 ply) tubeless tire.

Each nosewheel has a 22×6.50-10 (89 psi 8 ply)

tubeless tire.

COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION
Main Wheels
Refer to Figure 32-75. Main Wheel and Tire
Assembly.

The main wheels are split type made of forged

aluminum wheel halves. The two halves are
held together with equally spaced tie bolts,
washers, and nuts.

A preformed packing is installed on the inner

wheel half to prevent air leakage through the
wheel mating surfaces.

The bearings are lubricated with grease.

Bearing seals are installed at the outer surface
of the bearings to prevent contamination.

A retaining ring holds the outer bearing in

place. Grease retainers are installed next to
each bearing cup to prevent the flow of grease
into the center of the wheel. A hubcap and

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-99

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

10

LEGEND
1. Hub Cap
2. Axle Nut
3. Retaining Ring
4. Outer Bearing Seal
5. Outer Bearing
6. Main Wheel Tire Assembly
7. Inner Bearing
8. Inner Bearing Seal
9. Axle
10. Brake Unit

3
NOTE
2
On aircraft without Modsum
1 4−126316.

Figure 32-76.  Main Wheel and Tire Assembly - Removal and Installation

32-100 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Installation of the Main Wheel and MLG Axle Bullet
Tire Assembly Refer to Figure 32-77. MLG Axle Bullet.
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for Used for installation and removal of MLG
training purposes only. For a more detailed wheel and brake assembly.
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. Manufactured from aluminum alloy 6061 - T6.

Refer to Figure 32-76. Main Wheel and Tire

Assembly - Removal and Installation.

•• Visual check for wear damage and

cleanliness
•• Lubricate bearings, axle and axle nut
with grease
•• Install axle bullet
•• Align wheel inserts with the slots in
rotor disks
•• Push the wheel on the axle and brake
assembly
•• Remove axle bullet
•• Ensure outer seal is in correct position
•• While turning the wheel tighten the
axle nut
•• Loosen axle nut Figure 32-77.  MLG Axle Bullet
•• While turning the wheel torque the nut
to the correct value
•• Lock the axle nut
•• Engage blade on inside hub cap with
clip on wheel speed transducer
•• Install hub cap, torque the bolts and
lockwire

NOTE
Make sure that the drive blade on
the hubcap engages with the clip
on the wheel speed transducer.

•• Apply torque seal on all fasteners

•• Fill the tire with nitrogen.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-101

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure 32-78.  Nosewheel and Tire

Assembly

32-102 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Nosewheels NOTE
Refer to Figure 32-78. Nosewheel and Tire Install the water shield so that
Assembly. the words THIS SIDE OUT
point at the nosewheel strut.
The nosewheels are split type made of forged
aluminum wheel halves. The two halves are •• Carefully put the nosewheel and tire
held together with equally spaced tie bolts, assembly on the axle.
washers, and nuts.
•• Install the outer bearing and seal on the axle.
Push the outer bearing and seal into the outer
A preformed packing is installed on the inner
side of the nosewheel and tire assembly.
wheel half to prevent air leakage through the
wheel mating surfaces. •• Lubricate the threads of the axle nut and
the axle with grease.
The bearings and cups are lubricated with
•• Install the axle nut on the axle.
grease. Bearing seals are installed at the outer
surface of the bearings to prevent contamination. •• Turn the nosewheel and tire assembly.
At the same time, torque the axle nut.
A water deflector shield is installed on the
inner wheel half assembly to keep water spray NOTE
away from the bearing seals and bearing.
Turn the nosewheel and tire
assembly in the direction that
A hubcap and gasket are installed on the outer
the axle nut is tightened.
wheel for protection. An inflation valve is
installed in the outer wheel half assembly.
•• Loosen the axle nut to zero torque.
An over-inflation plug is installed in the outer •• Turn the nosewheel and tire assembly.
wheel half assembly to prevent over-inflation of At the same time, re-torque the axle nut.
the tire. The plug contains a disk that ruptures,
•• If the locking holes are not aligned,
and deflates the tire to zero pressure.
tighten the axle nut to the nearest
locking hole.
Installation of the Nosewheel and
Tire Assembly NOTE
The following is an abbreviated description of Turn the nosewheel and tire
the maintenance practice and is intended for assembly in the direction that
training purposes only. For a more detailed the axle nut is tightened.
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. •• Put the washers on the bolts. Install the
bolts through the holes in the axle nut
•• Do a visual check of the axle for signs and the axle.
of wear and damage.
•• Install the ball seat washers and the nuts
•• Put a layer of wheel bearing grease on on the bolt. Torque the nuts. Safety the
the bearing cups. nuts.
•• Lubricate the bearings and seals. •• Apply torque seal to all fasteners.
•• Install the inner bearing, the inner bearing •• Install the hubcap.
seal, and the water shield in the inner
•• Torque the screws and apply torque seal.
side of the nosewheel and tire assembly.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-103

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Fill Valve Gauge
2. Valve Cap
3. O-ring. B

3
A
1

A
B

Figure 32-79.  Fill Valve Gauge

32-104 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Fill Valve Gauge (Optional) Tire Wear
Refer to Figure 32-79. Fill Valve Gauge. It is acceptable to continue operations for an
additional 8 landings after the tire reinforcement
The fill valve gauge is installed on each wheel cord first becomes visible in the tread area.
assembly. The fill valve gauge has a built in
tire pressure indicator. Operating with worn tires to this extended
wear allowance may result in the tire casing
The tire pressure can be read directly from the becoming non-retreadable.
analog dial type indicator.

The function of the fill valve gauge is to give

the tire pressure indication directly from the
wheel assembly.

NOTE
The fill valve gauge is installed
on Aircraft with Modsum - MS
4-900220.

Inflate the tires with nitrogen to the correct

pressure with a servicing kit that includes a low
pressure regulator.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-105

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure 32-80.  Brakes System Hydraulic Synoptic

32-106 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-42-00 MAIN LANDING NOTES
GEAR BRAKE SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The brake system is used to decrease the aircraft
speed during ground operations.

GENERAL
The MLG brake system is controlled by the pilot’s
and co-pilot’s brake pedals.

The brake system has the following components:

•• Pilot and Co-pilot brake pedals
•• Brake control cables
•• Brake control valve
•• Brake pressure transducer
•• Fuse/shuttle valves and
•• Main wheel brake units.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer to Figure 32-80. Brakes System Hydraulic
Synoptic.

When the brake pedal is pushed, the brake

control valve will supply hydraulic pressure to
the brake assembly in proportion to the amount
of brake pedal travel.

The pressure plate assembly pushes the rotor

disks, stator disks, and the end plate together.

As the disks are pushed together, the friction

between the disks causes resistance.

The resistance is transmitted from the brake

unit to the wheel and tire assemblies causing
the wheel to slow down.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-107

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure 32-81.  Brake Wear Indicator Pins

LEGEND
1. Main Wheel-brake Unit
2. Hydraulic Hose
3. Reducer
4. O−Ring
5. Axle
6. Brake Pin Bushing 6
7. Brake Pin
8. Brake Bleeder Valve 2
3
4

5 6 1
7

FWD

Figure 32-82.  Main Wheel Brake Unit - Removal and Installation

32-108 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION •• Apply hydraulic fluid to the threads of
the reducer and the O-ring
Main Wheel Brake Units •• Install the O-ring on the reducer
Refer to Figure 32-81. Brake Wear Indicator Pins. •• Install the reducer on the brake unit and
torque
There are two brake units installed on the axle
of the main landing gear. The brake pins on •• Apply torque seal across the reducer
the MLG shock strut engage with the bushings and on the main wheel brake unit
in the piston housing assembly to transfer the
•• Carefully install the brake unit on the
braking loads to the landing gear.
axle. Make sure that the brake pins
engage with the brake pin bushings
The brake assembly has three primary
sub-components: •• Remove the caps from the hydraulic
hose and the reducer and connect the
•• Piston housing assembly hydraulic hose to the reducer
•• Carbon heat sink stack and
•• Torque plate assembly. NOTE
Make sure that you install the
The piston housing is made of aluminum. It elbow of the hydraulic hose
contains six adjuster assemblies, two bleeder vertically in-line with the brake
valves, and one bleeder plug. unit or angled a small distance in
to the shock strut.
The bleeder valves and bleeder plugs are
interchangeable so the brakes can be installed •• Torque the hydraulic hose
on the left or right side.
•• Apply torque seal across the coupling
Two wear indicator pins are attached to the nut of the hydraulic hose and the reducer
pressure plate assembly and extend out of •• Apply torque seal across the reducer
the piston housing through sleeves to give an and onto the wheel brake unit
indication of brake wear.
•• Install the main wheel and tire assembly
Installation of the Main Wheel •• Lower the MLG main wheel assembly.
Brake Units Remove the jack
The following is an abbreviated description of •• Bleed the main landing-gear brake
the maintenance practice and is intended for system.
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

Refer to Figure 32-82. Main Wheel Brake Unit -

Removal and Installation.

NOTE
Make sure that the surfaces are
clean with no corrosion, paint,
grease, dirt, or preservation fluid.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-109

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Bleed Screw
2. Washer 5
3. Bleeder Valve
4. Brake Unit
5. Bleed Hose
6. Container 4 2
1

NOTE
6
Shock strut and axle not shown.

Figure 32-83.  Main Landing Gear Brake System - Bleed

32-110 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Bleed the Brakes with Main Brake NOTE
System The flow of hydraulic fluid can
The following is an abbreviated description of stop because the fuse/shuttle valve
the maintenance practice and is intended for operates. If this occurs, release
training purposes only. For a more detailed the brake pedal. Then push and
description of the practice, refer to the task in hold the brake pedal again.
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
•• Close the bleeder valves and torque.
Refer to Figure 32-83. Main Landing Gear •• Release the brake pedal.
Brake System - Bleed.
•• Remove the hose from the bleeder
This procedure will bleed the brakes from the valve.
brake control valve to the brake units.
•• Install the screw and the washer in the
bleeder valve and torque.
After the replacement of a brake unit you can
use this procedure or the procedure to bleed the •• Push the brake pedals. Make sure the
brakes with the parking brake system. operation of the pedals is not soft. If the
operation of the brake pedals is soft, do
this procedure again.
NOTE
•• Do a visual inspection of the brake line
After the replacement of a brake
and connections for leaks.
unit, it is only necessary to bleed
the brake unit that you replaced. •• With the Hydraulic pressure removed,
You must bleed all of the brake check the quantity in the No.1 hydraulic
units after the replacement of system.
other brake system components.

•• Remove the bleed screw and the washer

from the bleeder valve on the main
wheel-brake unit.
•• Install the bleed hose on the bleeder
valve. Put the other end of the bleed
hose in the container.
•• Open the bleeder valve at the MLG
brake unit.
•• Lightly push the brake pedal in the
flight compartment until hydraulic fluid
flows from the bleeder valves.
•• Hold t he brake pedal and l e t the
hydraulic fluid flow from the bleeder
valves until the hydraulic fluid does not
contain air bubbles.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-111

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Brake Bleeding Kit

Refer to Figure 32-84. Brake Bleeding Kit.

PN: G601R324301-1

Used to bleed the brake lines.

Pump

Clamp

Hose

Figure 32-84.  Brake Bleeding Kit

SYSTEM 32 1. NUMBER OF PARTS REQUIRED FOR ALL FLIGHT

CONDITIONS EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN COLUMN 2.
LANDING GEAR
ATA
SUB-SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION 2. REMARKS AND/OR EXCEPTIONS

32---4 BRAKE ASSEMBLY WEAR 8 One may be missing from each brake
INDICATOR PIN assembly provided the pin is replaced at the
next brake removal.

Figure 32-85.  CDL - Brake Assembly Wear Indicator Pin

32-112 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Brake Control Valve Hydraulic pressure and return lines connect
the brake control valve to the No.1 hydraulic
Refer to Figure 32-86. Brake Control Valve. system. Hydraulic lines connect the brake
control valve to the anti-skid valves.
The brake control valve is installed in the left
wing root on the front spar. The function of the brake control valve is to
meter hydraulic pressure to the brake units as
The left brake pedals are connected to the left determined by pedal input.
lever of the brake control valve. The right
brake pedals are connected to the right lever
of the brake control valve.

The brake control valve has two internal

metering sections in a common housing.

LEGEND
A
1. Right Brake Lever
2. Brake Control Valve
3. Hydraulic Line
4. Left Brake Lever
5. Left Brake Cable Turnbuckle.

FWD

A 5

Figure 32-86.  Brake Control Valve

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-113

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Fuse/Shuttle Valves
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-87. Fuse - Shuttle Valve.
•• Figure 32-88. Fuse - Shuttle Valve.

There are two fuse/shuttle valves installed on

the left wall of each nacelle. Hydraulic pressure
is supplied to the brake units through the skid
control valves and the fuse/shuttle valves.

The fuse component of the fuse/shuttle valve

closes if the fluid flow is more than a specified
quantity. This limits the leakage of hydraulic
fluid if a brake line or a brake develops a leak.

The shuttle component of the valve sends either

normal or parking/emergency brake pressure to
the brakes.

Figure 32-87.  Fuse - Shuttle Valve

FWD

NOTE LEGEND
1 Left component shown. 1. Fuse
Right component similar. 2. Shuttle Valves.

Figure 32-88.  Fuse - Shuttle Valve

32-114 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Brake Pedals The brake pedal inputs are applied to the brake
control levers.
Refer to Figure 32-89. Brake Pedals.
The linkage attached to the base of the pedals
The brake pedals are installed in the flight is spring loaded to return the pedals to the off
compartment and are connected to the brake position when the pedals are released.
control valve.

The co-pilot’s inputs are transmitted by a cable

system to the spring loaded lever arm aft of the
pilot’s brake pedal.

10

4
LEGEND
5 1. Co-pilot’s Brake Pedals
2. Tie Rods
6 3. Brake Control Levers
8 4. Brake Interconnect Cables
5. Lever Springs
A 6. Cables to Brake Control Valve
7 7. Push Rods
8. Spring Rods
9. Tie Rods
10. Pilot’s Brake Pedal.

Figure 32-89.  Brake Pedals

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-115

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Brake Control Cables The cables are routed along the ceiling through
grommets at four frame stations.
Refer to Figure 32-90. Brake Control Cables.
The cables pass through another three pairs of
The brake control cables connect the pilot’s pulleys in the left wing root and then connect
pedals to the two levers on the brake control to the two levers on the brake control valve.
valve. The brake control valve is installed in
the left wing root area.

The cables are routed under the floor along the

left side to a pair of pulleys and then upward
through a cable guide on the flight compartment
bulkhead to another pair of pulleys on the ceiling.

3 3 3

5 6 2

LEGEND
1. Brake Control Cables
2. Pedal Mechanism
3
3. Pulleys
NOTE
2 4. Cable Guide
1 Flight compartment bulkhead. 5. Grommets
2 Left wing root area. 6. Brake Control Valve.
1

Figure 32-90.  Brake Control Cables

32-116 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Brake Pressure Transducers The transducers sense the pressure through
the brake control valve. The function of
Refer to Figure 32-91. Brake Pressure these pressure transducers is to send data
Transducers. to the flight data processing system for
recording on the FDR.
The brake pressure transducers are installed
in the left wing root area near to the brake
control valve.

One transducer senses the left brake system and

the other senses the right brake system.

LEGEND
1. Transducers
2. Electrical Connector.

Brake Control
Valve (Ref) 1
A

Figure 32-91.  Brake Pressure Transducers

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-117

32-118 32  LANDING GEAR

NO. 2 SYSTEM NO. 2 SYSTEM

RESERVOIR PRESSURE LEGEND

PRESSURE
RETURN

SUCTION

DASH 8 Q400
HIGH PRESSURE AIR

CHECK VALVE
RESTRICTOR
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FUSE

SHUTTLE VALVE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ACCUMULATOR
PARKING BRAKE
PARKING CONTROL VALVE HAND PUMP
BRAKE CHARGE VALVE
LEVER
GAUGE

ACCUMULATOR
TO FUSE/SHUTTLE PRESSURE
VALVES AND BRAKE TRANSDUCER
UNITS ON OTHER
MAIN LANDING GEAR PRESSURE RELIEF
VALVE
NORMAL BRAKE NORMAL BRAKE
SYSTEM SYSTEM

NOTE
MAIN WHEEL SHOWN WITH PARKING BRAKE APPLIED
BRAKE UNITS
fs665a01a.cgm

Figure 32-92.  Parking Brake Hydraulic System

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-44-00 PARKING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
BRAKE SYSTEM Refer to Figure 32-92. Parking Brake Hydraulic
System.
INTRODUCTION When the PARK/EMERG control lever is moved
from the stowed toward the PARK position, the
The parking brake system is used to keep
park brake control valve is actuated.
hydraulic pressure applied to the brake units.
The parking brake control valve can apply
The parking brake system can stop the aircraft
progressive hydraulic pressure to the brakes.
on the ground.
The hydraulic pressure from the parking brake
GENERAL control valve causes the shuttle valves to move
and block off normal brake pressure to the brakes.
The parking brake system uses the No.2
hydraulic system. An accumulator in the brake
The release button on the parking brake lever is
system supplies pressure for parking brake
pushed in and the lever is moved forward to the
operation when the No.2 hydraulic system
stowed position to release the parking brake.
pressure is not available.
The parking brake accumulator is normally
A hand pump is used to manually pressurize
pressurized from the No.2 hydraulic system.
the parking brake accumulator. Parking
brake pressure is applied equally to all of
A fully charged accumulator will supply six
the brake units.
parking brake applications.
A PARKING BRAKE caution light on the
CAWP in the flight compartment comes on
when the parking brake lever is in the PARK
position. A parking brake pressure indicator is
shown on No.2 MFD as part of the permanent
system area No.2.

The parking brake system is comprised of the

components:
•• Parking brake control lever
•• Parking brake pressure indication
•• Control cable assembly
•• Parking brake control valve
•• Hand pump
•• Accumulator
•• Charge valve and gauge.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-119

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure 32-93.  Park Brake Control Valve

FWD

LEGEND
1. Accumulator Pressure Transducer
2. Parking Brake Control Cable
2 3. Parking Brake Control Valve.

ft405a01.cgm

Figure 32-94.  Park Brake Control Valve

32-120 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES
Parking Brake Control Valve
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-93. Park Brake Control Valve.
•• Figure 32-94. Park Brake Control Valve.

The parking brake control valve is installed in

the right wing root.

The No.2 hydraulic system pressure is supplied

to the parking brake control valve. The pressure
is metered to the brake units in proportion to
the amount of parking brake lever movement.

When the parking brake lever is set in the

PARK position, full hydraulic pressure is
applied to the four brake units.

A pressure transducer, relief valve and two

check valves are contained in the brake control
valve housing.

The function of the parking brake control valve

is to meter the No.2 hydraulic system pressure
to the brake units.

Parking Brake Hand pump

A lever operated hand pump is installed on the
right wall in the right engine nacelle. The hand
pump handle is spring clipped and pip-pinned
in the nacelle.

It supplies an alternate method to pressurize

the accumulator to 3000 psi (20684 kPa) when
the aircraft is on the ground and the engines
are not operating.

The function of the hand pump is to manually

increase the park brake system pressure when
No.2 hydraulic system is not available.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-121

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Post SB 84-32-99 Reposition of NOTES

the Parking Brake Hand Pump
Lever to the Nose Compartment
Refer to Figure 32-95. Parking Brake Handle
Reposition.

If the quick release pin is not fully engaged,

the potential exists for the pin to migrate out,
disengaging, and allowing the pump lever to
become dislodged from its installation position
in the wheel well.

It became necessary to relocate the existing

parking brake hand pump lever from RH
nacelle to the flight deck web in the RH side
of the nose compartment.

Figure 32-95.  Parking Brake Handle Reposition

32-122 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

SYSTEM 32 1. NUMBER OF PARTS REQUIRED FOR ALL FLIGHT
CONDITIONS EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN COLUMN 2.
LANDING GEAR

ATA
SUB-SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION 2. REMARKS AND/OR EXCEPTIONS

32---3 PARKING BRAKE HANDPUMP 1 May be missing with no performance penalty

HANDLE (Located in the nose provided:
compartment equipment bay) a. Alternate Landing Gear Extension
handpump handle must be stowed in its
proper location in the flight compartment.

Figure 32-96.  CDL - Parking Brake Hand Pump Handle

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-123

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Parking Brake Accumulator The fluid side is pressurized by the No.2

hydraulic system or the hand pump. The fully
Refer to Figure 32-97. Parking Brake charged accumulator will hold enough pressure
Accumulator. to supply six full parking brake applications
and releases.
The parking brake accumulator is installed in
the right wing root area. The function of the accumulator is to supply
hydraulic pressure for the parking brake
The accumulator is a cylindrical piston type operation when No.2 hydraulic pressure system
with a gross rated volume of 50 in³ (820 cm³). is not available.

The accumulator is pressurized with nitrogen.

The accumulator is pre-charged to 500 psi
(3447 kPa).

Figure 32-97.  Parking Brake Accumulator

32-124 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Charge Valve and Gauge Functional Check of Park Brake
Refer to: Accumulator Pre-Charge Pressure
•• Figure 32-98. Charge Valve and Gauge. The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
The charge valve and gauge are installed in training purposes only. For a more detailed
the right wing root area. They are connected description of the practice, refer to the task in
to the gas pressure side of the parking brake the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
accumulator.
WARNING
The gauge supplies an indication of the
accumulator pressure. The charge valve is
OBEY ALL HYDRAULIC
used to charge the gas side of the accumulator
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
with nitrogen.
Do the check as follows:
Servicing of the Parking Brake
Accumulator with Nitrogen •• Ensure all hydraulic power is OFF.
The following is an abbreviated description of •• Ensure the main wheels are chocked.
the maintenance practice and is intended for
•• Operate EMERG BRAKE lever until 0
training purposes only. For a more detailed
pressure is indicated on MFD #2.
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. •• Place EMERG BRAKE to OFF.
•• C h e c k a c c u m u l a t o r p r e - c h a r g e i s
•• R e m o v e t h e v a l v e c a p f r o m t h e
500±25 psi.
accumulator charging valve.
•• Connect the hose of the nitrogen
servicing kit to the accumulator
charging valve.
•• Charge the accumulator until the
adjacent gauge shows 500 ±25 psi.
•• Remove the hose of the nitrogen
servicing kit from the accumulator
charging valve.
•• Install the valve cap on the accumulator
charging valve.
•• Pressurize the parking brake system to
3000 ±50 psi with the hand pump.
•• Operate the parking brake lever in the
flight compartment to make sure that
the parking brake system is serviceable.
•• Use the hand pump to pressurize the
parking brake system to 3000 ±50 psi
again.
•• Make sure that the PK BRK indication
from the HYD PRESS readout on the
MFD shows 3050 ±50 psi. Figure 32-98.  Charge Valve and Gauge

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-125

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Parking Brake Control Quadrant NOTES

Refer to Figure 32-99. Park Brake Control
Quadrant.

The parking brake lever is installed in the flight

compartment. It is in the emergency brake
control quadrant. On left side of the center
console.

A cable assembly connects the parking brake

lever to the parking brake control valve. A
release button on the parking brake lever
unlocks the lever from the PARK position.

The function of the parking brake lever is to

supply alternate brake control and to set the
parking brake.

LEGEND
1. Emergency Brake Lever
2. Emergency Brake ON Position
3 1 3. Release Button
4. Control Quadrant (Ref.)

R R
A A
T T
I I
N N I
G G

FLIGHT
IDLE

DISC

4 2

Figure 32-99.  Park Brake Control Quadrant

32-126 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Parking Brake Control Cable NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-100. Parking Brake Control
Cable.

The parking brake control cable is a single

open loop cable which connects the park brake
lever to the parking brake control valve.

The cable is routed from the lever quadrant through

pulleys under the flight compartment floor to the
lever on the parking brake control valve.

3
1

3
4
3

LEGEND
1. Parking Brake Control Cable.
2. Park Brake Lever.
3. Pulleys.
2 4. Cable Guide.
5. Grommets.
6. Park Brake Control Valve.
3
1

Figure 32-100.  Parking Brake Control Cable

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-127

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1
1. Park Brake Lever
2. Cable Quadrant
3. Cable
2
4. Connector
5. Center Console
6. Caution Light Micro-Switch.

4
6

Figure 32-101.  Parking Brake Micro-Switch

32-128 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS NOTES
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-101. P
 arking Brake
Micro-Switch.
•• Figure 32-102. C
 ontrols and Indications
- Parking Brake System.

A 28 VDC electrical power source is needed

for the PARK BRAKE pressure indicator and
the pressure transmitter to operate.

The park brake pressure signal is sent to the

Integrated Flight Cabinet (IFC) to be converted
from analog to digital data for display on the
EIS on the co-pilot MFD.

A PARKING BRAKE caution light on the

Caution and Warning panel in the flight
compartment comes on when the parking brake
lever is in the PARK position.

Interfaces
The parking brake system is interfaced with:
•• The Take-Off Configuration Warning
System
•• T h e H y d r a u l i c S y s t e m S P U / P T U
Automatic Activation
•• The Cockpit Voice Recorder Erase
Interlock System
•• The Caution and Warning System.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-129

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

OVERHEAD CONSOLE B

LEGEND ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
1. Parking Brake Hydraulic Pressure Indicator
2. Parking Brake (Amber) BATT APU GEN AC GEN 1
LOAD ¡C LOAD VOLT LOAD
MAIN +1. 00 +22 +1. 00 A 115 . 06
AUX - . 34 +22 B 115 . 06
MAIN - . 00
STBY 34 +22 DC GEN C 115 . 06
AUX 00 1 LOAD 2
STBY 00
DC BUS +1. 00 . 06 AC GEN 2
L VOLT R VOLT LOAD
ESS 27.7 27.7 TRU A 115 . 06
MAIN 28.5 28.5 1 LOAD 2 B 115 . 06
ESS
SEC 26.1 26.1 +1. 00 +1. 00 C 115 . 06
MAIN
S EC

PARKING
BRAKE

0 5
HYD PRESS HYD QTY
FLAP 10 PSIxx 1000
PSI 1000 % x 100
DEG PK
BRK STBY 1 2 3 1 2 3
35 4 1

0 0
1
A PARKING BRAKE CAUTION LIGHT B PARKING BRAKE PRESSURE INDICATION

Figure 32-102.  Controls and Indications - Parking Brake System

32-130 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Systems & Nos de 1. 2. Number installed - Nombre d’articles installés
Sequence système Item - Article
Numbers de série 3. Number required for dispatch - Nombre d’articles à expédier

4. Remarks or Exceptions - Remarques ou exceptions

-40-1 Parking Brake Pressure
Indications
1) HYD PRESS PK BRK C 1 0 (M) May be inoperative provided:
Indication a) The Aft Wing Root Fairing Indicator is verified
operative, and
b) Brake pressure is confirmed adequate prior to
engine start.

Figure 32-103.  CDL - Parking Brake Pressure Indications

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-131

32-132 32  LANDING GEAR

METERED PRESSURE RETURN

FROM THE BRAKE NO. 1 SYSTEM
CONTROL VALVE RESERVOIR
LEGEND
ANTI SKID CONTROL VALVE
METERED PRESSURE
ANTI SKID PRESSURE

DASH 8 Q400
RETURN
STATIC
CHECK VALVE
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FILTER
SERVO SERVO
VALVE RESTRICTOR
VALVE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FUSE

SHUTTLE VALVE
SPOOL SPOOL
AND AND
SLEEVE SLEEVE
VALVE VALVE

PARKING BRAKE
(NO. 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM)

NOTE
SHOWN WITH BRAKES APPLIED
MAIN WHEEL (WHEELS NOT IN SKID CONDITION)
fs667a01a.cgm BRAKE UNITS

Figure 32-104.  Anti-Skid System - Hydraulic Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-46-00 ANTI-SKID NOTES
SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The anti-skid system modulates hydraulic
pressure to the four wheel brake units to supply
wheel anti-skid protection.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 32-104. Anti-Skid System -
Hydraulic Schematic.

The brake pedals cause the No.1 hydraulic

system pressure to be sent through the brake
control valve to the anti-skid control valves.
The anti-skid control valves change the
hydraulic pressure to the brake units.

The anti-skid system operates with the normal

brake system.

The anti-skid system is comprised of the

following components:
•• Anti-skid control unit
•• Wheel speed transducers
•• Skid control valves
•• ANTISKID switch.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The anti-skid system has the following functions:
•• Touchdown protection
•• Initialization
•• Individual wheel anti-skid
•• Locked wheel protection
•• System monitoring.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-133

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure 32-105.  Anti-Skid System Control Unit

A FWD

A
fs140a01.cgm

Figure 32-106.  Anti-Skid System Control Unit

32-134 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION NOTES
Anti-Skid Control Unit
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-105. A
 nti-Skid System
Control Unit.
•• Figure 32-106. A
 nti-Skid System
Control Unit.

The ASCU is installed below the passenger

cabin floor at the mid-wing area, on the
equipment rails.

The ASCU is an electronic box that has two

wheel control circuit boards, one for the inboard
wheels and one for the outboard wheels.

Each wheel board uses a micro-controller and

related circuitry to do the digital processing of
the control and built-in-test software.

The ASCU receives signals from the:

•• Anti-skid switch
•• Four wheel speed transducers
•• Two dual skid control valves
•• PSEU (WOW and uplock).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-135

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Skid Control Valves

Refer to:
•• Figure 32-107. Skid Control Valve.
•• Figure 32-108. Skid Control Valve.

The skid control valves are installed on the left

wall of the wheel wells. The skid control valves
are two separate valves in one common manifold.

Each skid control valve contains a screen on

the inlet port. The screen protects the skid
control valve components from contaminants
larger than 40 microns.

The function of the skid control valve is to Figure 32-107.  Skid Control Valve
control the flow to and from the brake unit, as
commanded by the Anti Skid Control Unit.

FWD

fs141a01.cgm
A

Figure 32-108.  Skid Control Valve

32-136 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Wheel Speed Transducer
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-109. Wheel Speed Transducer.
•• Figure 32-110. Wheel Speed Transducer.

A wheel speed transducer is installed in each

end of the main landing gear axles.

The wheel speed transducer is an electrical

generating device.

The hubcap on the wheel engages with a clip on the

wheel speed transducer. When the wheel turns, the
wheel speed transducer supplies an AC signal with
a frequency of 100 cycles per wheel revolution.

This signal is changed to a digital signal in the Figure 32-109.  Wheel Speed Transducer
ASCU for anti-skid control use.

The function of the wheel speed transducer is to

supply wheel speed information to the ASCU.

FWD

A MLG WHEEL

B WHEEL SPEED TRANSDUCER

Figure 32-110.  Wheel Speed Transducer

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-137

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

WHITE
RIGHT WHEEL
1 A
C SPEED
2 B TRANSDUCER
WHITE/BLUE
WHITE
LEFT WHEEL
3 A
C SPEED
4 B TRANSDUCER
WHITE/BLUE
A
B
LEGEND 2
1. Wheel-Speed Transducer
Harness
2. Electrical Connector
3. Strain Relief Clamp 1
4. Electrical Connector.
3 4

ma288a01.dg, kms, nov21/2006

VIEW B

Figure 32-111.  Wheel Speed Transducer Harness - Removal/Installation

32-138 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Installation of the Wheel-Speed NOTES
Transducer Electrical Harness
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

Refer to Figure 32-111. Wheel Speed Transducer

Harness - Removal/Installation.

This is the wheel speed transducer harness of

the main landing gear (MLG). The harness is
installed in the axle of the MLG shock strut.

NOTE
Make sure the pins are inserted
as tagged on the wheel speed
transducer harness.

Apply sealant to the mating surfaces of the

connector and fill the cavity of the backshell.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-139

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

ANTI-SKID SWITCH
Refer to Figure 32-112. Anti-Skid Switch.

The ANTI-SKID switch is located on the

co-pilot’s glareshield panel.

The ANTI-SKID switch is a three position

OFF/ON/TEST switch.

When the ANTI-SKID switch is set to the ON

position, 28 VDC is supplied to the circuit
boards in the ASCU.

When set to the TEST position, 28 VDC is

supplied to the wheel control circuit boards and
the system BIT function.

When the ANTI-SKID switch is set to OFF, all

electrical power is removed from the ASCU.
A
The function of the ANTI-SKID switch is to
energize and to test the anti-skid system.

LEGEND
1. Anti-Skid Switch

STICK PUSHER
SHUT OFF

ENGINE FIRE

INHIBIT ANTI SKID

TEST

TERRAIN ELEVATOR TRIM

INHIBIT SHUT OFF
CF-AEI
CAUTION
PRESS TO RESET

A 1

Figure 32-112.  Anti-Skid Switch

32-140 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
Refer to Figure 32-113. Anti-Skid Caution Lights.

Failures of the anti-skid system are annunciated

in the flight compartment through two caution
lights on the CAWP:
•• INBD ANTISKID
•• OUTBD ANTISKID.

The caution lights also illuminate during the test;

six seconds on ground; three seconds in flight.

1 2

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

LEGEND
1. Inboard Antiskid (Amber)
2. Outboard Antiskid (Amber)
A

Figure 32-113.  Anti-Skid Caution Lights

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-141

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

MAIN WHEEL
AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY

4
6

5
8

3
LEGEND
1. Bleeder valve adapter.
2. Packing. 2
1
3. Brake unit.
4. Anti−skid tester.
5. Bolts.
6. Washers.
7. Hubcap.
8. Wheel speed transducer.

Figure 32-114.  Anti-Skid System Functional Test

32-142 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Functional Test of the Anti-Skid and the OUTBD ANTISKID caution
lights come on for 2 to 4 seconds
Control System (Built-in Test) and then go off.
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for °° Remove the targets from the main
and the nose landing gears.
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in Refer to Figure 32-114. Anti-Skid System
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. Functional Test.

This test uses the built-in test function of the Make sure that the aircraft is in the configuration
anti-skid control system. that follows:
•• The LANDING GEAR selector is in the
NOTE DN position.
This test is written with the •• The lock pins are installed in the main
aircraft on the ground in a landing gear.
weight-on-wheels condition.
You can also do this test with the •• The nose gear ground lock is engaged.
aircraft on jacks if you simulate •• EMERG BRAKE lever to the OFF
the weight-on-wheels condition. position.
•• Set the ANTISKID switch in the flight •• Connect the anti-skid tester.
compartment to OFF.
•• Make sure that the INBD and OUTBD
Touchdown Protection Test
ANTISKID caution lights come on. •• ANTI SKID switch to the ON position.
•• Set the ANTISKID switch in the flight •• Aircraft is in a WOFFW condition.
compartment to ON.
•• Fully push the left and right brake pedals.
•• Make sure that the INBD and OUTBD
•• No appreciable brake pressure measured
ANTISKID caution lights go off.
at the brake units. (Below 75 psi)
•• Momentarily hold the ANTISKID
• • Incorrect results show a problem with
switch in the flight compartment in the
the anti-skid control unit or a problem
TEST position.
with the W OW signa ls ( P S E U o r
•• Make sure that the INBD ANTISKID WOW switches).
and the OUTBD ANTISKID caution
lights come on for 5 to 7 seconds and Wheel Speed Transducer Test
then go off.
Turn the wheel speed transducer at a constant
•• Put the aircraft in the weight-off-wheels speed between 480 rpm and 2400 rpm.
condition as follows:
°° Put the de-actuator (copper) targets NOTE
on the main landing gears. The ANTI-SKID INOP caution
°° Put the actuator (steel) targets on light may come on momentarily.
the nose landing gear.
•• Make sure that the pressure at the
°° Momentarily hold the ANTISKID selected wheel brake unit increases to
switch in the flight compartment in more than 500 psi.
the TEST position.
•• Make sure that the pressure at the other
°° Make sure that the INBD ANTISKID brake units is less than 150 psi.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-143

32-144 32  LANDING GEAR

WOW SW(IB) H- 13 WOW SW(IB)

MAIN GEAR UP & LOCKED (IB) H 28 MAIN GEAR UP & LOCKED (IB)

ANTI SKID

WOW SW(OB) T 13 WOW SW(OB)

TEST

ON

MAIN GEAR UP & LOCKED (OB) N 28 MAIN GEAR UP & LOCKED (OB)
OFF

32-61 A1 PSEU
A

DASH 8 Q400
A
(Q5) 4 (OB) FAIL IND 35 35 (OB) FAIL IND
ANTISKID INBD 5
3A D TEST
6
(IB) FAIL IND 35 13 (IB) FAIL IND
+ 28 V DC
R. MAIN ON
(R5) 7
CAUTION AND
ANTISKID OUTBD 8
WARNING PANEL
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

3A F 9 OFF (O/H CONSOLE)

RIGHT DC CBP 1 H
2
15 BITE TEST (IB)

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

3
C 17 +28 V DC (IB)
10 16 RTN
11 G

3 331 HI ANTISKID
ANTISKID TEST 111 12 15 BITE TEST (OB) 4 330 LO MA A429
E 17 +28 V DC (OB) B
IOM #1 16 RTN
31-41 A1 IOP #1

ANTISKID SWITCH
(GLARESHIELD)

27 ARINC 429
TRANS'M REQUEST

WST A 32 + WST + 23 1 + (OB)

CNTL VALVE
B (OB) B 33 - (OB) - 24 2 -
(OB)
B
RIGHT OUTBOARD
WHEEL SPD XDCR
CNTL VALVE + 23 3 + (IB)
- 24 4 -
(IB) B
WST A 32 + WST
(IB) B 33 - (IB)
SKID CONTROL
LEGEND RIGHT INBOARD VALVE
METERED PRESSURE WHEEL SPD XDCR
RETURN

STATIC

CHECK VALVE
WST A 8+ WST
(OB) B 9 - (OB)
FILTER

RESTRICTOR LEFT OUTBOARD + 11 1 + (IB)

CNTL VALVE
FUSE WHEEL SPD XDCR - 10 2 -
(IB)
SHUTTLE VALVE
B
WST A 8+ WST 11 3 + (OB)
(IB) B 9 - (IB) CNTL VALVE
10 4 -
(OB)
LEFT INBOARD
SKID CONTROL
WHEEL SPD XDCR
ANTISKID CONTROL UNIT VALVE

Figure 32-115.  Anti-Skid System Electrical Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

ANTI-SKID SYSTEM Initialization
When the aircraft lands, the anti-skid system
OPERATION goes into Initialization Mode when the
following signals are received by the ASCU:
Anti-Skid Operation
•• MLGWOW for > 5 seconds OR
Refer to Figure 32-115. Anti-Skid System
Electrical Schematic. •• Wheel speed > 75 knots.

When the Anti-Skid Switch is selected ON, Metered hydraulic pressure from the brake
Power is supplied from the 28 VDC right main control valve is slightly reduced by the servo
bus through Pins F and D of the switch and out valves, causing the spool and sleeve valves to
of the switch through Pins C and E to Pin 17 of open partially, preventing full braking force.
the Anti-Skid Control Unit.
Individual Wheel
When the aircraft is on the approach for
landing, the PSEU sends signals to the Anti- Individual wheel Anti-Skid Mode starts with
Skid Control Unit. The signals are as follows: the signals that follow:

•• WOFFW to Pins 13 •• MLGWOW > 5 seconds OR

•• Gear NOT Up and Locked to Pins 28. •• Wheel speed < 70 knots.

The ASCU gets the wheel speed < 35 knots Full metered pressure from the brake control
signals from: valve passes through the servo valves. This
pressure operates the brakes. If a skid is
•• Pins 32 and 33 for right inboard and detected, the ASCU commands decreased
right outboard transducers pressure to the affected wheel brake unit, until
the wheel speeds up to match the speed of the
•• Pins 8 and 9 for the left inboard and other wheels.
outboard transducers.

Touchdown Protection Mode causes a full

Locked Wheel
brake release signal sent from: If an inboard, or outboard wheel develops
a skid producing a difference in speed of <
•• ASCU Pins 23 to right dual skid control 30% of the reference speed, Locked Wheel
valve at Pins 1 and 3 Protection is now initiated.
•• ASCU Pins 11 to left dual skid control
All metered pressure, for that brake unit, is
valve at Pins 1 and 3.
released to return by the servo valve until
the locked wheel speed is > 35% of reference
NOTE speed. Reference speed is the speed of the
matched inboard or outboard wheel, on the
All the pins mentioned are used
other side of the aircraft.
throughout all modes of anti-
skid operation.

This causes the servo valve to release all hydraulic

pressure into the return line. The brakes receive
no pressure and the brakes will release.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-145

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Interfaces NOTES
•• The ASCU receives 28 VDC power
from the right main DC circuit
breakers (ANTISKID INBD CB Q5
and ANTISKID OUTBD CB R5). The
ASCU requires power from the two
CBS for correct operation.
•• The fault data recorded by the ASCU is
transmitted over the ARINC 429 data
bus as a series of pages and is shown
on the Audio Radio Control Display
Unit (ARCDU) as a part of the Central
Diagnostic System.

32-146 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-147

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

PRESENT F AU L T S ?
OTHER SYSTEM 1 1/2
< EMU ANTI-SKID >

< FCS ICE PROTECTION >

ON /
MENU
OFF
< ECS APU >

YES NO

< TMCU1 TMCU 2 >

Figure 32-116.  ARCDU CDS ANTISKID Figure 32-117.  PSEU - Present Faults
System

ASC CURRENT FAULTS 1/ 2

LT OUTBOARD WST

Figure 32-118.  ASC - Current Faults

32-148 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

MAINTENANCE Refer to Figure 32-118. ASC - Current Faults.

PRACTICES IMPORTANT •• Do a functional test of the antiskid system

TO THE MLG BRAKING •• On the ARCDU, retrieve the data for
the antiskid system again
SYSTEM •• If there is a message then perform the
The following are abbreviated descriptions of applicable Fault Isolation Procedure.
the maintenance practices and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practices, refer to the tasks
in the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

FAULT ISOLATION
INBD ANTISKID and OUTBD
ANTISKID (Caution lights)
The INBD or OUTBD ANTISKID light
illuminates when there is a loss of ability to
command or control the inboard or outboard
antiskid system.

•• R e t r i e v e D a t a f r o m t h e c e n t r a l
diagnostic system (CDS)

Refer to Figure 32-116. ARCDU CDS ANTISKID

System.

•• Retrieve Data from the proximity sensor

electronics unit (PSEU)

Refer to Figure 32-118. ASC - Current Faults.

NOTE
The fault isolation procedures
for the above PSEU messages
are equivalent to those for the
related CDS PSEU AIR/GND or
PSEU GEAR UP messages.

The Data from the Central Diagnostic System

- Anti-Skid System (ANTI-SKID) cannot be
erased. When a fault is corrected it will be moved
from the ASC CURRENT FAULTS page to the
ASC PAST FAULTS page (requires refresh).

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-149

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

ASC CURRENT FAULTS 1/ 2

NO CURRENT FAULTS

Figure 32-119.  ASC - No Current Faults

#1 STALL FLT DATA

SYST FAIL RECORDER

#2 STALL
GPWS
SYST FAIL

PUSHER PARKING
SYST FAIL BRAKE

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

FLAP LDG GEAR WT ON

RIVE INOP WHEELS

LAP NOSE FUELING

WER STEERING ON

X BAT MAIN BAT FUSELAGE

HOT HOT DOORS

Figure 32-120.  Parking Brake Caution Light

32-150 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

PARKING BRAKE, INDICATION NOTES
DISCREPANCY (CAUTION LIGHT)
The CAWP usually shows the PARKING
BRAKE light on when the EMERG BRAKE
lever is in the PARK position.

NOTE
This is not a malfunction
condition.

Refer to Figure 32-120. Parking Brake Caution

Light.
There are no related central diagnostic system
(CDS) messages.

If the PARKING BRAKE caution light is on

when the EMERG BRAKE lever is in the OFF
position, do the Fault Isolation.
•• Remove and replace the parking brake
control quadrant
•• If the fault still continues, remove and
replace the CAWP
•• If the fault still continues, do a check
of the wiring between the parking brake
control lever and the CAWP
•• If the wiring is unserviceable, repair
the wiring.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-151

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
No. 2 Hydraulic Pressure
Steering Pressure
Return HIGH-SPEED TAXI MODE
Electrical 8° LEFT AND RIGHT
(RUDDER PEDALS)

8° 8°

LOW SPEED TAXI MODE

70° 70° 70° LEFT AND RIGHT
(STEERING CONTROL HANDLE)

UNPOWERED
120° 120° (CASTER) MODE
120° LEFT AND RIGHT

STEERING
CONTROL
HANDLE
RUDDER
PEDALS

STEERING

OFF

NOSEWHEEL
STEERING SWITCH

NOSEWHEEL
STEERING STEERING
PSEU
CONTROL UNIT MOTOR
(SCU)

ON-GROUND NOSE
SIGNAL FROM STEERING
NOSE GEAR
WEIGHT ON CAUTION LIGHT
WHEELS SWITCHES
REDUCTION
GEARBOX

Figure 32-121.  Nosewheel Steering System Schematic

32-152 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-51-00 NOSEWHEEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
STEERING SYSTEM Refer to Figure 32-121. Nosewheel Steering
System Schematic.
INTRODUCTION Nosewheel Steering Hand Control
The steering system gives directional control of Full authority steering of the nosewheels is
the aircraft while on the ground. Steering of the done by the pilot hand control located on the
nosewheels is for taxi, take-off, and landing. pilot’s side console, in the flight compartment.
The steering system also supplies shimmy The pilot hand control is for low speed taxi only.
damping of the nosewheels.
The steering tiller authority can steer the
GENERAL nosewheels 70° to the left and right of the
center position.
The steering system for the nosewheels is
electronically controlled and hydraulically powered.
Rudder Pedal Control
Nosewheel Steering can be controlled by the Limited authority steering of the nosewheels is
following systems: by the rudder pedals.
•• Pilot hand control The rudder pedals allow steering during high
•• Rudder pedal control speed taxi, take-off, and landing.
•• Shimmy damping system. The rudder pedals can steer the nosewheel 8° to the
left and to the right of the center position.
Steering of the nosewheels is available when:
•• The NLG is down and locked Shimmy Damping
•• The aircraft has WOW and The steering system supplies shimmy damping
of the nosewheels.
•• The STEERING switch, is set to the
STEERING position. When the STEERING switch is selected to
STEERING, shimmy damping is supplied
The nosewheel steering system includes the through the steering manifold.
listed components:
Passive, free castor shimmy damping is
•• Electronic steering control unit
supplied when the STEERING switch is in the
•• Nosewheel steering manifold OFF mode.
•• Power steering unit
The free castor mode lets the nosewheels rotate
•• Rotary variable differential transformer 120° to the left and to the right of the center
position.
•• Hydraulic steering motor
•• Nosewheel centering mechanism
•• Pilot hand control
•• Rudder pedal potentiometer
•• Steering switch.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-153

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Figure 32-122.  Steering Control Unit

2
A

FWD
LEGEND
1. SCU
2. Access Panel BITE
fs486a01.cgm
3. Electrical Connector.

Figure 32-123.  Steering Control Unit

32-154 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION BITE Test of the Nosewheel
Steering System
Steering Control Unit (SCU)
The following is an abbreviated description of
Refer to: the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
•• Figure 32-122. Steering Control Unit.
description of the practice, refer to the task in
•• Figure 32-123. Steering Control Unit. the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

The SCU is an electronic box installed on

the outside of the NLG wheel well wall. A
NOTE
quick access panel on the right side of the To retrieve and identify the fault
nose fuselage gives access to the SCU in the codes for the nosewheel steering
equipment bay. system, the NWS switch must be
selected to ON.
The SCU consists of a metal case and cover.
•• On the NWS ECU display, push the BIT
On the front face of the unit is a BITE display panel, switch for approximately 5 seconds and
it is used for diagnostic testing, and an electrical release it. This will start the display.
connector to measure the rigging data voltage.
•• Press the BIT switch again and again, and
scroll through the menu until ‘READ’ is
The SCU uses input commands from:
displayed.
•• The Pilot Hand Tiller •• Push and hold the BIT switch until
•• The Rudder Pedals ‘READ’ is flashing, then release.
•• The PSEU NOTE
•• The Steering Switch You will see the first fault code
•• The Steering Manifold, and when you release the switch.
•• The RVDT. •• If the display reads ‘----’, there are no
faults.
The SCU supplies output commands to the
steering manifold and failure signal to the CAWP. •• If there are fault codes, record them.
•• To complete the BITE test, push the BIT
The SCU does Power-Up test, Continuous BIT switch again and again. Scroll through the
and diagnostic functions. menu until ‘EXIT’ shows.
The SCU can record and store up to 100 failures •• Push and hold the BIT switch until
in a nonvolatile memory for maintenance ’EXIT’ flashes.
functions. The last 18 failures are available to
line maintenance.

The main function of the SCU is electronic

control of the steering system for the nosewheels.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-155

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Nosewheel Steering Hand Control The hand control has hard stops on either side
of the center position. The centering spring
Refer to Figure 32-124. Nosewheel Steering returns the pilot hand control to the neutral
Hand Control. position when the pilot inputs are removed.
The nosewheel steering hand control is The hand control can steer the nosewheels ±70°
installed on the pilot’s side console in the flight of center.
compartment.
The function of the tiller is to transfer the
The hand control has a potentiometer that sends steering inputs to the SCU.
steering signals to the SCU in proportion to the
position of the Pilot Hand Control (PHC).

1 LEFT SIDE CONSOLE

FWD 3

LEGEND
1. Pilot Hand Control
2. Centering Spring
3. Potentiometer. A

Figure 32-124.  Nosewheel Steering Hand Control

32-156 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Rudder Pedal Potentiometer The potentiometer is connected to the rudder
quadrant with a linkage assembly.
Refer to Figure 32-125. Rudder Forward
Assembly (Right Side). The potentiometer sends signals to the SCU
that are in proportion to the position of the
The rudder pedal potentiometer is installed on rudder pedal position.
the support structure of the right rudder control
quadrant below the flight compartment floor. The rudder pedals can steer the nosewheel ±8°
A panel located on the right side of the nose of center.
fuselage gives access to the potentiometer.
The potentiometer of the rudder pedal is
The rudder pedal potentiometer is a self contained monitored by the SCU for failure.
bolt-on assembly with an electrical connection.

A RUDDER FORWARD ASSEMBLY

FWD

LEGEND
1. Rudder Quadrant
2. Linkage Assembly
3. Rudder Pedal Potentiometer
3 4. Support Structure.
B
4

Figure 32-125.  Rudder Forward Assembly (Right Side)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-157

32-158 32  LANDING GEAR

P
PRESSURE
SWITCH

STEERING MANIFOLD LEGEND

PRESSURE

POWER-OFF RETURN
ORIFICE

DASH 8 Q400
MODE SELECTOR COMPENSATOR
VALVE CHECK VALVE

FILTER

RESTRICTOR
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ANTI-CAVITATION
VALVES ORIFICE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RELIEF
VALVE

POWER-ON
ORIFICE
CHARGE
ORIFICE

SOLENOID VALVE
(NORMALLY
CLOSED)

LOAD
RELIEF
EHSV VALVES P

R
RETURN
HYDRAULIC
MOTOR

Figure 32-126.  Nosewheel Steering Hydraulic Synoptic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Nosewheel Steering Manifold The mode selector valve stops hydraulic pressure
to the EHSV when the steering system is in the
Refer to Figure 32-126. Nosewheel Steering passive, free castor mode. The SOV is in the
Hydraulic Synoptic. closed position until the NLG is compressed
when the aircraft lands. The solenoid valve
The nosewheel steering manifold is a self is then energized by signals from the SCU to
contained assembly. It is installed on the right open the mode selector valve and to configure
front side of the NLG outer cylinder. the steering system for powered steering. The
EHSV gets signals from the solenoid valve
The Hydraulic Steering Manifold contains the and converts them into proportional spool
following components: displacement. The spool displacement sends
hydraulic pressure to the hydraulic motor to
•• Filter/inlet check valve
drive the reduction gearbox and to steer the
•• Solenoid operated hydraulic valve nosewheels to the commanded position.
•• Electro Hydraulic servo valve
Nosewheel position signals are sent to the
•• Mode selector valve LVDT installed in the steering manifold, then
to the SCU to keep the nosewheels in the
•• Compensator
commanded steering position. The pressure
•• Relief valves (2) switch senses any changes in hydraulic pressure
that are caused by the failure of the components
•• Shimmy damping orifices (2) (on and off)
in the steering manifold. The pressure switch
•• Anti-cavitation check valves (2) sends a signal to the SCU, when the signal is
received. A light on the Caution and Warning
•• Pressure switch (LRU) panel in the flight compartment illuminates.
•• Compensator charge orifice The pressure switch and the solenoid LRU’s.
•• Case drain check valve
•• Return check valve.

Hydraulic power is supplied by the No.2

hydraulic system. Two electrical connectors
supply power to the steering manifold. The
function of the steering manifold is to control
the hydraulic pressure to the steering motor for
powered steering, and to provide damping. The
steering manifold controls hydraulic pressure
to the steering hydraulic motor for powered
steering of the nosewheels.

Hydraulic power for the steering manifold is

supplied by the No.2 hydraulic system through
the landing gear selector valve extension
tubing. Hydraulic fluid is returned to the
No.2 hydraulic system through the retraction
tubing of the landing gear selector valve. Two
electrical connectors supply electric power to
the steering manifold. One connector supplies
electrical power to the SOV, the EHSV, and
to the EHSV LVDT. The second connector
supplies electrical power to the pressure switch.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-159

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Nosewheel Centering Mechanism

Refer to:
•• Figure 32-127. N
 osewheel Centering
Actuator.
•• Figure 32-128. N
 osewheel Centering
Mechanism.

T he nosewheel cent eri ng mecha nism is

installed on a collar which is attached to the
lower end of the NLG inner cylinder.

The spring loaded, centering actuator has a

roller bearing that rolls on a race on the NLG
outer cylinder. The race has a detent at the
centered position. The centering actuator has Figure 32-128.  Nosewheel Centering
an attached proximity sensor. The proximity Mechanism
sensor sends a centered signal to the PSEU
when the roller is in the detent.

NOTE
The centering actuator cannot
move the nosewheels to the
center position.

Figure 32-127.  Nosewheel Centering

Actuator

32-160 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Power Steering Unit The hydraulic motor operates a reduction
gearbox which steers the nosewheels.
Refer to Figure 32-129. Power Steering Unit.
The function of the power steering unit
The Power Steering Unit (PSU) is installed on is to assist the NLG steering system with
the top of the nose landing gear shock strut. It hydraulic power to steer the nosewheels to the
is a self-contained assembly bolted onto the commanded position.
NLG outer cylinder and keyed to inner cylinder
for transmitting torque.

The PSU has a steering manifold, a hydraulic

motor, and a reduction gearbox with RVDT’s.

Hydraulic pressure to operate the steering is

supplied by the No.2 hydraulic system.

LEGEND
1. Power Steering Unit
2. Shock Strut.

A B

Figure 32-129.  Power Steering Unit

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-161

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

32-162 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Removal of Power Steering Unit NOTES
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

For full information of the task consult the

AMM.

1. Place aircraft in standard configuration for

maintenance.
2. Open and lock landing gear doors.
3. Remove steering hydraulic motor.
4. Remove steering feedback assembly.
5. Remove grease and oil from steering
gearbox.
6. Remove all bolts and washers securing the
gearbox.
7. Remove gearbox using 3 jacking screws
designated as AT 31956 NLG Steering Box
Puller Kit.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-163

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Steering Manifold
2. Hydraulic Motor.

D 2
FW

Figure 32-130.  Hydraulic Steering Motor

Figure 32-131.  Steering Feedback Assembly

32-164 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Hydraulic Steering Motor NOTES
Refer to Figure 32-130. Hydraulic Steering Motor.

The hydraulic motor is attached to the lower

left side of the reduction gearbox.

The hydraulic motor drives the feedback gear

of the reduction gearbox.

The hydraulic motor receives hydraulic pressure

through the Electro Hydraulic Servo Valve.

The function of the hydraulic motor is to

drive the reduction gear assembly to steer the
nosewheels to the commanded position.

Steering Feedback Assembly

Refer to Figure 32-131. Steering Feedback
Assembly.

The steering feedback assembly is installed on the

top of the NLG shock strut. There are two RVDT’s
which are part of the steering feedback assembly.

The nosewheel position feedback is accomplished

through the previously mentioned RVDT’s.

Each RVDT connects to the feedback gear of

the reduction gearbox.

The SCU uses one RVDT to supply the position

of the nosewheels. The SCU uses the second
RVDT to check the accuracy of the first RVDT
as a fault test.

The function of the two RVDT is to provide

nosewheel position feedback to the SCU.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-165

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

LEGEND
1. Nosewheel Steering Toggle Switch.

CIR BKR W/S WIPER ICE PILOTS

LIGHT ICE DETECT FLT PNL

STEERING

Figure 32-132.  Nosewheel Steering Switch

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

WT ON
WHEELS

NOSE
STEERING
2

LEGEND
1. Nose Steering (Amber)
2. Weight On Wheels (Amber).
1

Figure 32-133.  Nosewheel Steering System Caution Lights

32-166 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Steering Switch •• Press the BITE switch and scroll through
the menu until “NWP1” displays.
Refer to Figure 32-132. Nosewheel Steering Switch.
•• Measure the output voltage at the test
The steering switch is located on the pilot side jack found at the front of the SCU. The
console. reference indication must be 0 VDC.
•• Do the same for “NWP2”.
The switch is a two position, toggle switch. It
has a STEERING and an OFF position. •• This electronically zero’s the two
RVDT’s inside the SCU.
The function of the STEERING switch is to •• The SCU then electronically sets the
supply 28 VDC to the SCU. travel limits.

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

Refer to Figure 32-133. Nosewheel Steering
System Caution Lights.

If any component in the steering system fails, the

NOSE STEERING caution light will come on.

If the NG WOW sensors or harness are damaged,

the WOW caution light will come ON.

Rigging of the RVDT

The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

NOTE
Make sure that you cannot put
a piece of paper between the
centering roller and the cam,
both sides.

•• The STEERING switch must be selected

to the ON position

NOTE
Make sure that the red dot on top
of the RVDT’s is aligned with
the black etched line on the base
of the RVDT.

•• Press the BITE switch and scroll

through the menu until “RIG” displays.
Hold the switch until “RIG” is flashing.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-167

32-168 32  LANDING GEAR

AVIONICS RACK

NLG DOWNLOCK 11F 7 NLG DOWNLOCK FAIL 5 14 NOSE STEERING

NLG WOW 2 2H 14 NLG WOW 2 B

NLG WOW 1 10D 6 NLG WOW 1 CAUTION AND

WARNING PANEL D
32-61 A1 PSEU (O/H CONSOLE) FW

DASH 8 Q400
SOV FAIL 2 E F
2 1 FWD
A 35
B 34 LIMITED AUTHORITY STEERING C
C 36
NOSE STEERING B
ARMING SWITCH
RUDDER PEDAL (FLIGHT COMPARTMENT)
CONTROL POTENTIOMETER

D
FW
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

1 27
A 2 29 FULL AUTHORITY STEERING
B
3 28
MANIFOLD
HANDWHEEL
CONTROL POTENTIOMETER SOLENOID 3 1 SOLENOID SWITCH CLOSED

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

VALVE 8 2 VALVE WHEN HYDRAULIC
C
PRESSURE IS ON
C N/C
1K PRESS.
(P5) 7 A
NLG STEER SERVO TORQUE 31 4
8 9 SERVO PRESSURE SWITCH B
28 V DC CONT 2 MOTOR 39 5
3A G H 40 28V DC IN TORQUE
R MAIN 32 GND MOTOR
A

RIGHT DC CBP

LVDT 16 12 7
EXCITATION 24 11 8
9
(C6) 4
NLG STEER ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO VALVE
28 V DC CONT 1
3A K J 25 28V DC IN
L MAIN 5 6 47 GND RVDT 55 1
EXCITATION 54 2
LEFT DC CBP NOSE STEERING
ARMING SWITCH GND RVDT #1
10
(FLIGHT COMPARTMENT) 4
4 PRESSURE 5
1 ON
6
9
15 LVDT
RVDT 38 1
23
EXCITATION 45 2
53 POSITION
49 FEEDBACK RVDT #2
50 RVDT 1
51 4
POSITION 5
52
FEEDBACK 6
46
RVDT 2
STEERING CONTROL UNIT NOSEWHEEL STEERING ASSEMBLY
FW
D

Figure 32-134.  Nosewheel Steering - Electrical Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

OPERATION As the steering motor rotates the NLG inner
cylinder, the two RVDT’s send the nosewheel
position back to the control unit at Pins 49, 50
NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION and 53 from RVDT 1 and Pins 46, 51 and 52
Refer to Figure 32-134. Nosewheel Steering - from RVDT 2.
Electrical Schematic.
When the feedback signals from the RVDT’s
No.2 Hydraulic pressure is supplied to the equal the input signals from the potentiometers,
nosewheel steering system, through the landing the SCU commands the Electro Hydraulic
gear selector valve in the DOWN position. servo valve to the neutral position.

When the nosewheel steering switch is selected This action causes a hydraulic lock across the
ON, power from the left and right main 28 steering motor, which holds the steering in the
VDC buses is supplied from Pins H and J of the selected position until another input signal is
switch, to Pins 40 and 25 of the SCU. generated.

With WOW, the steering control unit receives Operation in the Passive Mode
inputs from the PSEU as follows:
The system will be in passive mode when any
•• Pin 11F to SCU Pin 7 - NLG Downlock of the following occurs:
•• Pin 2H to SCU Pin 14 - NLG WOW 2 •• S T E E R I N G s w i t c h s e l e c t e d O F F
(requirement for towing)
•• Pin 10D to SCU Pin 6 - NLG WOW 1.
•• SCU de-energized
The SCU outputs current to the following:
•• SCU receives power from only one CB
•• Solenoid valve •• SCU does not receive any of the
•• Servo valve torque motor. required inputs from the PSEU
•• No hydraulic power
The operator input is sensed through the rudder
pedal or handwheel control potentiometer •• Landing bypass valve in the bypass
output. It is then sent to the SCU. position
•• NOSE STEERING caution light ON.
The SCU positions the Electro Hydraulic servo
valve to steer left or right. Feedback from the The mode selector valve is positioned by the
LVDT at Pins 9, 15 and 23, to the SCU confirms valve spring, to connect the hydraulic lines to
servo valve has moved to the correct position. each side of the hydraulic motor, through the
power-off orifice. This allows the hydraulic
Feedback from the pressure switch on Pins motor to turn freely when the nosewheel is
1 and 4 at the SCU confirms that hydraulic physically turned by the towbar, or differential
pressure is available. engine power while taxiing.
Hydraulic pressure through the solenoid valve acts
on the bottom of the Mode Selector Valve (MSV).

The MSV sends pressure to the Electro

Hydraulic servo valve to drive the steering
motor left or right.

Return fluid from the other side of the motor

returns through the servo valve.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-169

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Operational Test of the Functional Test of the Nosewheel

Nosewheel Steering System Steering System
The following is an abbreviated description of The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

Tow the aircraft NLG onto a set of grease- With the nosewheel steering switch selected to
plates and with the nosewheel steering switch ON operate the steering hand control and the
selected to ON operate the steering hand rudder pedals through the full range of motion.
control and the rudder pedals.
Using the Protractor measure to ensure full
Make sure that the nosewheel position agrees travel of the steering system.
with the position of the steering hand control
and rudder pedals. Do this with WOW and with WOFFW to test
for normal control and indication.
NOTE
The steering operation can be CAUTION
sluggish when the hydraulic
Make sure that the RVDT’s are
system is pressurized by the SPU.
adjusted correctly. If the RVDT’s
are not adjusted correctly, the nose
gear can go through the 70° limit.
This can cause damage to the
equipment.

Install a tow bar and move the NLG to the left

and the right 120° stop positions and then back
to 0° with the towbar.

NOTE
This is to make sure that the
NLG can move freely.

Make sure the NLG electrical harness has

sufficient clearance to not catch on other
components and is not stretched.

32-170 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-171

32-172 32  LANDING GEAR

FUSELAGE DOOR
LDG INHIBIT
WARNING & SYNOPTIC
FUSE DOORS
PSEU
CABIN PRESSURE
PSC A SYSTEM
DISCRETE INPUTS FUSE DOORS

WOW No. 2 WOW No. 2

NOSE CENT & LDG CONTROL CONTROL DISCRETE OUTPUTS

DASH 8 Q400
PROX SENSOR INP. & FUSE DOORS
FUSE DOOR
SENSORS DISCRETE OUTPUTS WOW No. 2 OUTPUTS
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS REQUIRING
CROSS COMM WOW & LDG POSITION INPUTS
WOW No. 2 & LDG

ALTERNATE FUSE DOORS

DOWNLOCK & PROX SENSOR INP.
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

PSC B WT ON
FUSE DOOR
SENSORS WHEELS
ALTERNATE
DOWNLOCK CROSS COMM
DISCRETE INPUTS

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LAMP TEST No. 2 INDICATION
& FUSE DOORS
DISCRETE OUTPUTS ADI OUTPUTS

CENTRAL
MAINTENANCE LDOOR NDOOR RDOOR
BITE PANEL
FRONT PANEL BITE LEFT NOSE RIGHT
MAINTENANCE DISCRETE OUTPUTS PSS PSEU
KEYPAD & DISPLAY
MAINT OPER LEFT NOSE RIGHT

LANDING GEAR
PSC D DN UP
FUSE DOORS
LDG INDICATIONS
DISCRETE INPUTS LANDING
LAMP TEST No. 1 GEAR LOCK
INDICATION CROSS COMM RELEASE
& FUSE DOORS HORN
LDG INDICATION MUTE
& FUSE DOOR PROX SENSOR INP. DISCRETE OUTPUTS
SENSORS
LDG TEST
PSC E SELECTOR
FUSE DOORS VALVE
WOW No. 1,
LDG DOORS & WOW No. 1 CROSS COMM
FUSE DOOR PROX SENSOR INP. & FUSE DOORS
SENSORS
DISCRETE OUTPUTS IFC LDG DOOR
SOLENOID
SEQUENCE
VALVES

LDG GEAR
WOW No. 1 & LDG INOP
fs582a01a.cgm

Figure 32-135.  PSEU Input and Output Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

32-61-00 PROXIMITY The four discrete inputs to the PSS are:

SENSOR SYSTEM •• Landing gear extension command

•• Landing gear retraction command
INTRODUCTION •• INHIBIT switch set to INHIBIT
The Proximity Sensor System (PSS) is part of •• Landing gear lamp test selected.
the landing gear system.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 32-135. PSEU Input and Output
Block Diagram.

The PSEU receives signals from 20 landing

gear and 11 fuselage door proximity sensors.

The PSEU then transmits discrete outputs to the

landing gear and door indicators.

The Proximity Sensor System has the following

components:

•• Proximity sensor electronic unit

•• Proximity sensors

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The PSS is a 28 VDC energized, microprocessor
based proximity system.

The system has signal conditioning, proximity

sensing, discrete monitoring, control signals,
interface wiring and a BITE keypad with display.

The PSS sends discrete outputs as follows:

•• Landing gear control
•• Landing gear status indication
•• Alternate downlock indication
•• WOW1
•• Fuselage door indication
•• WOW2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-173

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

FWD

A AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION

ME
NU
ON
YE OF /
S F
NO

FWD
BD
IN

Figure 32-136.  Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit

32-174 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-136. P
 roximity Sensor
Electronic Unit.
•• Figure 32-137. P
 roximity Sensor
Electronic Unit.

The PSEU is installed on the avionics rack.

The PSEU receives 28 VDC from the right

and left main buses, and the right and left
essential buses.

The PSEU provides visual indication in the

flight compartment for:

•• Gear position
•• Gear doors position, and
•• Fuselage doors status.
Figure 32-137.  Proximity Sensor Electronic
The primary functions of the PSEU are as Unit
follows:
•• Monitor, indicate and operate the
landing gear extension, and retraction
system Built-In-Test-Equipment
•• Monitor and supply the uplock, down The PSEU contains BIT and BITE functions.
lock, and WOW data to other systems These functions let the PSEU do the
maintenance, and functional testing of the PSS.
•• Supply indication for the passenger and
baggage doors. The ON/OFF button turns the BITE display ON
or OFF. When you change from OFF to ON,
The logic circuits of the PSEU use the “near” the BITE display always starts at a PRESENT
and “far” condition of the proximity sensors for FAULTS? prompt. You will push the menu button
logic equations. to return to the most recent, higher level prompt.

The UP button gives you access to the previous

fault or status display, when you get a list of
displays. The DOWN button sequences to the
subsequent fault or status display on the list.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-175

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Installation of the Proximity Retrieval of Data from the

Sensor Electronic-Unit Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit
The following is an abbreviated description of (PSEU)
the maintenance practice and is intended for The following is an abbreviated description of
training purposes only. For a more detailed the maintenance practice and is intended for
description of the practice, refer to the task in training purposes only. For a more detailed
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
•• Before you touch the PSEU, put on the
static wrist strap •• On the PSEU, push the ON/OFF button
•• After installation wait 3 minutes, this
allows the PSEU to complete the power The PSEU display shows the prompt for
up test the first item on the TOP LEVEL menu, the
PRESENT FAULTS?
•• On the PSEU, ERASE the FAULT
HISTORY if there is one. NOTE
NOTE The items in the top menu show in
the sequence that follows:
T h e m e s s a g e ERASE IN
PROGRESS w i l l a p p e a r , 1. PRESENT FAULTS
followed by the message FAULT
HISTORY ERASE COMPLETE. 2. FAULT HISTORY
3. RIGGING HELP
4. RIGGING HISTORY
5. SYSTEM STATUS
6. FAULT HISTORY ERASE.

•• If you push the MENU button, the

PSEU display shows the prompt for the
previous item on the top menu

NOTE
If there is no BITE keypad activity
for 15 minutes the PSEU display will
go blank.

•• Push the MENU button to show the

ERASE FAULT HISTORY? prompt.

If the fault clears while the PSEU display shows

the fault and there is no keypad activity, the
display will show the FAULT NO LONGER
PRESENT message.
If the fault returns while the PSEU display
shows the FAULT NO LONGER PRESENT
message and there is no keypad activity, the
display will show the applicable fault message.

32-176 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Erase the Data from the Proximity Operational Check of the
Sensor Electronic Unit (PSEU) Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit
The following is an abbreviated description of The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Push the ON/OFF button on the PSEU

NOTE and select PRESENT FAULTS
The PSEU takes 3 minutes to complete
•• Push the YES button
its power-up self test.

•• Turn the PSEU ON

NOTE
This test is intended to be done without
•• The PRESENT FAULTS prompt is shown
any faults present on the PSEU.
•• Push the NO button again and again until
the display shows the ERASE FAULT •• On the maintenance panel, the PSEU
HISTORY? prompt OPER light comes on
•• Select YES, the PSEU will ask ARE •• On the maintenance panel, the PSS
YOU SURE? MAINT (check required) light goes out
•• Select YES, the PSEU display shows the •• If the PSS MAINT light stays on, faults
ERASE IN PROGRESS message are present. Refer to the list of known
nuisance faults, see AMM
•• Wait until the PSEU display shows
the FAULT HISTORY ERASE •• C l e a r a l l f a u l t s a n d t h e n d o t h i s
COMPLETE message. Operational Check again.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-177

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

S19 S18
NGDRCL NWCENT
S09 S10
NGDN1 NGDN2
S11 S12
NGLK1 NGLK2
S03 S04
NGWOFW1 NGWOFW2
S31 S34
PASSENGER AIRSTAIR PADRCL FBDRCL FWD BAGGAGE
DOOR S36 DOOR
S33 FBDRLK
PADRLK
S46 EMERGENCY
EDRCLLK EXIT DOOR

S07 S08 S13 S14

LGDLK1 LGDLK2 RGDLK1 RGDLK2

S15 S17 S16 S20

LGUPLK LGDRCL RGUPLK RGDRCL

S01 S02 S05 S06

LGWOW1 LGWOW2 RGWOW1 RGWOW2
S37 S40
APDRCL ASDRCL SERVICE
AFT PASSENGER
S39 DOOR
DOOR APDRLK S42
ASDRLK
S43
AFT BAGGAGE ABDRCL
DOOR S45
ABDRLK

fs432a01.cgm

Figure 32-138.  Proximity Sensors - Locations

32-178 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Proximity Sensors
Refer to:
•• Figure 32-138. P
 roximity Sensors
- Locations.
•• Figure 32-139. Proximity Sensors.

There are 31 proximity sensors. Each main

landing gear has six proximity sensors. The
nose landing gear has eight.

There are eleven sensors that monitor:

•• Passenger entrance door
•• The baggage compartment doors
•• The emergency exit doors, and
•• The service door.

The proximity sensors are hermetically sealed,

variable reluctance, two wire devices. The
inductance at the sensor changes with the sensor’s
proximity to the target. As the target gets closer to
Figure 32-139.  Proximity Sensors
the sensor face, the inductance increases.

The proximity sensors are not repairable.

The function of the sensors is to supply position

data to the PSEU.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-179

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

Installation of the Proximity NOTES

Sensors
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• There are many proximity sensors

installed on the landing gear and doors
in different locations.
•• Many have different clearances and
wire lead lengths.
•• T h e P r o x . s e n s o r s d o n o t c o m e
terminated, you will need to cut the wires,
terminate them and insert the pins into the
connector.

CAUTION
Do not bump or scratch the face of
the proximity sensor because this
can damage the proximity sensor.

•• Adjust the clearance between the sensor

and the target to match the application
and location.

Rigging of the Proximity Sensors

The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Adjust the sensors to the nominal

clearances specified in the AMM.
•• Many sensors have different clearances
and therefore inductance.
•• At the PSEU, use the SYSTEM STATUS
MENU to make sure that the inductance
in each sensor, is correct.
•• Adjust sensor clearance from the nominal,
to achieve the permitted inductance.

32-180 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS ALTERNATE DOWNLOCK
INDICATIONS
Landing Gear Control
The Alternate Down Lock Indication (ADI)
The PSEU provides discrete outputs that are
provides a second DOWN and LOCKED
used to control the movement of the landing
indication of the three landing gears.
gear (extend or retract), and landing gear doors
(open or close). The PSEU generates seven
This function is used if the primary landing
discrete outputs that provide the landing gear
gear indication function shows an unsafe, or
control function. The outputs include the Flight
gear disagree condition. ADI is independent
Data Recorder, and the no smoking sign.
from the primary indication. Different sensors
and PSC card are used to process inputs.
Landing Gear Indications
The following conditions are monitored by the The following conditions are monitored by the ADI:
landing gear indication system:
•• Right and left gear down and locked
•• Right, left, and nose gear door position •• Nose gear down and locked.
•• Right, left, and nose gear position.
The left and right gears each have an alternate
sensor that monitors down and locked. The
The outputs of the proximity sensors are
nose gear has one sensor for the down position
processed by the PSEU.
and one for locked.
The PSEU generates 16 discrete outputs which
The Advisory lamp test on the Passenger Warning
are sent to the two IOP in the IFC’s, the landing
panel will cause the ADI lights to come on.
gear control panel, the caution and warning
panel, the Antiskid/Brake Control Unit, and the
Incorrect Landing Gear Configuration/Landing
Nosewheel Steering Control Unit.
Gear Warning Horn.
The landing gear control provides visual
This information can be found in MTM Vol 1
indication for each of the three landing gears:
Chapter 31-62-00 Landing Gear Warning.
•• GEAR DOWN and LOCKED
•• GEAR NOT IN COMMANDED
POSITION
•• GEAR DOOR NOT CLOSED.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-181

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

#1 STALL FLT DATA

SYST FAIL RECORDER

#2 STALL
GPWS
SYST FAIL

PUSHER PARKING
SYST FAIL BRAKE

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

LAP LDG GEAR WT ON

RIVE INOP WHEELS

LAP NOSE FUELING

WER STEERING ON

X BAT MAIN BAT FUSELAGE

HOT HOT DOORS

Figure 32-140.  CAWP with WOW Caution

32-182 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

WOW Functions PSEU Operating
Condition
Mode
Refer to Figure 32-140. CAWP with WOW At least four of any of the
Caution. six conditions that follow:
LGWOW1 = True
The WOW function provides discrete outputs to LGWOW2 = True
other aircraft systems. Two separate channels WOW
RGWOW1 = True
WOW No.1 and WOW No.2 generate the RGWOW2 = True
weight-on-wheels discrete outputs. NGWOFW1 = False
NGWOFW2 = False
The PSEU generates five types of WOW
outputs, they are as follows:
•• All three gear (WOW) Operational Check of the Weight
•• Main gear (MGWOW) NEAR On Wheels System
•• Main gear (MGWOFFW) FAR The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
•• Nose gear (NGWOW) FAR
training purposes only. For a more detailed
•• Nose gear (NGWOFFW) NEAR. description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
There are two discrete outputs supplied by the
PSEU that are special to WOW1 and, WOW2
systems. These signals are WOW1 Operational,
NOTE
and WOW2 Operational respectively. These You can do this check on either
two signals are supplied in the same way. the LH or RH gear.

The CAWP uses these two discrete outputs to Make sure that all the hydraulic
show that the WOW functions operate correctly. power is off.
If one of the two signals become deactivated
on the CAWP, the WT ON WHEELS caution •• Insert an anti-target (copper) at a main
light illuminates. For this to occur, the WOW landing-gear proximity sensor to simulate
Operational discrete output will deactivate in an erroneous far target (“air”) state.
the conditions as follows:
•• Make sure the WOW caution light
•• There is a disagreement between two of comes on.
the WOW sensors (in the same WOW
system), that the aircraft is either on the NOTE
ground, or in the air. There will be a 30 second delay
•• A minimum of one proximity sensor before the light comes on.
becomes defective in each of the WOW1
and WOW2 systems at the same time. •• Remove the anti-target from the WOW
proximity sensor.
•• Make sure the WOW caution light goes out.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-183

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

32-00-00 APPENDIX WARNING

REMOVE THE TOWBAR
MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATION FROM THE NOSE LANDING
GEAR BEFORE YOU SET THE
The following are abbreviated descriptions of
STEERING SWITCH TO THE
the maintenance practices and are intended for
ON POSITION. IF YOU SET THE
training purposes only. For a more detailed
STEERING SWITCH TO THE ON
description of the practices, refer to the tasks
POSITION, THE NOSEWHEELS
in the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
WILL AUTOMATICALLY GO
TO THE NEUTRAL POSITION.
Safety Precautions IF YOU DO NOT REMOVE THE
TOWBAR, YOU CAN CAUSE
WARNING INJURY TO PERSONS OR
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU
REMOVE THE DOOR LOCKPIN.
THE LANDING GEAR WARNING
DOORS WILL CLOSE IF YOU
PRESSURIZE THE HYDRAULIC BEFORE YOU CONNECT
SYSTEM. IF YOU DO NOT DO THE TOWBAR TO THE
THIS, IT CAN CAUSE INJURIES AIRCRAFT MAKE SURE
TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE YOU SET THE NOSEWHEEL
TO THE EQUIPMENT. STEERING SWITCH TO THE
OFF POSITION. IT MUST STAY
IN THE OFF POSITION WHILE
WARNING YOU TOW THE AIRCRAFT.
THE NOSEWHEEL HAS TO
THE LANDING GEAR DOORS BE IN THE MIDDLE POSITION
CLOSE QUICKLY WHEN BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT
YOU PRESSURIZE THE THE TOWBAR. IF YOU DO NOT
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. MAKE DO THIS, YOU CAN CAUSE
SURE THAT ALL PERSONNEL INJURIES TO PERSONS AND
AND EQUIPMENT ARE CLEAR DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
OF THE LANDING GEAR. IF
YOU DO NOT DO THIS, YOU
CAN CAUSE INJURIES TO WARNING
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO
THE EQUIPMENT. MAKE SURE THAT THE
ALTERNATE RELEASE
DOOR AND THE ALTERNATE
WARNING EXTENSION DOOR ARE
FULLY CLOSED BEFORE
DO NOT USE FORCE WHEN YOU USE THE PRIMARY
YOU ENGAGE THE GROUND RETRACTION OR EXTENSION
LOCK OF THE NOSE LANDING SYSTEM OF THE LANDING
GEAR. IF FORCE IS NECESSARY, GEAR. IF YOU DO NOT DO
THE LANDING GEAR MAY NOT THIS, IT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
BE SAFE AND CAN RETRACT TO LANDING GEAR SYSTEM
ACCIDENTALLY. THIS CAN COMPONENTS.
CAUSE INJURIES TO PERSONS
AND DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT.

32-184 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

Main Landing Gear Lower Standard Configuration for an
Bearing Seal ‘On-Ground’ Weight-Off-Wheels
A spare dynamic seal is installed in the shock (WOFFW) Condition
strut assembly of the main landing gear (MLG). To put the aircraft in the weight-off-wheels
Defective dynamic seals may be replaced with configuration:
this spare dynamic seal.
1. Connect the pitot/static tester to the No.1
and No.2 systems.
WARNING
2. Put the de-actuator (copper) targets on the
THE SHOCK STRUT main landing gears.
ASSEMBLY IS PRESSURIZED
3. Put the actuator (steel) targets on the nose
WITH NITROGEN GAS.
landing gear.
RELEASE THE PRESSURE
BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE 4. Adjust the tester until the primary flight
OIL/NITROGEN FITTINGS displays show an airspeed of a minimum
OR THE TORQUE LINK PINS. of 40 kts.
IF YOU DO NOT DO THIS,
5. Make sure that the airspeed is valid on the
YOU CAN CAUSE INJURY TO
PFD’s (indicators DO NOT show red).
PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE
TO EQUIPMENT. 6. Make sure that the WT ON WHEELS
caution light does not come on.
Standard Configuration for an
‘On-Jacks’ Weight-On-Wheels
(WOW) Condition
Tools and Equipment
To put the aircraft in the weight-on-wheels
configuration:
1. Put the actuator (steel) targets on the main
landing gears.
2. Put the de-actuator (copper) targets on the
nose landing gear.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-185

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

32-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• GSB0700016 NLG Axle Jack
•• GSB0700023 Axle Jack
•• GSB0700024 Tail Stand
•• GSB0900004 Towhead Assembly
•• GSB0900005 Towbar
•• GSB1000020 Pin, NLG Door Ground Lock
•• GSB1000028 Pin, MLG Door Ground Lock
•• GSB2000009 Digital Inclinometer (Protractor)
•• GSB2400001 Digital Multimeter - Hand Held
•• GSB2400011 Static Wrist Strap
•• GSB2400016 or equivalent Electrical and avionics tool kit
•• GSB2700007 Cable Tension Meter
•• GSB2700008 Rigging Pin Kit
•• GSB2700008-09 Rigging Pin, 0.1875-4.00 in. (4.76-101.6 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-15 Rigging Pin
•• GSB2700008-16D Target-Actuator (Steel)
•• GSB2700008-30 Target-Actuator (Steel)
•• GSB2700008-30 Target 0.030 in (0.762 mm) Thick
•• GSB2700008-32 Target-De-Actuator (Copper)
•• GSB2700008-32 Target 0.040 in (1.02 mm) Thick
•• GSB2700009 Cable Tension Meter
•• GSB29000YY Unit - Hydraulic Power, 28 - 34 GPM
•• GSB3241005 NLG Axle Nut Socket
•• GSB3241006 MLG Axle Nut Socket
•• GSB3242003 Anti-skid Tester
•• GSB3242004 Adapter, Wheel Speed Transducer Spin-Up
•• GSB3242005 or R1722 Adapter, Anti-skid Tester
•• GSB3240006 or equivalent Tool - Brake Application
•• GSB3251006 NLG-Steering Angle Protractor
•• GSB3411011 Test Set - Air Data
•• Landing Gear P/N AT-31859 Assembly Tool (Used To Torque the Jam Nut at the Gland Nut)
•• M83723/31-20 Insert/Extract Tool

32-186 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

•• AT 31791 Assembly Tool
•• AT 31792 Metering Pin Tool
•• AT 31794 Assembly Tool
•• AT 31819 Barrel Nut Tool
•• AT 31822 Assembly Tool
•• AT 31823 - Use with Gland Nut P/N 47118-1. Assembly Tool
•• AT 31956 NLG Steering Box Puller Kit
•• AT 32027 Bullet, MLG Axle
•• AT 55447 Assembly Tool
•• AT 57495 - Use with Gland Nut P/N 47118-3. Assembly Tool
•• AT 31849 Tool - Spring Compression, MLG Stabilizer Brace
•• AT 56653 Assembly Tool
•• AT 56658 Assembly Tool
•• AT 56659 Assembly Tool
•• GE56987 Arbor
•• SA460168 or FTP-323002-001-58 (Local Manufacture) with Jam Nut P/N MS21340-08
(Qty. 2)
•• MLG Door Sensor Shop Aid
•• Goodrich Landing Gear P/N AT-31838 Assembly Tool (Used To Torque the Jam Nut at
the Gland Nut)
•• DHC8PROX-RTP-0102 Proximity Sensor De-actuator Test Target
•• Local Manufacture Grease Plate
•• 05-7024-3600-A3 Hydraulic Power Unit
•• CG-56806 Setting Tool - Retract Actuator, MLG
•• GC 55979 Latch Wear Measurement Tool (Surface Gauge)
•• Commercially Available Brake Bleed Kit
•• G601R324301-1 or equivalent Brake Bleed Hose
•• Commercially Available Tensiometer
•• 964-0446-001 Download Unit
•• Commercially Available Insertion/extraction Tool M81969/14-10 (Red/Orange)
•• Commercially Available Crimping Tool AF8 or M22520/1-01
•• Commercially Available Positioner TH163 or M22520/1-04
•• Commercially Available Daniels PMBT 1200 Power Miniband Tool or Equivalent

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-187

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

32-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for details on these maintenance procedures:

•• AMM 32-00-00-840-801 Open and Lock the Landing Gear Doors

•• AMM 32-00-00-840-802 Unlock and Close the Landing Gear Doors
•• AMM 32-00-00-840-803 S
 tandard Configuration for an ’On−Jacks‘ Weight−On−Wheels
(WOW) Condition
•• AMM 32-00-00-840-804 S
 tandard Configuration for an ’On−Ground‘ Weight−Off−
Wheels (WOW) Condition
•• AMM 32-00-00-890-801 Sequence of Operations for a Main Landing Gear Replacement
•• AMM 32-00-01-200-801 S
 equence of Operations for the Nose Landing Gear
Replacement
•• AMM 32-00-01-200-802 F
 luid Leakage Inspection of the Nose and Main Landing−Gear
Shock−Struts
•• AMM 32-00-01-640-801 L
 ubrication of the Nose and Main Landing Gear (MRB
#320001−201)
•• AMM 12-20-01-640-802 Lubrication of the Nose Landing Gear
•• AMM 12-20-01-640-803 Lubrication of the Main Landing Gear
•• AMM 12-20-01-640-804 Lubrication of the Landing Gear Door Hinges and Linkages
•• AMM 12-20-01-640-818 L
 ubrication of the Chrome Piston Surface on Landing Gear
Shock−Struts
•• AMM 12-10-32-610-802 Servicing of the MLG Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-11-01-000-801 Removal of the Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-11-01-400-801 Installation of the Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-11-01-000-802 Removal of a MLG Dressed Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-11-01-400-802 Installation of a MLG Dressed Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-11-04-000-801 Removal of the Axles
•• AMM 32-11-04-400-801 Installation of the Axles
•• AMM 32-11-04-000-802 Removal of the Wheel−Speed Transducer Electrical−Harness
•• AMM 32-11-04-400-802 Installation of the Wheel−Speed Transducer Electrical−Harness
•• AMM 32-11-21-000-801 Removal of the Yoke
•• AMM 32-11-21-400-801 Installation of the Yoke
•• AMM 32-11-01-960-801 Replacement of the Main Landing Gear Lower Bearing Seal
•• AMM 32-11-01-611-801 S
 ervice the Main Landing Gear Shock Strut
(MRB#321100−203)
•• AMM 12-10-32-610-802 Servicing of the MLG Shock Strut

32-188 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32  LANDING GEAR

•• AMM 12-10-32-610-804 Servicing of the MLG Shock Strut − Aircraft on Jacks
•• AMM 32-12-00-220-801 Detailed Inspection of the MLG Doors Mechanism
•• AMM 12-10-32-210-801 Extension Check of the NLG Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-21-00-210-801 General Visual Inspection of the Nose Landing Gear
•• AMM 32-21-01-000-801 Removal of the NLG Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-21-01-400-801 Installation of the NLG Shock Strut
•• AMM 32-21-01-611-801 S
 ervice the Nose Landing Gear Shock Strut (MRB
#322100−202)
•• AMM 12-10-32-610-801 Servicing of the NLG Shock Strut
•• AMM 12-10-32-610-803 Servicing of the NLG Shock Strut − Aircraft on Jacks
•• AMM 32-22-11-830-801 Rigging of the NLG Forward Doors
•• AMM 32-25-06-710-801 O
 perational Test of the Nose−Gear Ground−Lock Position
Indication System (Modsum 4−429586)
•• AMM 32-31-00-867-801 Retract and Extend the Landing Gear
•• AMM 32-31-00-867-802 Retract and Extend the Nose Landing Gear
•• AMM 32-31-00-870-801 Bleed the Landing Gear Primary Extension and Retraction System
•• AMM 29-21-06-830-801 Rigging of the Emergency Release Selector Valve
•• AMM 29-21-00-611-801 S
 ervicing of the Landing Gear Alternate Extension Hydraulic
Reservoir (MRB #292000−201)
•• AMM 12-10-29-611-803 S
 ervicing of the Alternate Landing−Gear Extension Hydraulic
Reservoir
•• AMM 32-34-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Alternate Extension System
•• AMM 12-10-32-910-801 Tire Pressure Standard Practices
•• AMM 12-10-32-614-803 Filling of the Tires with Nitrogen
•• AMM 32-40-00-210-802 G
 eneral Visual Inspection of the Nose and Main Landing Gear
Wheel and Tire Assemblies (MRB #324000−201)
•• AMM 32-41-01-000-801 Removal of the Main Wheel and Tire Assembly
•• AMM 32-41-01-400-801 Installation of the Main Wheel and Tire Assembly
•• AMM 32-41-06-000-801 Removal of the Nose Wheel and Tire Assembly
•• AMM 32-41-06-400-801 Installation of the Nose Wheel and Tire Assembly
•• AMM 32-40-00-720-801 F
 unctional Check of the Nose and Main Landing Gear Tire
Pressure (MRB #324000−202)
•• AMM 32-40-00-210-803 G
 eneral Visual Inspection of the Brake Wear Pins (MRB
#324000−206)
•• AMM 32-42-01-000-801 Removal of the Main Wheel Brake Units
•• AMM 32-42-01-400-801 Installation of the Main Wheel Brake Units

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 32-189

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
32  LANDING GEAR

•• AMM 32-42-00-870-801 Bleed the Brakes with Main Brake System

•• AMM 12-10-32-863-801 Pressurization of the Parking Brake System with the Hand Pump
•• AMM 32-40-00-720-802 F
 unctional Check of the Brake Accumulator Pre−charge Pressure
(MRB #324000−208)
•• AMM 12-10-32-210-803 Pressure Check of the Parking Brake Accumulator
•• AMM 12-10-32-614-801 Servicing of the Parking Brake Accumulator with Nitrogen
•• AMM 32-46-00-720-801 Functional Test of the Anti−Skid Control System (Built−in Test)
•• AMM 32-51-26-000-801 Removal of the Power Steering Unit
•• AMM 32-51-26-400-801 Installation of the Power Steering Unit
•• AMM 32-51-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Nose Wheel Steering System
•• AMM 32-51-00-720-801 Functional Test of the Nosewheel Steering System
•• AMM 32-51-01-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Nosewheel−Steering Electronic
Control−Unit (SCU)
•• AMM 32-51-01-743-801 E
 rase the Data from the Nosewheel−Steering Electronic Control−
Unit (SCU)
•• AMM 32-61-06-390-801 Application of Sealant to the Landing−Gear Proximity Sensors
•• AMM 32-61-01-000-801 Removal of the Proximity Sensor Electronic−Unit
•• AMM 32-61-01-400-801 Installation of the Proximity Sensor Electronic−Unit
•• AMM 32-61-06-000-802 Removal of the Proximity Sensors
•• AMM 32-61-06-400-802 Installation of the Proximity Sensors
•• AMM 32-61-00-710-801 O
 perational Check of the Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit (PSEU)
BITE Panel (MRB# 326100−201)
•• AMM 32-61-00-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit
(PSEU)
•• AMM 32-61-00-743-801 Erase the Data from the Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit (PSEU)

32-190 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
CONTENTS
Page
27-00-00 FLIGHT CONTROLS.................................................................................. 27-1

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Introduction......................................................................................................... 27-1

General................................................................................................................ 27-3

27-12-00 AILERON SYSTEM.................................................................................... 27-4

General................................................................................................................ 27-4

System Description.............................................................................................. 27-5

Component Description........................................................................................ 27-6

Aileron Forward Quadrant............................................................................. 27-6

Rigging of Aileron Quadrant Microswitch............................................................ 27-7

Control Column to Control Column Rigging

& Control Column to Aileron Quadrant................................................................ 27-7

Aileron Quadrant to Splitter Quadrant.................................................................. 27-9

Aileron Terminal Quadrant................................................................................. 27-11

Aileron Splitter Quadrant to Aileron Terminal Quadrant Rigging....................... 27-11

Aileron Geared Tab..................................................................................... 27-13

Rigging of the Aileron Geared Tab..................................................................... 27-13

Aileron Position LVDT................................................................................ 27-15

Operation.................................................................................................... 27-15

Lubrication of Aileron and Roll Spoiler Control Column Chains....................... 27-15

Aileron LVDT Fail Fault Isolation...................................................................... 27-15

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
27-13-00 AILERONS TRIM AND CENTERING...................................................... 27-16

General.............................................................................................................. 27-16

Component Description...................................................................................... 27-17

Trim Actuator.............................................................................................. 27-17

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Ground Adjustable Trim Tab........................................................................ 27-18

Operation........................................................................................................... 27-19

Normal Operation....................................................................................... 27-19

Abnormal Operation.................................................................................... 27-19

Operational Test of the Aileron Control System.................................................. 27-19

Operational Test of the Aileron Trim System...................................................... 27-19

27-14-00 AILERON SURFACES............................................................................... 27-23

Introduction....................................................................................................... 27-23

General.............................................................................................................. 27-23

Aileron Terminal Quadrant to Aileron Surface Rigging...................................... 27-23

Rigging of the Aileron Control System Stops..................................................... 27-23

Component Description...................................................................................... 27-25

Aileron Control Surfaces............................................................................. 27-25

27-70-00 AILERON GUST LOCK SYSTEM............................................................ 27-27

Introduction....................................................................................................... 27-27

General.............................................................................................................. 27-27

System Description............................................................................................ 27-27

Operational Test of the Aileron Gust Lock System............................................. 27-27

27-61-00 ROLL SPOILERS SYSTEM...................................................................... 27-29

27-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Introduction....................................................................................................... 27-29

General.............................................................................................................. 27-29

System Description............................................................................................ 27-31

Component Description...................................................................................... 27-33

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Spoiler Quadrant......................................................................................... 27-33

Spoiler Splitter Quadrant............................................................................. 27-35

Clutch Units................................................................................................ 27-37

Power Control Units (Inboard/Outboard)..................................................... 27-39

Unload Valves............................................................................................. 27-42

Linear Variable Differential Transformer (LVDT)........................................ 27-43

Spoiler Cables Sensor................................................................................. 27-45

Controls and Indications.............................................................................. 27-46

Operation........................................................................................................... 27-51

Roll Spoiler Hydraulics............................................................................... 27-51

Hydraulic Failure........................................................................................ 27-51

Operational Test of the Roll Spoiler System....................................................... 27-51

Flight Mode................................................................................................ 27-53

Roll Spoiler Jam.......................................................................................... 27-53

Operational Test of the

Spoiler Jam Detect System................................................................................. 27-57

Operational Check of the Roll Spoiler

SPLR 1 & SPLR 2 Push Off Switchlights.......................................................... 27-59

Complete Roll Jam Using Roll Disconnect System..................................... 27-59

Operational Check of the Roll Spoiler Cable Sensor Assembly.......................... 27-61

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Roll Spoiler Cable Break (Operating Cable Sensor System)........................ 27-63

27-62-00 SPOILER SYSTEM IN GROUND MODE.................................................. 27-65

Introduction....................................................................................................... 27-65

General.............................................................................................................. 27-65
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

System Description..................................................................................... 27-69

Component Description...................................................................................... 27-72

Lift Dump Valves........................................................................................ 27-72

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 27-73

Operational Test of the Ground Spoiler System.................................................. 27-75

27-63-00 SPOILER PANELS.................................................................................... 27-76

27-16-00 ROLL DISCONNECT SYSTEM................................................................ 27-77

Introduction....................................................................................................... 27-77

General.............................................................................................................. 27-77

Component Description...................................................................................... 27-78

Roll Disconnect Handle............................................................................... 27-78

Roll Disconnect Clutch Mechanism............................................................ 27-80

Interfaces.................................................................................................... 27-81

Rigging of the Roll Disconnect System.............................................................. 27-83

Operational Check of the Roll Disconnect Mechanism....................................... 27-83

27-21-00 RUDDER SYSTEM................................................................................... 27-85

Introduction....................................................................................................... 27-85

General.............................................................................................................. 27-85

System Description............................................................................................ 27-87

27-iv FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Component Description...................................................................................... 27-89

Rudder Pedals............................................................................................. 27-89

Rudder Forward Quadrants.......................................................................... 27-91

Adjustment of the Rudder Pedal Position Sensor................................................ 27-91

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Rudder Mixer Quadrant............................................................................... 27-92

Rudder Aft Quadrant................................................................................... 27-95

Rig Rudder Pedals to Rudder Forward Quadrant

& Rig forward Quadrant to Rudder Mixer Quadrant........................................... 27-95

Rigging of Rudder Mixer Quadrant to the Rudder Aft Quadrant......................... 27-95

Power Control Units.................................................................................... 27-97

Rudder Hinge Moment Limiting (HML)..................................................... 27-97

Rudder Shut-off Valves.............................................................................27-100

PCU Input Bungee....................................................................................27-103

Rigging of the Upper Spring Strut Motion Detector &

Rigging of the Lower Spring Strut Motion Detector........................................27-103

Rudder Position LVDT..............................................................................27-104

A rudder position LVDT is located in the vertical stabilizer......................27-104

Controls and Indications............................................................................27-105

Rigging of Rudder PCUs with Hydraulic Power...............................................27-107

Operational Test of the Rudder Shutoff Valves.................................................27-108

Operation.........................................................................................................27-111

Normal System Operation.........................................................................27-111

Operational Test of the Rudder Control System................................................27-113

Abnormal Operation..................................................................................27-115

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-v

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Lower Rudder PCU Jam Operation............................................................27-117

27-22-00 RUDDER FEEL AND SUMMING...........................................................27-119

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-119

General............................................................................................................27-119
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Component Description....................................................................................27-122

Trim Actuator............................................................................................27-122

Operational Test of the Rudder Trim System....................................................27-122

Summing-Yaw Damper Actuator...............................................................27-124

Rudder trim operation......................................................................................27-127

Rudder Trimming .....................................................................................27-127

27-23-00 RUDDER SURFACES.............................................................................27-128

General............................................................................................................27-128

System Description..........................................................................................27-128

27-31-00 ELEVATOR SYSTEM..............................................................................27-129

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-129

General............................................................................................................27-129

System Description..........................................................................................27-131

Component description.....................................................................................27-133

Control Columns.......................................................................................27-133

Handwheels...............................................................................................27-133

Left Forward Quadrant..............................................................................27-135

Aft Quadrants............................................................................................27-136

Elevator-Power Control Units (PCU).........................................................27-137

27-vi FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Component Description....................................................................................27-139

Elevator PCU............................................................................................27-139

Compensator.............................................................................................27-140

Torque Tubes.............................................................................................27-141

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Centering Device.......................................................................................27-141

Overload Bungees.....................................................................................27-142

Overload Bungees (PCU INPUT)..............................................................27-143

Elevator Position LVDT.............................................................................27-143

Controls and Indications............................................................................27-145

Asymmetry Check of the Elevators..................................................................27-145

Operational Test of the Elevator Control System..............................................27-147

Elevator Droop Rate Check..............................................................................27-147

27-32-00 ELEVATOR FEEL AND TRIM................................................................27-151

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-151

General............................................................................................................27-151

System Description..........................................................................................27-152

Operational Test of the Pitch Feel System........................................................27-153

Dual Pitch Trim Actuator..........................................................................27-155

Pitch Feel Actuators..................................................................................27-155

Controls and Indications..................................................................................27-156

Elevator Trim Indicator.............................................................................27-156

Pitch Trim Split Switch.............................................................................27-157

Elevator Trim Shutoff Switchlights...........................................................27-158

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-vii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Caution Lights..........................................................................................27-159

Operation.........................................................................................................27-161

Pitch Trim.................................................................................................27-161

Manual Trim..............................................................................................27-161
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Abnormal Operation Pitch Trim Runaway.................................................27-163

Autopilot Trim..........................................................................................27-165

Flap Compensation Trim...........................................................................27-165

Operational Test of the Elevator Control System..............................................27-165

27-33-00 STALL WARNING /STICK PUSHER........................................................27-167

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-167

General............................................................................................................27-167

System Description..........................................................................................27-167

Operational test of the Stall Protection Module................................................27-169

Component Description....................................................................................27-170

Stall Protection Modules...........................................................................27-170

Stick Pusher Actuator................................................................................27-171

Stick Pusher Capstan.................................................................................27-173

Stick Pusher Quadrant...............................................................................27-174

Stick Shaker..............................................................................................27-175

Angle of Attack Transducer (AOA)...........................................................27-176

Stick Pusher Shutoff Annunciator Switch..................................................27-177

Stall Warn Test Switch..............................................................................27-177

Inputs........................................................................................................27-179

27-viii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Outputs.....................................................................................................27-181

Controls and Indications..................................................................................27-185

Tests..........................................................................................................27-188

27-34-00 ELEVATOR SURFACES..........................................................................27-189

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-189

General............................................................................................................27-189

27-38-00 PITCH DISCONNECT SYSTEM.............................................................27-191

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-191

General............................................................................................................27-191

Pitch Disconnect Handle...........................................................................27-191

Pitch Disconnect Clutch Mechanism.........................................................27-191

Operational Check of the Elevator Control Pitch Disconnect Mechanism ........27-192

27-51-00 FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM....................................................................27-195

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-195

General............................................................................................................27-195

Component Description....................................................................................27-197

Flap Control Unit (FCU)...........................................................................27-197

Flap Selector Lever/Quadrant....................................................................27-201

Flap Lever Transducer...............................................................................27-201

Operational Test of the Flap Control Module....................................................27-201

Operation.........................................................................................................27-203

Normal Flap Operation..............................................................................27-203

Wing Flap System Electrical Checks................................................................27-203

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-ix

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Operational Test of the Wing Flaps...................................................................27-204

27-52-00 FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM...........................................................................27-206

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-206

General............................................................................................................27-206
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

System Description..........................................................................................27-207

Component Description....................................................................................27-209

Flap Power Unit (FPU)..............................................................................27-209

Transmission Shafts..................................................................................27-210

Torsion Bars..............................................................................................27-211

Lubrication of Flap Ball Screw Actuators.........................................................27-212

Flap Tracks................................................................................................27-213

27-53-00 FLAP POSITION INDICATION..............................................................27-217

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-217

General............................................................................................................27-217

System Description..........................................................................................27-218

Component Description....................................................................................27-219

Flap Position Indication Unit (FPIU).........................................................27-219

Flap Position Transducer...........................................................................27-220

Controls and Indications..................................................................................27-221

Operation.........................................................................................................27-223

Normal Flap Position Indication Operation...............................................27-223

27-54-00 FLAP SURFACES....................................................................................27-224

27-x FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Erase the Data from the Central Diagnostic
System (CDS) - Flaps System (FLAPS)...........................................................27-225

General.....................................................................................................27-225

Procedure..................................................................................................27-225

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Erase the Data from the Central Diagnostic
System (CDS) Flight Control System (FCS).....................................................27-226

General.....................................................................................................27-226

Procedure..................................................................................................27-226

Retrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic

System (CDS) Flaps System (FLAPS)..............................................................27-227

General.....................................................................................................27-227

Procedure..................................................................................................27-227

Retrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic

System (CDS) Flight Control System (FCS).....................................................27-229

General............................................................................................................27-229

Procedure.........................................................................................................27-229

27-00-01 FLIGHT CONTROL ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT............................. 27-23

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-233

General............................................................................................................27-233

System Description..........................................................................................27-233

Aileron Control System.............................................................................27-235

Rudder Control System.............................................................................27-235

Elevator Control System............................................................................27-237

Flap Control System..................................................................................27-239

Spoiler Control System.............................................................................27-239

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-xi

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Controls and Indications..................................................................................27-241

Caution Lights..........................................................................................27-241

Advisory Lights........................................................................................27-245

Operational Test of the FCECU........................................................................27-245

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Maintenance Consideration..............................................................................27-246

System Test...............................................................................................27-246

Interfaces..................................................................................................27-246

27-00-45 CENTRAL DATA STORAGE FLIGHT CONTROLS..............................27-247

Introduction.....................................................................................................27-247

General............................................................................................................27-247

Controls and Indications..................................................................................27-248

27-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT..................................................27-249

27-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................27-252

27-xii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page
27-1 Flight Control System................................................................................27-2

27-2 Aileron Control System.............................................................................27-4

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-3 Aileron Control System Synoptic...............................................................27-5

27-4 Aileron Forward Quadrant.........................................................................27-6

27-5 Aileron Splitter Quadrant...........................................................................27-8

27-6 Aileron Terminal Quadrant......................................................................27-10

27-7 Aileron Geared Tab .................................................................................27-12

27-8 Aileron Position LVDT............................................................................27-14

27-9 Aileron Position LVDT ...........................................................................27-14

27-10 Aileron Trim and Centering Unit.............................................................27-16

27-11 Aileron Trim Actuator..............................................................................27-17

27-13 Ground Adjustable Trim Tab....................................................................27-18

27-12 Ground Adjustable Trim Tab ...................................................................27-18

27-14 Aileron Trim Schematic...........................................................................27-20

27-15 Aileron Terminal Quadrant to Aileron Surface Rigging...........................27-22

27-16 Ailerons Control Surfaces........................................................................27-24

27-17 Aileron Gust Lock System.......................................................................27-26

27-18 Spoiler Control System............................................................................27-28

27-19 Spoiler Control System Synoptic.............................................................27-30

27-20 Spoiler Quadrant......................................................................................27-32

27-21 Spoiler Splitter Quadrant.........................................................................27-34

27-22 Spoiler Clutch Units................................................................................27-36

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-xiii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

27-23 Spoiler Power Control Unit......................................................................27-38

27-24 Spoiler Power Control Hydraulic Unit.....................................................27-40

27-25 Spoiler Unload Valve...............................................................................27-42

27-26 Spoiler LVDT..........................................................................................27-43

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-27 Spoiler Cables Sensor..............................................................................27-44

27-28 Powered Flight Control Surface Indicator................................................27-46

27-29 Powered Flight Surface Shutoffs..............................................................27-47

27-30 Spoiler Switchlights.................................................................................27-48

27-31 Roll Spoiler Caution Lights.....................................................................27-48

27-32 Inboard Spoiler Hydraulic Schematic......................................................27-50

27-33 Spoiler Panel Indications - Spoiler System Schematic.............................27-52

27-34 Roll Spoilers Operation > 170 KIAS.......................................................27-54

27-35 Left Wing Inboard Spoiler Jam Indicated.................................................27-55

27-36 Left Wing Spoiler Jam Recovery Switchlight

Pushed No.1 Unload Valve Energized to Unload......................................27-56

27-37 Roll Spoiler Fuselage Cable Jam Indicated-Roll Disconnect

System Activated-50 Degree Travel Switch Closed..................................27-58

27-38 
Roll Spoiler Fuselage Cable Jammed-Roll Disconnect
Activated 50° Travel Switch Closed-Both Switchlights
Pushed-Both Unload Valves Energized to Unload....................................27-60

27-39 Roll Spoiler Cable Sensor Operation.......................................................27-62

27-40 Ground Spoiler System Block Diagram...................................................27-64

27-41 Flight/Taxi Switch...................................................................................27-66

27-42 Roll Spoiler Ground Spoiler Mode Synoptic............................................27-68

27-43 Roll Spoiler in Ground Mode Schematic..................................................27-70

27-xiv FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

27-44 Spoiler Lift Dump Valve..........................................................................27-72

27-45 Spoiler Surface Indication.......................................................................27-73

27-46 Roll Spoiler in Ground Mode Caution Lights..........................................27-74

27-47 Inboard and Outboard Spoiler Panels.......................................................27-76

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-48 Roll Disconnect System...........................................................................27-77

27-49 Roll Disconnect Handle...........................................................................27-78

27-50 Roll Disconnect Lever Assembly.............................................................27-79

27-51 Roll Disconnect Clutch Mechanism.........................................................27-80

27-52 Aileron Forward Quadrant Microswitch (50°)..........................................27-81

27-53 Spoiler Pushoff Switchlights....................................................................27-82

27-54 Rudder Control System............................................................................27-84

27-55 Rudder Control System Synoptic.............................................................27-86

27-56 Rudder Pedals..........................................................................................27-88

27-57 Co-pilot’s Rudder Forward Quadrant........................................................27-90

27-58 
Download Unit - Hand Held Onsite FDR_Series 400...............................27-91

27-59 Rudder Mixer Quadrant...........................................................................27-92

27-60 Rudder Aft Quadrant................................................................................27-94

27-61 Rudder Power Control Unit......................................................................27-96

27-62 Rudder PCU Schematic...........................................................................27-98

27-63 
Rudder PCU Fluid Compensator..............................................................27-99

27-64 Rudder Shut-off Valve.......................................................................... 27-100

27-65 Rudder PCU Input Bungee.................................................................... 27-102

27-66 Rudder Position LVDT.......................................................................... 27-104

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-xv

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

27-67 Rudder Position on MFD...................................................................... 27-105

27-68 Rudder Push Off Switchlights............................................................... 27-106

27-69 FCECU Rudder Inputs and Outputs...................................................... 27-110

27-70 Rudder Control System - Electrical Schematic..................................... 27-112

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-71 Lower Rudder Control Jam Indicated.................................................... 27-114

27-72 Rudder 1 PUSH OFF Switch Pushed.................................................... 27-116

27-73 RUD CTRL Caution Light.................................................................... 27-118

27-74 Rudder Feel and Summing System Block Diagram............................... 27-119

27-75 Rudder Control System Synoptic.......................................................... 27-120

27-76 Rudder Trim Switch and Indicator........................................................ 27-121

27-77 Rudder Trim Actuator........................................................................... 27-122

27-78 Rudder Feel and Summing Unit............................................................ 27-123

27-79 Yaw Damper......................................................................................... 27-124

27-80 Rudder Trim Switch/Indicator Schematic.............................................. 27-126

27-81 Rudder Empennage............................................................................... 27-128

27-82 Elevator Control System....................................................................... 27-129

27-83 Elevator Control System Synoptic........................................................ 27-130

27-84 Elevator Control Column...................................................................... 27-132

27-85 Elevator Right Forward Quadrant.......................................................... 27-134

27-86 Elevator Left Forward Quadrant............................................................ 27-135

27-87 Elevator Aft Quadrants......................................................................... 27-136

27-88 Elevator Power Control Unit................................................................. 27-137

27-89 Elevator PCU Schematic....................................................................... 27-138

27-xvi FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

27-90 Compensator......................................................................................... 27-140

27-91 Centering Device.................................................................................. 27-141

27-92 Overload Bungee.................................................................................. 27-142

27-93 Elevator Position LVDT and PCU Input Bungee................................... 27-143

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-94 Elevator Position on MFD..................................................................... 27-144

27-95 Pitch Feel and Trim............................................................................... 27-146

27-96 Elevator Position Feedback................................................................... 27-148

27-97 Elevator Caution Lights........................................................................ 27-149

27-98 Pitch Feel and Trim Block Diagram..................................................... 27-150

27-99 Elevator Feel Caution Light.................................................................. 27-152

27-100 Pitch Feel and Trim Units..................................................................... 27-153

27-101 Dual Pitch Trim and Pitch Feel Actuators............................................. 27-154

27-102 Elevator Trim Indicator......................................................................... 27-156

27-103 Pitch Trim Switch................................................................................. 27-157

27-104 Elevator Trim Shutoff Switchlights....................................................... 27-158

27-105 Elevator Caution Lights........................................................................ 27-159

27-106 Elevator Feel and Trim System - Electrical Schematic.......................... 27-160

27-107 Elevator Trim Runaway or Manual Trim > 3 secs.................................. 27-162

27-108 Trim Push/Off Switch Pushed-Pitch Trim Caution Light ON................ 27-164

27-109 SPS Block Diagram.............................................................................. 27-166

27-110 Stall Protection Modules Locator.......................................................... 27-170

27-111 Stick Pusher Actuator Locator.............................................................. 27-171

27-112 Stick Pusher Capstan Locator............................................................... 27-172

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-xvii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

27-113 Stick Pusher Quadrant Locator............................................................. 27-174

27-114 Stick Shaker Locator............................................................................ 27-175

27-115 Angle Of Attack Transducer Locator..................................................... 27-176

27-116 SPS Stick Pusher Shutoff Annunciator Switch Locator......................... 27-177

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-117 SPM Inputs........................................................................................... 27-178

27-118 SPM Outputs........................................................................................ 27-180

27-119 Stick Pusher Shutoff Switchlights......................................................... 27-182

27-120 SPM Caution Light Indications............................................................. 27-184

27-121 PFD Low Speed Cue Indications.......................................................... 27-186

27-122 PFD Low Speed Cue Malfunction Indications...................................... 27-187

27-123 Stall Warn Test Toggle Switch............................................................... 27-188

27-124 Elevator Surface................................................................................... 27-189

27-125 Pitch Disconnect Clutch Mechanism Component Location Index......... 27-190

27-126 Wing Flap System................................................................................. 27-194

27-127 Flap Control Unit (FCU)....................................................................... 27-196

27-128 Flap Control Unit Block Diagram......................................................... 27-198

27-129 Flap System Caution Panel................................................................... 27-199

27-130 Flap Selector Quadrant......................................................................... 27-200

27-131 Flap Control System - Electrical Schematic.......................................... 27-202

27-132 Flap Drive............................................................................................. 27-206

27-133 Flap Drive System................................................................................ 27-207

27-134 Flap Power Unit.................................................................................... 27-208

27-135 Flap Power Unit Schematic................................................................... 27-209

27-xviii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

27-136 Flap Transmission Shafts...................................................................... 27-210

27-137 Flap Torsion Bars.................................................................................. 27-211

27-138 Flap Tracks........................................................................................... 27-213

27-139 No.3 and 4 Flap Rollers........................................................................ 27-214

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-140 Flap Carriage........................................................................................ 27-215

27-141 Wing Flap System................................................................................. 27-216

27-142 Flap Position Indication Unit................................................................ 27-218

27-143 Flap Position Indication Unit Block Diagram...................................... 27-219

27-144 Flap Position Transducer....................................................................... 27-220

27-145 Flap Position Indication/Multi-Function Display.................................. 27-221

27-146 Flap Position Indication - Electrical Schematic..................................... 27-222

27-147 Flaps..................................................................................................... 27-224

27-148 Task 45-00-27-743-802 CDS System Pages Indications........................ 27-225

27-149 Task 45-00-27-743-801 CDS System Pages Indications........................ 27-226

27-150 Task 45-00-27-742-802 CDS System Pages Indications (1 of 2)........... 27-227

27-151 Task 45-00-27-742-802 CDS System Pages Indications (2 of 2)........... 27-228

27-152 Task 45-00-27-742-801 CDS System Pages Indications (1 of 2)........... 27-229

27-153 Task 45-00-27-742-801 CDS System Pages Indications (2 of 2)........... 27-230

27-154 Flight Control Electronic Control Unit................................................. 27-232

27-155 FCECU/Left Channel Block Diagram................................................... 27-234

27-156 FCECU/Right Channel Block Diagram................................................. 27-236

27-157 FCECU Block Diagram........................................................................ 27-238

27-158 Caution and Warning Panel................................................................... 27-240

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-xix

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

27-159 Caution and Warning Panel................................................................... 27-242

27-160 Roll Spoiler Advisory Lights................................................................ 27-244

27-161 CDS Interface....................................................................................... 27-247

27-162 CDS Ground Maintenance Toggle Switch Selection.............................. 27-248

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-xx FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-00-00 FLIGHT CONTROLS
INTRODUCTION
The primary flight control surfaces are operated by cables from the left or right control
columns and rudder pedals. This allows the aircraft to be flown from either the pilot or
co-pilot positions.
The position of the rudder, roll spoilers, and elevators are displayed on the Powered
Flight Control Surfaces Indicator (PFCSI). The PFCSI display is on the pilot’s Multi
Functional Display. The inputs to the display are provided by the Integrated Flight
Cabinet, which receives information on surface position from the Flight Control
Electronic Control Unit (FCECU).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-1

 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Elevator
27-2

Aileron
Geared Tab
Ground Adjustable Tab
Spoilers

DASH 8 Q400
Outboard Flaps Rudder
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Inboard Flaps

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Outboard Flaps
Spoilers
Geared Tab
Aileron

Flight Control Electronic Unit

fs238a01.cgm

Figure 27-1.  Flight Control System

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

GENERAL WARNING
All flight controls may be operated from either INSTALL SAFETY DEVICES,
the pilot’s or co-pilot’s seat. The rudders WARNING SIGNS AND
provide yaw control, the ailerons and spoilers PLACARDS BEFORE YOU
roll control, and elevators pitch control (Figure START A PROCEDURE
27-1). The rudders, spoilers and elevators are ON, OR AROUND, FLIGHT
hydraulically powered, and identified as the CONTROLS OR FLIGHT
Powered Flight Control Surfaces (PFCS) on the CONTROL SURFACES.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

MFD PSA area. A gust lock system is provided
for the aileron controls, to protect the ailerons MAKE SURE THERE ARE NO
in strong wind. PERSONNEL ON OR NEAR
THE FLIGHT CONTROLS OR
The spoilers assist the ailerons in providing THE SURFACES.
roll control, and reduce lift after the aircraft
touches down. ACCIDENTAL MOVEMENT
OF THE CONTROLS CAN
PFCS positions are shown in the Permanent CAUSE INJURIES TO
Systems Area (PSA) of Multi-Function PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
Display 1 (MFD1). These PFCS positions TO THE EQUIPMENT.
are transmitted to the PSA from the control
surfaces, through the Integrated Flight Cabinet THE ABOVE WARNINGS
(IFC). Trim indicators show trim position of the MUST BE OBSERVED
flight controls. Advisory lights indicate system DURING ALL FLIGHT
operation, and caution lights indicate flight CONTROL TASKS.
control malfunctions.
ON AIRCRAFT WITH
Refer to Figure 27-1. Flight Control System. MODSUM 4Q126279
INSTALLED, ALL PUSH RODS
The Flight Control System has the following FROM FLIGHT CONTROL
subsystems: INPUTS TO FORWARD
QUADRANTS ARE EQUIPPED
•• FCECU (27-00-01) WITH FORCE SENSORS
THAT SEND INFORMATION
•• Aileron Control System (27-10-00)
TO THE FLIGHT DATA
•• Rudder Control System (27-20-00) RECORDER.
•• Elevator Control System (27-30-00)
•• Wing Flaps (27-50-00)
•• Spoilers Control System (27-60-00)
•• Gust Lock Systems (27-70-00).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-12-00 AILERON The aileron system is comprised of the

following:
SYSTEM
•• Aileron forward quadrant
GENERAL •• Aileron splitter quadrant
Refer to Figure 27-2. Aileron Control System. •• Aileron terminal quadrant
•• Aileron geared tab
Movement of the control handwheels causes the
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

aileron surfaces to deflect asymmetrically and •• Aileron position LVDT

in proportion to control handwheel rotation.
The aileron system also receives inputs from
the Auto Flight Control System and the Aileron
Trim and Centering Unit.

3
8

7 5

LEGEND 3

1. Aileron Forward Quadrant.

2. Aileron Splitter Quadrant.
3. Aileron Terminal Quadrant.
4. Aileron LVDT.
5. Aileron.
6. Aileron Gust Lock Mechanism.
7. Fuselage Cable Turnbuckles.
8. Wing Cable Turnbuckles.
fs001a01.cgm

Figure 27-2.  Aileron Control System

27-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Each aileron control wing cable terminates at

an aileron terminal quadrant. Aileron terminal
Refer to Figure 27-3. Aileron Control System quadrant movement is transmitted to the aileron
Synoptic. by a push-rod.

The aileron control cables are routed aft from Geared tabs are installed on each aileron, and
the forward aileron quadrant, up the forward a ground adjustable tab on right hand aileron.
face of the flight compartment bulkhead and
aft along the cabin roof. The cables terminate

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

at the aileron splitter quadrant on the aft face
of the wing rear spar.

The aileron control wing cables are routed

outboard from the aileron splitter quadrant,
with one cable loop along each wing.

ROLL
DISCONNECT
HANDLE
ROLL
DISCONNECT

TO SPOILER
CONTROLS

TRIM AUTOPILOT
ACTUATOR SERVO
AILERON
SPRING
FORWARD
TORSION
QUADRANT
BAR

AILERON TERMINAL AILERON TERMINAL

AILERON LVDT QUADRANT
QUADRANT
SPLITTER
QUADRANT

GUST
LEFT LOCK RIGHT
AILERON AILERON
DN UP

GROUND
ADJUSTABLE
GEARED TAB GEARED TAB
TAB
fs179a01.cgm

Figure 27-3.  Aileron Control System Synoptic

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The aileron forward quadrant receives inputs

from:
Aileron Forward Quadrant
•• Co-pilot control handwheel
Refer to Figure 27-4. Aileron Forward Quadrant.
•• The autopilot
The aileron forward quadrant is installed in the •• The aileron trim
right side of the lower forward fuselage, below
the flight compartment floor. The quadrant has • And centering unit.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

two pulleys with secondary travel stops and a

lever assembly all installed on a single shaft. The quadrant outputs the sum of these inputs
through the cable system.
A push-rod connects the lever at the base of
the co-pilot’s control column to the lever on
the aileron forward quadrant.

The forward quadrant also contains a 50°

travel switch.

LEGEND
1. Aileron Input to Splitter Quadrant.
2. Aileron Autopilot Servo.
3. Cables.
4. Aileron Forward Quadrant.
5. Secondary Stops.
6. Rig Pin.

4
A

3 D
FW
2

1 5

ft003a01.cgm

Figure 27-4.  Aileron Forward Quadrant

27-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RIGGING OF AILERON CONTROL COLUMN TO

QUADRANT MICROSWITCH CONTROL COLUMN RIGGING &
The following is an abbreviated description of
CONTROL COLUMN TO
the maintenance practice and is intended for AILERON QUADRANT
training purposes only. For a more detailed
The following is an abbreviated description of
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the maintenance practice and is intended for
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
training purposes only. For a more detailed

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

description of the practice, refer to the task in
•• Pull the ROLL DISC handle
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
•• Control wheel to neutral
•• Install rigging pins in spoiler, aileron
•• Make sure rigging pin can be installed and
and elevator quadrants
removed from the aileron quadrant freely
•• Disconnect the roll interconnect push
•• Use inclinometer and rotate control
rods on the pilot and co-pilot sides
wheel so that quadrant rotates 31.5°
from neutral position •• Remove the aileron push rod from the
push rod lever
•• Adjust the microswitch plunger to
contact the cam at this position •• Align the handwheels horizontally
•• Rotate control wheel in the opposite •• Adjust the interconnect pushrods as
direction to 31.5° necessary and re-connect
•• Adjust microswitch plunger to contact •• Adjust the aileron pushrod as necessary
the cam and re-connect
•• Release the ROLL DISC handle •• Remove all rigging pins
• Ensure control wheels move together. •• Pressurize No.1 and No.2 hydraulic
systems
•• Do an Operational Test of the Aileron
Control system
•• Do an Operational Test of the Spoiler
Control System and of the Spoilers.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-7

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A LEGEND
1. LH Aileron Control Cables.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

2. Aileron Splitter Quadrant.

3. RH Aileron Control Cables.
4. Quadrant Input Cables.
5. Gust Lock Plate.
6. Rig Pin Hole.
7. Gust Lock.
8. Gust Lock Control Cable.
9. Wing Rear Spar.
10. Gust Lock Release Springs.

3
A 2

10

FW
D

9 8 7 6 5
ft164a01.cgm

Figure 27-5.  Aileron Splitter Quadrant

27-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Aileron Splitter Quadrant NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-5. Aileron Splitter Quadrant.

The splitter quadrant is installed on the aft face

of the wing rear spar. The quadrant has three
pulleys installed on a common shaft.

The aileron splitter quadrant transmits aileron

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

cable inputs from the co-pilot’s forward
quadrant to the aileron terminal quadrants
located in each wing.

Gust locking of the ailerons is supplied by an

internal spring-loaded lever attached off-center
to the bottom of the splitter quadrant.

When the gust lock is engaged, a plunger is

inserted in the gust lock plate at the base of the
splitter quadrant. This locks the ailerons in the
neutral position.

AILERON QUADRANT TO
SPLITTER QUADRANT
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Pull the ROLL DISC handle and turn

through 90°
•• Install rigging pins in the aileron forward
quadrant and the splitter quadrant
•• Engage the gust lock
•• Use cable tension meter to measure the
tension on each side of the aileron cable
•• Adjust the turnbuckles to adjust cable
tension as necessary
•• Re-check tension after 7 days.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-9

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

1
6

LEGEND 6
5
1. Pulley.
2. Cables.
3. Rig Pin.
4. Terminal Quadrant.
5. Rod. FW
6. Primary Aileron/Roll D
A
Spoiler Stops.

ft162a01.cgm

Figure 27-6.  Aileron Terminal Quadrant

27-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AILERON TERMINAL NOTES

QUADRANT
Refer to Figure 27-6. Aileron Terminal Quadrant.

Each aileron terminal quadrant is located on the

wing rear spar adjacent to its related aileron.

The quadrant is connected to the aileron by a

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

lever and a control rod. For rigging procedures,
a 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) rig pin hole is used to lock
the quadrant in neutral.

The terminal quadrant transmits aileron cable

control from the aileron splitter quadrant to the
aileron surface.

The quadrant also includes the primary adjustable

stops for aileron and roll spoiler movement.

AILERON SPLITTER QUADRANT

TO AILERON TERMINAL
QUADRANT RIGGING
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Lower the flaps

•• Pull the ROLL DISC handle and turn
through 90°
•• Engage the gust lock
•• Install the rigging pins in the aileron
splitter quadrant and left and right
aileron terminal quadrants
•• Check and adjust the cable tension as
necessary iaw the AMM.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-11

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Figure 27-7.  Aileron Geared Tab

27-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Aileron Geared Tab RIGGING OF THE AILERON

Refer to Figure 27-7. Aileron Geared Tab. GEARED TAB
The following is an abbreviated description of
The aileron geared tab is attached by four hinge
the maintenance practice and is intended for
fittings to the trailing edge of each aileron.
training purposes only. For a more detailed
The tab is connected to the aileron by a geared
description of the practice, refer to the task in
linkage so that the geared tab moves 70% of
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
the total aileron movement in the opposite

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

direction. This action gives aerodynamic
•• Install the rigging pins in the terminal
assistance and reduces the force required to
quadrants
turn the control handwheels.
•• Install the aileron rigging tool on the
At full aileron deflection of 17°, the aileron wing and aileron to ensure the ailerons
geared tab deflects 11.9°. The geared tab linkage are in neutral
is connected to the aileron hinge point to give tab
•• Install aileron geared tab rigging tool
movement, in proportion to aileron movement.
•• Using the rigging board ensure that the
Each geared tab has adjustable bolts located on geared tab is at neutral (0°).
the hinge arm of the tab.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-13

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

D
FW

Figure 27-8.  Aileron Position LVDT

Figure 27-9.  Aileron Position LVDT

27-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Aileron Position LVDT •• Apply the CONTROL LOCK

Refer to: •• Open control columns access panels
•• Make a cloth moist with approved
• • Figure 27-8. A
 ileron Position cleaning solvent
LVDT.
•• Clean contamination from the chains
• Figure 27-9. Aileron Position LVDT. with the wiper cloth
The aileron LVDT is fitted to the control input • Make sure the area is dry

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

to the right hand aileron.
CAUTION
The LVDT supplies an electrical signal
equivalent to the angular position of the flight DO NOT MIX GREASE FROM
control surface to the FCECU. DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS
OR DIFFERENT SPECIFICATIONS.
The FCECU supplies electrical excitation to
the LVDT. The FCECU transmits this data to •• Apply a thin film of grease to the chains
the Flight Data Recorder (FDR) through the with your hand
Integrated Flight Cabinet (IFC) No.1 on an
ARINC 429 Data Bus. •• Close the access panels
AILERON LVDT FAIL FAULT
NOTE ISOLATION
The aileron, rudder and elevator
The following is an abbreviated description of
LVDTs have the same part
the maintenance practice and is intended for
number and are interchangeable.
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
Operation the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
Rotary movement of the co-pilot’s control
handwheel is transmitted by a sprocket and •• Energize the electrical system
chain mechanism to a sprocket and lever •• Do a fault message retrieval in the CDS
assembly. This assembly is at the base of the for flight control system
co-pilot’s control column. A push-rod connects
the lever to the aileron forward quadrant. •• Do an operational test of the aileron
control system
Connected to the aileron forward quadrant are •• If the AIL LVDT FAIL message comes
inputs from the Aileron trim system and an on go to the Fault Isolation procedure
input from the auto-pilot servo.
•• Disconnect the electrical connector
from the LVDT
LUBRICATION OF AILERON
AND ROLL SPOILER CONTROL •• Disconnect electrical connector P1 from
the FCECU
COLUMN CHAINS
•• Check continuity of both connectors
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for •• Re-connect the electrical connectors
training purposes only. For a more detailed •• Do a fault confirmation
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. •• If fault continues replace LVDT
•• If fault continues replace FCECU.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-15

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-13-00 AILERONS
TRIM AND CENTERING
GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-10. Aileron Trim and
Centering Unit.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Aileron trim is achieved by an electrical

actuator located in the aileron trim and
centering unit. The trim and centering unit is
connected to the aileron forward quadrant by a
spring torsion bar that makes sure the aileron
surfaces always return to a neutral position.

The aileron trim and centering system has the

following components:

•• Trim actuator
•• Centering unit (Torsion bar)
• Trim-ground adjustable tab.

FW
D
D
FW

LEGEND 2

1. Spring Torsion Bar.

2. Aileron Trim Actuator.

ft008a01.cgm

Figure 27-10.  Aileron Trim and Centering Unit

27-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Trim Actuator
Refer to Figure 27-11. Aileron Trim Actuator.

The trim actuator drives the aileron control

system to counter the effects of lateral imbalance.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The aileron trim actuator is fitted under the left
side flight compartment floor.

The actuator has the following:

•• Electric motor and linear actuator

•• Gearbox
•• Circuit cards
• LVDT.

AILERON TRIM AND

A
CENTRING ASSEMBLY

D
FW

FW
D

fs011a01.cgm

Figure 27-11.  Aileron Trim Actuator

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-17

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Ground Adjustable Trim Tab

Refer to:
•• Figure 27-12. G round Adjustable
Trim Tab.

•• Figure 27-13. G round Adjustable

Trim Tab.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The ground adjustable trim tab is located

on the trailing edge of the right aileron,
inboard of the geared tab. The adjustment
is made on a serrated plate, at the tab end
of the geared linkage.

The ground adjustable trim tab is used to Figure 27-12.  Ground Adjustable Trim Tab
adjust for any aerodynamic asymmetry
between ailerons.

GROUND ADJUSTABLE TRIM TAB

FW D
TB
D OU

FW
D

LEGEND
1. Connecting Link.
2. Link Bracket. 2
3. Sleeve.
3

ft169a01.cgm

Figure 27-13.  Ground Adjustable Trim Tab

27-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION When the autopilot is engaged, a message

MISTRIM (TRIM L WING DN) or (TRIM R
Normal Operation WING DN) is shown on the Primary Flight
Display if aileron trim is required.
Refer to Figure 27-14. Aileron Trim Schematic.
CAUTION
The AILERON trim switch is spring-loaded to
return to the center-off position. The aileron Release control lock when testing
trim switch has three positions: aileron trim.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• LWD (left wing down)
•• RWD (right wing down)
OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE
AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM
• Center-off.
The following is an abbreviated description of
Input commands from the aileron trim actuator the maintenance practice and is intended for
to the aileron trim and centering system rotates training purposes only. For a more detailed
the aileron forward quadrant. description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
An aileron trim indicator shows aileron trim
position. The aileron trim indicator receives its •• Release CONTROL LOCK
information from a LVDT. •• Pull ROLL DISC handle
The LVDT also transmits aileron trim position •• Ensure aileron trim is at neutral
data to the FDR. •• Hold roll spoiler control wheel in neutral
Power for the Aileron Trim Linear Actuator is •• Rotate aileron control wheel to full
supplied from the 28 VDC Left essential bus movement each side of neutral
through circuit breakers G8 to pin 7 on the •• Make sure ailerons move freely from
actuator. The ground is supplied through pin 6 stop to stop
on connectors P4.
• • Check that SPLR1 and SPLR2 powered
Power for the Aileron Trim Control Panel is flight control shutoff lights show
supplied from the 28 VDC Left essential bus PUSH OFF when aileron control wheel
is > 50° either side of neutral
through circuit breakers H8 to pin C on the trim
panel. The ground is supplied through pins D • Release ROLL DISC handle.
and E.
OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE
Abnormal Operation AILERON TRIM SYSTEM
If the AILERON trim switch fails to the closed
The following is an abbreviated description of
position, a limit switch on the trim actuator
the maintenance practice and is intended for
housing opens the electrical circuit and causes
training purposes only. For a more detailed
the trim actuator to stop at the maximum trim
description of the practice, refer to the task in
input. If the limit switch fails to stop the
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
trim actuator, a mechanical stop on the trim
actuator housing stops the trim actuator at the •• Release the CONTROL LOCK lever to
maximum trim setting. the OFF position
•• Make sure the aileron control surfaces
are in the neutral position

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-19

27-20 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

(G8)
AIL TRIM ACT
5A 7 +28 VDC
6 +28 VDC RTN
DC
+28 VDC RTN

DASH 8 Q400
LEFT ESS
(H8)
BUS
AIL TRIM IND
5A

ROLL
DISCONNECT
LEFT DC CBP HANDLE
ROLL
DISCONNECT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

TO SPOILER
CONTROLS

J/P2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

HI G 4 HI TRIM AUTOPILOT
AIL POS AIL POS SERVO
LO H 13 LO ACTUATOR AILERON
SPRING
FORWARD
TORSION QUADRANT
+28 VDC C BAR
AIL
I DC RETURN D
CHASSIS GND E
£

TRIM
TRIM AILERON TERMINAL
AILERON TERMINAL AILERON
AILERON TRIM QUADRANT
LVDT QUADRANT
SPLITTER
INDICATOR QUADRANT

GUST
+5 VDC A +5 VDC PANEL LEFT LOCK RIGHT
B DC RTN LIGHTING AILERON AILERON
AILERON DN UP

J/P100 GROUND
1
H 8 AIL TRIM RTN GEARED TAB
ADJUSTABLE
GEARED TAB
L 2 J 10 AIL TRIM EXT TAB

K 2 AIL TRIM RET

3 L 3 AIL TRIM EN
4
5
R 6

2711-S1
AILERON TRIM SWITCH

TRIM CONTROL PANEL

(CENTER CONSOLE)

AILERON TRIM
AIL POS HI 414 LINEAR ACTUATOR
AIL POS LO 413

31-40 A1 IOM #1

Figure 27-14.  Aileron Trim Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• Select trim switch fully LWD NOTES

•• Make sure trim indicator is operating
correctly
•• Make sure left aileron is UP, and right
aileron is DOWN
•• Repeat with switch in RWD, check
indicator and aileron positions

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Set aileron trim to the neutral position
•• Set CONTROL LOCK to ON position.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-21

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

2
3

1
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

LEGEND 6
1. Aileron terminal quadrant.
2. Rigging pin (left wing).
3. Rigging pin (right wing).
4. Aileron.
5. Aileron rigging tool.
6. Aileron control rod.

LH SIDE SHOWN, RH SIDE SIMILAR

14

4
6

pb165a01.dg, pt/gv, 16/04/02

Figure 27-15.  Aileron Terminal Quadrant to Aileron Surface Rigging

27-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-14-00 AILERON The maintenance check flight and subsequent

GAT and aileron pushrod adjustment makes
SURFACES sure that the aircraft will fly level with the
control wheels in the neutral position.
INTRODUCTION
RIGGING OF THE AILERON
The aileron surfaces are the primary flight
control. The aileron surfaces are assisted by
CONTROL SYSTEM STOPS
the roll spoilers which give roll control of the The following is an abbreviated description of

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

aircraft in flight. the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
GENERAL description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
Refer to Figure 27-15. Aileron Terminal
Quadrant to Aileron Surface Rigging. •• Pull the ROLL DISC handle
There are two aileron control surfaces. They •• Install rigging pins in left and right
are installed on the outboard ends of the left aileron terminal quadrants
and right wing. •• Put an inclinometer on the upper
surface of the left and right ailerons @
Aileron travel is ±17º around the neutral position. YW 436.02
•• Set the protractors to read 0°
AILERON TERMINAL
QUADRANT TO AILERON •• Install left and right aileron rigging
boards
SURFACE RIGGING
•• Remove the rigging pins
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for •• T u r n c o - p i l o t ’ s h a n d w h e e l
training purposes only. For a more detailed counterclockwise, stop when the left
description of the practice, refer to the task in aileron is at 16.5° to 17°
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. •• Hold the hand wheel in this position
This procedure sets the ailerons to the 0° •• Adjust the stop bolts on the terminal
position on the aileron rigging tool with the quadrants to touch the stop faces
rigging pins in the terminal quadrant. •• Record the angle of the aileron
After you do this procedure you must have the •• Turn the control wheel fully clockwise
aircraft flown and do subsequent adjustments to and hold
the Ground Adjustable Trim Tab and the aileron •• Repeat the procedure for the stop bolts
pushrods i.a.w. TASK 27-13-11-830-803.
•• Make sure the travel of the two ailerons is
This subsequent aileron pushrod adjustment between 0.5° or less of each other.
can change the position of the ailerons, with
the rigging pins in the terminal quadrants, to a
maximum of 2° either side of 0° on the aileron
rigging tool.

This is necessary to compensate for

manufacturing tolerances of the aircraft structure.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-23

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

1 2

LEGEND
1. Ground Adjustable Trim Tab.
2. RH Aileron Geared Tab.
3. Horn.
4. LH Aileron Geared Tab.

Figure 27-16.  Ailerons Control Surfaces

27-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Aileron Control Surfaces
Refer to Figure 27-16. Ailerons Control Surfaces.

The aileron consists of following components:

•• Aileron box

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Leading edge
•• Trailing edge
•• Aileron tip
•• Gear tab
• Trim tab (right hand aileron only).

Aileron movement is defined by the control

system and is translated to the aileron by a push
rod connected to the aileron actuator bracket.

The aileron has a geared tab.

The aileron has horn and leading edge mass

balance.

View holes are located on the bottom of the

aileron for visual inspection of the hinge pins.
An access panel is located at the center hinge
point. A horn with internal mass balance
weights is located on the outboard end of each
aileron to give aerodynamic balance.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-25

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEGEND
2
1. Control Lock Lever.
2. Control Lock Off Position.
3. Control Lock On Position.
4. Gust Lock Cables.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

5. Gust Lock Lever. R R

A A
6. Gust Lock Mechanism. T T
I I
7. Rig Pin Hole. N N I
G G
3
FLIGHT
IDLE

DISC

AILERON SPLITTER
QUADRANT

Figure 27-17.  Aileron Gust Lock System

27-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-70-00 AILERON GUST OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

LOCK SYSTEM AILERON GUST LOCK SYSTEM
The following is an abbreviated description of
INTRODUCTION the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
The aileron gust lock provides protection against description of the practice, refer to the task in
wind gusts, while the aircraft is stationary on the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
the ground.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Make sure the CONTROL LOCK (gust
GENERAL lock) handle is fully forward in the
OFF position
The aileron control system is a mechanically
operated system. Gust protection for the •• Move the pilot or co-pilot control wheel
ailerons is supplied by a gust lock mechanism and make sure that:
operated from the flight compartment. When °° The two control wheels turn in the
the CONTROL LOCK lever on the center same direction and at the same time
console is pulled aft to the ON position, the
ailerons are locked in neutral. °° The aileron control surfaces move
in relation to the control wheel
The aileron gust lock system has the following movement
sub-system: °° The ailerons move freely through
the full range of travel
• Aileron Gust Lock System Mechanism.
•• Put the control wheels near their neutral
position
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
•• Engage the aileron gust lock.
Refer to Figure 27-17. Aileron Gust Lock System.

The CONTROL LOCK lever is located in the

flight compartment, on the power quadrant.
When the CONTROL LOCK lever release is
pulled up (squeezed) and the lever is moved
from the OFF to the ON position, the aileron
mechanism gust lock lever is pivoted by cable
to the locked position.

If the ailerons are in the neutral position, the

plunger engages in the lock plate slot and prevents
the aileron splitter quadrant from rotating.

If the ailerons are not in the neutral position,

the plunger is compressed against the face of
the lock plate. When the ailerons are moved
to the neutral position the plunger springs out
to the locked position.

If a gust lock cable fails, the gust lock mechanism

fails safe to the unlocked position. Two tension
springs pull the gust lock lever towards the OFF
position assuring positive disengagement.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-27

27-28 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

DASH 8 Q400
3

5
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

6 2

1
7

LEGEND

7 1. Outboard Spoiler.
2. Inboard Spoiler.
6 3. Spoiler Splitter Quadrant.
5 4. Spoiler Control Cables.
5. Outboard Spoiler PCU.
8 6. Spoiler Clutch.
7. Inboard Spoiler PCU.
8. Spoiler Forward Quadrant.

fs055a01.cgm

Figure 27-18.  Spoiler Control System

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-61-00 ROLL NOTES

SPOILERS SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The roll spoilers are hydraulically powered and
operate with, and in proportion to, the aileron
control system. They assist in lateral control of

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the aircraft during flight. The roll spoilers also
decrease the lift of the wings on landing.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-18. Spoiler Control System.

There are two hydraulically powered roll

spoilers on each wing.

Movement of the handwheels operates a cable

system connected to Power Control Units
(PCU). The PCU extend or retract the spoiler
panels. The No.1 hydraulic system supplies the
inboard spoilers and the No.2 hydraulic system
supplies the outboard spoilers.

There are three modes of spoiler operation:

•• Flight Mode
•• Ground Mode (refer to 27-62-00) and
• Taxi Mode.

The roll spoiler system includes the following

components:

•• Spoiler quadrant
•• Spoiler splitter quadrant
•• Clutch units
•• Power control units
•• Unload valves
•• Spoiler LVDTs
•• Spoiler cable sensor
• Lift dump valves.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-29

27-30 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

ROLL
DISCONNECT
NOTE HANDLE
H1 Powered By Number 1 Hydraulic System.
H2 Powered By Number 2 Hydraulic System.

TO AILERON

DASH 8 Q400
CONTROLS
POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS
SPLR 1 SPLR 2 ROLL
PUSH PUSH
DISCONNECT
OFF OFF MECHANISM
SPOILER QUADRANT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

TENSION REGULATOR

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPOILER CLUTCH (4)
FROM FROM
SPOILER CLUTCH SPOILER SPLITTER
SPOILER CLUTCH
QUADRANT

ASYMMETRIC
LINKAGE

H1
H2

H1

2H
TO SPLR TO SPLR
PUSHOFF PUSHOFF
SWITCH SWITCH

SPOILER
PCU
LH. OUTBD. SPOILER LH. INBD. SPOILER RH. INBD. SPOILER RH. OUTBD. SPOILER

fs106a01.cgm

Figure 27-19.  Spoiler Control System Synoptic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-19. Spoiler Control System
Synoptic.

Rotary movement of the control wheels is

transmitted by sprockets, chains, and push-rod to
the spoiler quadrant. This is all done through the
base of the pilot’s control column. A force sensor

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

is installed between the left control column and
the spoiler quadrant. The signal transmitted by
the sensor is recorded by the EDR.

The control cables are routed from the quadrant

below the floor up to the aft pressure bulkhead.
They go up then run forward to aft of wing rear
spar through the pressure vessel to a splitter
quadrant installed on the rear spar. The cables
from the splitter quadrant are routed to the
spoiler clutches quadrants.

The clutches are connected to push-rods, levers,

and bell cranks to give mechanical inputs to the
hydraulic spoiler actuators.

A clutch in the pulley of each mechanism

can disengage and isolate either inboard or
outboard spoilers if a PCU linkage jams.

If the clutch slips, an advisory switchlight

illuminates. (PUSH OFF) Pushing the
switchlight depressurizes the jammed PCU
and the corresponding PCU on the other wing.

At high airspeeds the outboard spoilers are

locked out. Failure to lock out or re-engage the
spoilers will be annunciated to the crew by an
illuminated caution light (SPLR OUTB).

Hydraulic pressure applied to the PCUs is

monitored. Any faults will be displayed in the
flight compartment.

A roll disconnect system is supplied in the

event a cable jam occurs (refer to 27-16-00).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-31

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT

FW
D
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

INB
1 D

D
FW

LEGEND
1. Rig Pin Hole.
4 2. Pushrod Attachment.
3. Cable Tension Regulator.
4. Mounting Brackets.
ft095a01.cgm

Figure 27-20.  Spoiler Quadrant

27-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Spoiler Quadrant
Refer to Figure 27-20. Spoiler Quadrant.

The spoiler quadrant transmits the control column

hand wheel inputs to the spoiler cable system.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The spoiler quadrant is installed at the base of
the pilot's control column and connected to the
interconnect rod. It includes a tension regulator,
which maintains constant cable tension under
all temperature conditions.

The attached Hot Normal Cold (H-N-C) scale

and pointer is used to rig the tension regulator
in accordance with temperature related graphs.
The spoiler quadrant includes the secondary
control stops, and a rig pin hole.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-33

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPOILER SPLITTER QUADRANT

INSTALLATION
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FWD
2

3
LEGEND
1. Fuselage Input Quadrant.
2. Rig Pin Hole.
3. Bracket.
4. RH and LH Wing Output Pulley.
ft014a01.cgm

Figure 27-21.  Spoiler Splitter Quadrant

27-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Spoiler Splitter Quadrant NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-21. Spoiler Splitter Quadrant.

The spoiler splitter quadrant transmits control

column roll system inputs to the wing spoiler
cable circuits.

The quadrant is attached to the aft face of

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the wing rear spar. It has two brackets and
three pulleys. The larger lower pulley is the
attachment point for the control cable from the
forward spoiler quadrant.

The top pulley inputs the right wing spoilers. The

middle pulley inputs the left wing spoilers. There
is a rig pin hole to lock the quadrant in neutral.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-35

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SURFACE SPOILER CONTROL ASSEMBLY

D
FW

D
FW
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

5
1

7
FW
D

LEGEND
1. Microswitch (SPLR 1 PUSHOFF). 5. Pushrod Attachment (INBD PCU). NOTE
2. Clutch Spring. 6. Input Quadrant. Outbd clutch mechanism
3. Mounting Brackets. 7. Cam. on bottom of quadrant.
4. Rig Pin Hole. 8. Clutch Plate. ft053a01.cgm

Figure 27-22.  Spoiler Clutch Units

27-36 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Clutch Units NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-22. Spoiler Clutch Units.

The clutch units transmit spoiler system inputs

to the spoiler PCU.

The clutch units are installed centrally below the

two spoiler panels attached to the wing rear spar.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The clutch units operate the spoiler PCU input
levers through two push-rods and one bellcrank.

The units contain two clutch mechanisms to

allow for a jam between the clutch unit and the
controls to either spoiler panel.

If the linkage jams, with a force of

approximately 27 lbs (12.25 kg) at the clutch
and approximately 12 lbs (6 kg) at control
wheel will cause disengagement of the clutch
and the clutch will slip.

When the clutch slips, it operates a microswitch,

causing the inboard or outboard spoiler
switchlight (SPLR1 or SPLR 2) PUSH OFF
annunciation to illuminate.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-37

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SURFACE SPOILER CONTROL ASSEMBLY

D
FW

D
FW
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

5 6 4 3

2
12

11 D
FW
10

1
9 8 7
LEGEND

1. Pushrod Attachment. 7. Input Crank Lever Assembly.

2. Bellcrank Assembly. 8. Serrated Insert.
3. Input Connecting Link Assembly. 9. Main Control Valve.
4. Crank Connecting Link Assembly. 10. Rod End Assembly.
5. Feedback Link. 11. Spoiler Panel Link.
6. Summing Link. 12. Manual Release Valve. ft097a01.cgm

Figure 27-23.  Spoiler Power Control Unit

27-38 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Power Control Units (Inboard/ NOTES

Outboard)
Refer to Figure 27-23. Spoiler Power Control Unit.

The PCU transfer spoiler system input commands

into hydraulic outputs to the spoiler panels.

The PCUs are mounted on brackets attached

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

to the wing rear spar below the spoiler panels.

The PCU has four ports:

•• Extend port
•• Retraction or hold down port
•• Return port
• Lift dump port (Ground Spoiler Mode).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-39

27-40 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

THERMAL RELIEF/ MAIN CONTROL

RECIRCULATING VALVE VALVE

LIFT DUMP
PORT

DASH 8 Q400
(GROUND MODE)

EXTEND
PORT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

(FROM UNLOAD VALVE)

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RETURN

. 
PORT

ACTUATOR MANUAL RELEASE

ASSEMBLY RETRACT
VALVE
PORT
(SYSTEM PRESSURE)

fss97a01a.cgm

Figure 27-24.  Spoiler Power Control Hydraulic Unit

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-24. Spoiler Power Control NOTES

Hydraulic Unit.

The input lever operates a main control valve.

Main control valve input opens the extend port
to the actuator piston. The hold down port is
pressurized and ported directly to the actuator
piston. Hydraulic pressure holds down the
spoiler panels.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The actuator piston extend port pressure
must overcome the actuator piston hold down
pressure. The input commands move the
actuator rod with an attached feed back linkage.

Actuator travel stops when the actuator rod

position corresponds to the input lever position.

The PCU incorporates a manual release valve

to aid in PCU hydraulic bleeding. The spoiler
panels can extend to a maximum of 75°.

The No.1 or No.2 hydraulic system supplies

constant pressure to the retract port of the
inboard spoiler PCU, and extend pressure
through the de-energized open unload valve.

The constantly supplied retract pressure acts on

the small surface area of the PCU piston. The
extend pressure, when directed by the control
valve of the PCU, acts on the larger surface
area of the piston, extending the ram, driving
the spoiler panel up.

Pressure on the retract side opens the thermal

relief/recirculating valve in the PCU.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-41

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Unload Valves
Refer to Figure 27-25. Spoiler Unload Valve.

The unload valves supply the PCU with system

hydraulic pressure:

•• No.1 unload valve is located on the

left side of the fuselage in the wing
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

to fuselage attachment area. The No.2

unload valve is located on the right
side of the fuselage also in the wing to
fuselage attachment area
•• No.1 unload valve supplies hydraulic
pressure to both inboard spoiler PCU
extend ports
•• No.2 unload valve supplies hydraulic
pressure to both outboard spoiler PCU
extend ports
•• No.2 unload valve energized closed by
the FCECU, which prevents extension
of the outboard spoilers when the
airspeed is above 170 kt.

2 3
D
FW
1

FW
D

4
LEGEND
1. Solenoid.
2. Electrical Conector.
5 3. Hydraulic Port Return.
4. Mounting Bracket.
5. Hydraulic Pressure Port.

Figure 27-25.  Spoiler Unload Valve

27-42 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Linear Variable Differential

Transformer (LVDT)
Refer to Figure 27-26. Spoiler LVDT.

The spoiler panel position LVDT provides data

to the FCECU.

The LVDT is attached to a bracket on the aft

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

face of the wing rear spar and a bracket on
the spoiler panel. The FCECU supplies the
excitation to the LVDT.

The FCECU uses the LVDT data to monitor

the serviceability of each actuator. The FCECU
also transmits the LVDT data to the Integrated
Flight Cabinet (IFC).

The IFC transmits this data to the:

•• Flight Data Recorder (FDR) and

•• Powered Flight Control Surface (PFCS)
indicator.

A A SPOILER LVDT ASSEMBLY

D
FW

1 Figure 27-26.  Spoiler LVDT

FW
D
2

LEGEND NOTE
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-43
1. Spoiler Attachment. Left inboard LVDT shown.
2. Rib Assembly Attachment. Other three similar.
3. Ground Strap.
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT

A
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FW
D

3
2 LEGEND
1. Anchor Bracket.
2. Micro Switches.
1 4 3. Fitting.
4. Roller Arm.
5. Spoiler Cables.
6. Tension Spring.

fss77a01.cgm

Figure 27-27.  Spoiler Cables Sensor

27-44 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Spoiler Cables Sensor NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-27. Spoiler Cables Sensor.

The spoiler cable sensor is located on the

fuselage spoiler cable circuit under the flight
deck floor. The spoiler cable sensor assembly
consists of a spring-loaded fair lead roller arm
latching a leaf spring and two micro switches.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

If the spoiler cable fails, the spring-loaded arm
rotates against its end stop and actuates the
two micro switches. The No.1 and No.2 unload
valves are then energized. Extend pressure
is removed from the actuators. The retract
pressure will keep spoilers closed. “ROLL
SPLR INBD HYD” and “ROLL SPLR OUTBD
HYD” caution lights will then illuminate.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-45

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Controls and Indications

Refer to Figure 27-28. Powered Flight Control
Surface Indicator.

The spoiler surface positions are displayed on

the PSA1 on the pilot MFD (MFD1).

The indications are LO, LI, RI, and RO

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

corresponding to left outboard, left inboard,

right inboard and right outboard respectively.
The indication is analog and displays panel
deflection angle.

LEGEND
WX OFF FMS1 076 1. Spoiler Position Indication
057 00
HDG 073° 35.0 NM
3 E --:--

160
VIE
VCF

YSO
00

--- 80 YCF
TAS 20 TCAS
GS 0 STBY

ADF1 ADF2
1 DME1 H 92.1 NM DME2 92.1 NM 1

I I

Figure 27-28.  Powered Flight Control Surface Indicator

27-46 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to:
•• Figure 27-29. P
 owered Flight Surface
Shutoffs.
• Figure 27-30. Spoiler Switchlights.

A PCU linkage jam will cause the clutch unit to

close a microswitch resulting in the inboard or
outboard spoiler switchlights (SPLR1 or SPLR

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

2) PUSH OFF lights to come on.

LEGEND
1. Spoiler 1 Push Off Switchlight.
2. Spoiler 2 Push Off Switchlight.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1 2

POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS

IAS

HSI
SEL

fs285a01.cgm A

Figure 27-29.  Powered Flight Surface Shutoffs

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-47

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LW IB SPLR CLUTCH
JAM MICRO SW S7 CLOSED
SPLR 1
RW IB SPLR CLUTCH
JAM MICRO SW S8 CLOSED CDS MSG: N/A NOT LATCHED PUSH

SPLR DECLUTCH
MICRO SW S3 CLOSED
(ROLL DISC)

AILERON DECLUTCH
MICRO SW S5 CLOSED
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

(50°)

RW OB SPLR CLUTCH
JAM MICRO SW S6 CLOSED
SPLR 2
LW OB SPLR CLUTCH
JAM MICRO SW S5 CLOSED CDS MSG: N/A NOT LATCHED PUSH

SPLR DECLUTCH
MICRO SW S4 CLOSED
(ROLL DISC)

AILERON DECLUTCH
MICRO SW S5 CLOSED NOTES
(50°) LATCHED - Light will remain illuminated for duration of flight.
Will not be reset until fault condition is no longer present

NOT LATCHED - Light will extinguish when fault condition is

no longer present regardless of phase of flight.

Figure 27-30.  Spoiler Switchlights

2 3 1

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

LEGEND
1. Spoiler Outboard.
2. Roll Spoiler Inboard Hydraulic.
3. Roll Spoiler Outboard Hydraulic.

fsz05a01.cgm

Figure 27-31.  Roll Spoiler Caution Lights

27-48 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-31. Roll Spoiler Caution NOTES

Lights.

The FCECU sends signals to the Caution

and Warning panel to turn on the following
caution lights:

SPLR OUTBD

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• If the FCECU fails to lockout the
outboard spoilers and airspeed is > 185
knots, or
•• If the FCECU locks out the outboard
spoilers and airspeed is < 150 knots, or
•• Airspeed No.1 disagrees with airspeed
No.2 by 17 knots
• Internal FCECU fault.

ROLL SPLR INBD HYD

•• No.1 Hydraulic system pressure is
< 900 psi (6205 kPa).
• Roll SPLR cable break

ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD

• • No.2 hydraulic system pressure is
< 900 psi (6205 kPa) and air speed
< 165 knots
•• Roll SPLR cable break

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-49

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEFT I/B
SPOILER
ACTUATOR
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

RETRACT

SPLR #1 EXTEND
PUSH
OFF
LIFT DUMP

LIFT DUMP
SOLENOID
VALVES

RESERVOIR
QTY

SPOILER
#1 HYD. ACTUATOR

SYSTEM
PRESSURE FCECU
ENERGIZED OPEN

ISOLATION LIFT DUMP

VALVE

UNLOAD EXTEND
VALVE
#1
RETRACT

RIGHT I/B
SPOILER
ACTUATOR

Figure 27-32.  Inboard Spoiler Hydraulic Schematic

27-50 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

ROLL SPOILER SYSTEM
Roll Spoiler Hydraulics
The following is an abbreviated description of
Figure 27-32. Inboard Spoiler Hydraulic
the maintenance practice and is intended for
Schematic.
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
In ground mode, the hydraulic pressure to the
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
lift dump ports of each PCU passes through lift

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

dump solenoid valves.
Disengage the roll disconnect mechanism.
The valves are hydraulically in series, two for the
Engage the aileron gust lock.
inboard PCUs and two for the outboard PCUs.
Turn the pilots control wheel fully to the left
Hydraulic Failure then to right.
If the No.1 hydraulic system fails, the ROLL
SPLR INBD HYD caution light illuminates. This operational check is to confirm that
the spoilers, the PFCS indications and the
If the No.2 hydraulic system fails, and the caution lights operate correctly under the
airspeed is < 170 KIAS, the ROLL SPLR following conditions:
OUTBD HYD caution light illuminates.
•• Normal operation
In the event of the hydraulic failure, the spoiler •• SPLR 1 Selected off
panels go down. They will be driven down by
the airflow moving across the wing. • SPLR 2 Selected off.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-51

27-52 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

SPOILER OB POS LT EXC HI 97 1 SPOILER OB POS LT EXC HI

SPOILER OB POS LT EXC LO 98 2 SPOILER OB POS LT EXC LO
ROLL
DISCONNECT
DISCONECT
NOTE HANDLE

DASH 8 Q400
SPOI LER OB POS LT HI 90 5 SPOI LER OB POS LT HI H1 Powered By Number 1 Hydraulic System.
SPOILER OB POS LT CT 89 4 SPOILER OB POS LT CT H2 Powered By Number 2 Hydraulic System. E
SPOILER OB POS LT LO 96 3 SPOILER OB POS LT LO
TO AILERON
CONTROLS
LEFT SPOILER OUTBOARD
A POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS
B
LINEAR VARIABLE SPLR 1 SPLR 2 ROLL
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSDUCER (LVDT) PUSH PUSH
DISCONNECT
OFF OFF
MECHANISM
ROLL SPLR O/B 42
SPOILER QUADRANT
GND CAUTION LT TENSION REGULATOR
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

SPOILER CLUTCH
FROM FROM
SPOILER SPLITTER
SPOILER OB POS RT EXC HI 100 1 SPOILER OB POS RT EXC HI SPOILER CLUTCH SPOILER CLUTCH
QUADRANT
SPOILER OB POS RT EXC LO 93 2 SPOILER OB POS RT EXC LO
ASYMMETRIC
LINKAGE
C

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPOILER OB POS RT HI 92 5 SPOILER OB POS RT HI
SPOILER OB POS RT CT 91 4 SPOILER OB POS RT CT
SPOILER OB POS RT LO 99 3 SPOILER OB POS RT LO

P/J2 RIGHT SPOILER OUTBOARD

LINEAR VARIABLE D

H 2

H 2
H1

H1
1 52 SPLR O/B INHIB CAUTION
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSDUCER (LVDT)
TO SPLR TO SPLR
PUSHOFF PUSHOFF
2 53 ROLL SPLR O/B CAUTION SWITCH SWITCH

SPOILER
3 69 ROLL SPLR O/B INHIBIT PCU
LH. OUTBD. SPOILER LH. INBD. SPOILER RH. INBD. SPOILER RH. OUTBD. SPOILER

4 70 SPLR O/B PRESS

SPOILER IB POS LT EXC HI 97 1 SPOILER IB POS LT EXC HI

FROM SHEET 1
SPOILER IB POS LT EXC LO 98 2 SPOILER IB POS LT EXC LO

SPOI LER I B POS L T HI 90 5 SPOI LER I B POS L T HI

SPOILER IB POS LT CT 89 4 SPOILER IB POS LT CT
SPOILER IB POS LT LO 96 3 SPOILER IB POS LT LO

LEFT SPOILER INBOARD

LINEAR VARIABLE
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSDUCER (LVDT)

ROLL SPLR I/B 42

GND CAUTION LT

SPOILER IB POS RT EXC HI 100 1 SPOILER IB POS RT EXC HI

SPOILER IB POS RT EXC LO 93 2 SPOILER IB POS RT EXC LO

26 ROLL SPLR O/B (GND)

SPOILER IB POS RT HI 92
9 5 SPOILER IB POS RT HI
49 ROLL SPLR I/B (GND)
SPOILER IB POS RT CT 91 4 SPOILER IB POS RT CT
SPOILER IB POS RT LO 99 3 SPOILER IB POS RT LO
CAUTION AND
RIGHT SPOILER INBOARD WARNING PANEL
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) LINEAR VARIABLE
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) DIFFERENTIAL TRANSDUCER (LVDT)

Figure 27-33.  Spoiler Panel Indications - Spoiler System Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to: NOTES

•• Figure 27-33. S
 poiler Panel
Indications - Spoiler
System Schematic.
•• Figure 27-34. R
 oll Spoilers Operation
> 170 KIAS.
•• Figure 27-35. L
 eft Wing Inboard

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Spoiler Jam Indicated.

Flight Mode
Above 170 KIAS, the outboard spoilers are
disabled by energizing the No.2 actuator unload
valve.

Power for the valve comes from the right

essential bus to Pin A on the valve.

The ground to Pin B of the valve is supplied

through the FCECU.

Roll Spoiler Jam

The “Pilot Flying” (PF) attempts to put in a roll
command. One of the main control valve inputs
is jammed, resulting in an increase in the force
needed to move the control wheel.

The clutch controlling the input to the jammed

control valve slips and SPLR 1 or SPLR 2
switchlight illuminates.

Power is always supplied to the inboard spoiler

switchlight from the right essential bus.

The ground for the switchlight is from the left

wing spoiler jam switch S7.

Pushing the switchlight provides a ground for

the inboard actuator unload valve removing
extend hydraulic pressure.

The PUSH goes off in the switchlight OFF,

remains on.

The ROLL SPLR INBD HYD caution light

illuminates through a ground provided by the
No.1 flight spoiler low pressure switch.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-53

27-54 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

A
L O/B

A
S5 ON
S11 B

DASH 8 Q400
S4
C
C S10 PUSH
B A A C
L I/B
OFF
G
ROLL DISC HANDLE CABLE SENSORS
S7
X-54 F
LEFT WING A A
E A D
SPOILER JAM
C OFF
U/F FLT
E
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

COMP H2
#1 O/B PUSH OFF 1 H3
H1
NC
C P/J10 C 1 ROLL SPOILER J2 A
A D S3 DISC JAM SW J3 P B
B J1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NO
E 2 ROLL SPOILER K2 INBOARD (#1)
S5 S4 DISC JAM SW K3 UNLOAD VALVE
K1
ROLL SPOILER
DE-CLUTCH SWITCH #2 I/B PUSH OFF 2 L2
AILERON QUADRANT L3
SWITCH L1
( CO-PILOT HANDWHEEL >50 º )
SPLR1 (INBD) B
ACU

(F6) N
ROLL SPLRS
ARM INBD
5A 1
S6 ON
R ESS BUS PUSH 2
28 VDC A A TO SHEET 2
B C
(H6)
ROLL SPLRS FROM FCECU ROLL
IND G 3
OFF SPOILER OUTBD
5A
F
4
R A A A D
OFF
RIGHT DC CBP
TAXI SWITCH
H2
R I/B H3
X ADVSY LTS 28 VDC H1
K1
S8 J2
B3 T J3 D B
D B2 J1 A
F B1
D
R O/B GND E A3 K2
K3 U OUTBOARD (#2)
A2
A1 K1 UNLOAD VALVE
#2 FLIGHT SPOILER
S6 LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
X2 L2
RIGHT WING X1 L3 W
SPOILER JAM L1

SPLR2 (OUTBD)
S
(G6) ROLL SPLRS GND E V 8
D 9
ARM OUTBD CENTER GLARESHIELD PANEL
R ESS BUS 24
5A
28 VDC
#1 FLIGHT SPOILER CAUTION AND
RIGHT DC CBP LOW PRESSURE SWITCH WARNING PANEL

Figure 27-34.  Roll Spoilers Operation > 170 KIAS

 A
L O/B

A
S5 ON
S11 B
S4

DASH 8 Q400
C
C S10 PUSH
B A A C
L I/B
OFF
G
ROLL DISC HANDLE CABLE SENSORS
S7
X-54 F
LEFT WING A A
E A D
SPOILER JAM
C OFF
U/F FLT
E COMP H2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

#1 O/B PUSH OFF 1 H3

H1
NC J/P10
C J/P9 C 1 ROLL SPOILER J2 A
A D S3 DISC JAM SW J3 P B
B J1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NO
E 2 ROLL SPOILER K2 INBOARD (#1)
S5 S4 DISC JAM SW K3 UNLOAD VALVE
K1
ROLL SPOILER
DE-CLUTCH SWITCH #2 I/B PUSH OFF 2 L2
AILERON QUADRANT L3
SWITCH L1
( CO-PILOT HANDWHEEL >50 º )
SPLR1 (INBD) B
ACU

(F6) N
ROLL SPLRS
ARM INBD
5A 1
S6 ON
R ESS BUS PUSH 2
28 VDC A A
B C TO SHEET 2
(H6)
ROLL SPLRS
IND G 3
OFF
5A
F
4
R A A A D
OFF
RIGHT DC CBP
TAXI SWITCH
H2
R I/B H3
X ADVSY LTS 28 VDC H1
K1
S8 J2
J/P34 B3 T J3 D B
D B2 J1 A
F B1
D
R O/B GND E A3 K2
K3 U OUTBOARD (#2)
A2
A1 K1 UNLOAD VALVE
#2 FLIGHT SPOILER
S6 LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
X2 L2
RIGHT WING X1 L3 W
SPOILER JAM L1

SPLR2 (OUTBD)
S
(G6) ROLL SPLRS GND E V 8
D 9
ARM OUTBD CENTER GLARESHIELD PANEL
R ESS BUS 24
5A
28 VDC
#1 FLIGHT SPOILER CAUTION AND
RIGHT DC CBP LOW PRESSURE SWITCH WARNING PANEL
27-55

Figure 27-35.  Left Wing Inboard Spoiler Jam Indicated

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-56 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

A
L O/B

A
S5 ON
S11 B
S4

DASH 8 Q400
C
C S10 PUSH
B A A C
L I/B
OFF
G
ROLL DISC HANDLE CABLE SENSORS
S7 F
X-54
LEFT WING A A
E A D
SPOILER JAM
C OFF
U/F FLT
E COMP H2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

#1 O/B PUSH OFF 1 H3

H1
NC
C J/P9 C 1 ROLL SPOILER J2 A
A D S3 DISC JAM SW J3 P B
B J1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NO
E 2 ROLL SPOILER K2 INBOARD (#1)
S5 S4 DISC JAM SW K3 UNLOAD VALVE
K1
ROLL SPOILER
DE-CLUTCH SWITCH #2 I/B PUSH OFF 2 L2
AILERON QUADRANT L3
SWITCH L1
( CO-PILOT HANDWHEEL >50 º )
SPLR 1 (INBD) B
ACU

(F6) N
ROLL SPLRS
ARM INBD
5A 1
S6 ON
R ESS BUS PUSH 2
28 VDC A A
B C TO SHEET 2
(H6)
ROLL SPLRS
IND G 3
OFF
5A
F
4
R A A A D
OFF
RIGHT DC CBP
TAXI SWITCH
H2
R I/B H3
X ADVSY LTS 28 VDC H1
K1
S8 J2
B3 T J3 D B
D B2 J1 A
F B1
D
R O/B GND E A3 K2
K3 U OUTBOARD (#2)
A2
A1 K1 UNLOAD VALVE
#2 FLIGHT SPOILER
S6 LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
X2 L2
RIGHT WING X1 L3 W
SPOILER JAM L1

SPLR 2 (OUTBD)
S
(G6) ROLL SPLRS GND E V 8
D 9
ARM OUTBD CENTER GLARESHIELD PANEL
R ESS BUS 24
5A
28 V DC
#1 FLIGHT SPOILER CAUTION AND
RIGHT DC CBP LOW PRESSURE SWITCH WARNING PANEL

Figure 27-36.  Left Wing Spoiler Jam Recovery Switchlight Pushed No.1 Unload Valve Energized to Unload
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE NOTES

SPOILER JAM DETECT SYSTEM
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Refer to Figure 27-36. Left Wing Spoiler Jam
Recovery Switchlight Pushed No.1 Unload
Valve Energized to Unload.

A mechanical clutch is incorporated at the spoiler

clutch assembly, in the outer wing rear spar
area of each wing. This clutch gives protection
against complete loss of spoiler systems in the
event of a jam. It removes the jammed spoiler
from the circuit and allows the rest of the system
to continue to operate. If a jam occurs, the roller
on the pushrod will come out of its detent in the
clutch assembly. This causes springs to push
the switch plates out and turn on the SPLR1 or
SPLR2 push-off switch. The SPLR1 push-off
switch when pushed will de-energize the inboard
spoiler hydraulic system. The SPLR2 push-off
when pushed will de-energize the outboard
spoiler hydraulic system.

•• Before testing the spoiler jam detection

make sure the spoilers operate normally.
To simulate a jammed spoiler a rig pin is
installed to one of the spoiler linkage lever to
prevent movement of that spoiler PCU. This will
be done to all four PCU clutches, one at a time.

NOTE
A force of approximately 12 lbf (6
kgf) is required to disengage the
spoiler clutch. When the spoiler clutch
is disengaged, the pilot and co-pilot
control wheels turn at their usual force
of approximately 4 lbf (2 kgf).

When the jam is detected it will cause a SPLR

push off light to come on. Selection of the
SPLR push off switch will cause the PUSH
segment of the light to go out and the ROLL
SPLR INBD HYD or the ROLL SPLR OUTBD
HYD caution light to come on.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-57

27-58 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

A
L O/B

A
S5 ON
S11 B

DASH 8 Q400
S4
C
C S10 PUSH
B A A C
L I/B
OFF
G
ROLL DISC HANDLE CABLE SENSORS
S7
X-54 F
LEFT WING A A
E A D
SPOILER JAM
C OFF
U/F FLT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

E COMP H2
#1 O/B PUSH OFF 1 H3
H1
NC
C J/P9 C 1 ROLL SPOILER J2 A
P/J9 A D S3 DISC JAM SW J3 P B

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

B J1
NO
E 2 ROLL SPOILER K2 INBOARD (#1)
S5 S4 DISC JAM SW K3 UNLOAD VALVE
K1
ROLL SPOILER
DE-CLUTCH SWITCH #2 I/B PUSH OFF 2 L2
AILERON QUADRANT L3
SWITCH L1
( CO-PILOT HANDWHEEL >50 º )
SPLR1 (INBD) B
ACU

(F6) ROLL SPLRS N

ARM INBD
5A 1
S6 ON
R ESS BUS PUSH 2
28 VDC A A
B C TO SHEET 2
(H6) ROLL SPLRS
IND G 3
OFF
5A
F
4
R A A A D
OFF
RIGHT DC CBP
TAXI SWITCH
H2
R I/B H3
X ADVSY LTS 28 VDC H1
K1
S8 J2
B3 T J3 D B
D B2 J1 A
F B1
D
R O/B GND E A3 K2
K3 U OUTBOARD (#2)
A2
A1 K1 UNLOAD VALVE
#2 FLIGHT SPOILER
S6 LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
X2 L2
RIGHT WING X1 L3 W
SPOILER JAM L1

SPLR2 (OUTBD)
S
(G6) ROLL SPLRS GND E V 8
D 9
ARM OUTBD CENTER GLARESHIELD PANEL
R ESS BUS 24
5A
28 VDC
#1 FLIGHT SPOILER CAUTION AND
RIGHT DC CBP LOW PRESSURE SWITCH WARNING PANEL

Figure 27-37.  Roll Spoiler Fuselage Cable Jam Indicated-Roll Disconnect System Activated-50 Degree Travel Switch Closed
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATIONAL CHECK OF THE Complete Roll Jam Using Roll

ROLL SPOILER SPLR 1 & SPLR Disconnect System
2 PUSH OFF SWITCHLIGHTS Pilot Flying (PF) attempts to put in a roll
command, but cannot move the control wheel.
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
PF pulls the roll disconnect handle, this
training purposes only. For a more detailed
operates the roll disconnect clutch separating
description of the practice, refer to the task in
roll spoiler and aileron controls.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
This action also causes two micro-switches (S3
Refer to Figure 27-37. Roll Spoiler Fuselage
and S4) to arm the 50° travel switch S5. The S5
Cable Jam Indicated-Roll Disconnect System
is on the aileron forward quadrant.
Activated-50 Degree Travel Switch Closed.
To correct the input from a stuck up roll spoiler(s),
•• Make sure that the CONTROL LOCK
the co-pilot turns the aileron control wheel 50°,
is set to OFF
this provides a ground through switch S5.
•• Pull the ROLL DISC handle and turn
90° to disconnect the roll spoilers The ground by S5 allows the PUSH OFF
indications in SPLR 1 and SPLR 2 switchlights
•• Turn the co-pilot handwheel until the
to illuminate.
SPLR 1 and SPLR 2 switchlights come
on (at approximately 50°)
•• Put the co-pilot handwheel back in the
neutral position
•• Make sure the two SPLR 1 and SPLR 2
switchlights go off
•• Turn the co-pilot handwheel in the
opposite direction, of step, until the
SPLR 1 and SPLR 2 switchlights come
on (at approximately 50°)
•• Put the co-pilot handwheel back in the
neutral position
• Make sure the two SPLR 1 and SPLR 2
switchlights go off.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-59

27-60 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FLT COMP

A
L O/B

A
S5 ON
S11 B
S4

DASH 8 Q400
C
C S10 PUSH
B A A C
L I/B
OFF
G
ROLL DISC HANDLE CABLE SENSOR
S7
X-54 F
LEFT WING A A
E A D
SPOILER JAM
C OFF
U/F FLT
E COMP H2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

#1 O/B PUSH OFF 1 H3

H1
NC
C C 1 ROLL SPOILER J2 A
A D S3 DISC JAM SW J3 P B
B J1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NO
E 2 ROLL SPOILER K2 INBOARD (#1)
S5 S4 DISC JAM SW K3 UNLOAD VALVE
K1
ROLL SPOILER
DE-CLUTCH SWITCH #2 I/B PUSH OFF 2 L2
AILERON QUADRANT L3
SWITCH L1
( CO-PILOT HANDWHEEL >50 º )
SPLR1 (INBD) B
ACU

(F6) ROLL SPLRS N

ARM INBD
5A 1
S6 ON
R ESS BUS PUSH 2
28 VDC A A
B C TO SHEET 2
(H6)
ROLL SPLRS
IND G 3
OFF
5A
F
4
R A A A D
OFF
RIGHT DC CBP
TAXI SWITCH
H2
P/J177 H3
R I/B
X ADVSY LTS 28 VDC H1
K1
S8 J2
B3 T J3 D B
D B2 J1 A
F B1
D
R O/B GND E A3 K2
K3 U OUTBOARD (#2)
A2
A1 K1 UNLOAD VALVE
#2 FLIGHT SPOILER
S6 LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
X2 L2
RIGHT WING X1 L3 W
SPOILER JAM L1

SPLR2 (OUTBD)
S
(G6) ROLL SPLRS GND E V 8
D 9
ARM OUTBD CENTER GLARESHIELD PANEL
R ESS BUS 24
5A
28 VDC
#1 FLIGHT SPOILER CAUTION AND
RIGHT DC CBP LOW PRESSURE SWITCH WARNING PANEL

Figure 27-38.  Roll Spoiler Fuselage Cable Jammed-Roll Disconnect Activated 50° Travel Switch Closed-Both
Switchlights Pushed-Both Unload Valves Energized to Unload
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATIONAL CHECK OF Refer to Figure 27-38. Roll Spoiler Fuselage

Cable Jammed-Roll Disconnect Activated 50°
THE ROLL SPOILER CABLE Travel Switch Closed-Both Switchlights Pushed-
SENSOR ASSEMBLY Both Unload Valves Energized to Unload.
The following is an abbreviated description of
Using this schematic, you can trace the
the maintenance practice and is intended for
following steps:
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
•• Roll Disconnect Activated 50° Travel

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
Switch Closed
This maintenance procedure is for the operational •• Both Switchlights Pushed
check of the roll-spoiler cable sensor.
• Both Unload Valves Energized to Unload
Slowly pushing down on the top and bottom
Pushing SPLR 1 switchlight, energizes closed
spoiler cables will allow the roller arm to turn
the inboard unload valve providing a ground
clockwise until the microswitches close.
through contacts J3 to J1 of the switchlight.
In the flight compartment, make sure that the
Pushing SPLR 2 switchlight provides a ground
ROLL SPLR INBD HYD and the ROLL SPLR
for outboard unload valve through contacts, A2
OUTBD HYD caution lights come on.
to A3 of the de-energized relay K1, as well as
contacts J3 to J1 of the switchlight.
Release the cables and let them push up on the
roller. Make sure that the roller arm stays in
Grounds are maintained for the OFF
the latched condition and that the ROLL SPLR
indications and removed for the PUSH
INBD HYD and the ROLL SPLR OUTBD
indications in the switchlights.
HYD caution lights stay on.
Removing all extend pressure from the spoiler
Release the roller arm from its latched
PCUs causes all the roll spoilers to retract.
condition and make sure that the ROLL SPLR
INBD HYD and the ROLL SPLR OUTBD
HYD caution lights go out.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-61

27-62 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

A
L O/B

A
S5 ON
S11 B
S4

DASH 8 Q400
C
C S10 PUSH
B A A C
L I/B
OFF
G
ROLL DISC HANDLE CABLE SENSORS
S7
X-54 F
LEFT WING
E A A A D
SPOILER JAM
C OFF
U/F FLT
E COMP H2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

#1 O/B PUSH OFF 1 H3

H1
NC
C C 1 ROLL SPOILER J2 A
A D S3 DISC JAM SW J3 P B
B J1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NO
E 2 ROLL SPOILER K2 INBOARD (#1)
S5 S4 DISC JAM SW K3 UNLOAD VALVE
K1
ROLL SPOILER
DE-CLUTCH SWITCH #2 I/B PUSH OFF 2 L2
AILERON QUADRANT L3
SWITCH L1
( CO-PILOT HANDWHEEL >50 º )
SPLR1 (INBD) B
ACU

(F6) ROLL SPLRS N

ARM INBD
5A 1
S6 ON
R ESS BUS PUSH 2
28 VDC A A
B C TO SHEET 2
(H6)
ROLL SPLRS
IND G 3
OFF
5A
F
4
R A A A D
OFF
RIGHT DC CBP
TAXI SWITCH
H2
R I/B H3
X ADVSY LTS 28 VDC H1
K1
S8 J2
B3 T J3 D B
D B2 J1 A
F B1
D
R O/B GND E A3 K2
K3 U OUTBOARD (#2)
A2
A1 K1 UNLOAD VALVE
#2 FLIGHT SPOILER
S6 LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
X2 L2
RIGHT WING X1 L3 W
SPOILER JAM L1

SPLR2 (OUTBD)
S
(G6) ROLL SPLRS GND E V 8
D 9
ARM OUTBD CENTER GLARESHIELD PANEL
R ESS BUS 24
5A
28 VDC
#1 FLIGHT SPOILER CAUTION AND
RIGHT DC CBP LOW PRESSURE SWITCH WARNING PANEL

Figure 27-39.  Roll Spoiler Cable Sensor Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Roll Spoiler Cable Break NOTES

(Operating Cable Sensor System)
Refer Figure 27-39. Roll Spoiler Cable Sensor
Operation.

The PF puts in a roll command and the roll

spoiler cable breaks.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The lever of the sensor system pivots forward
under spring force. This action closes micro-
switch S10, which provides a ground to
energize the K1 relay.

The K1 relay, through contacts A2 to A1,

supplies the ground to energize the outboard
unload valve, removing all extend pressure
from the outboard PCUs.

Switch S11 closes at the same time as S10.

S10 provides the ground for the inboard unload
valve through Pin B.

The ROLL SPLR INBD HYD and the ROLL

SPOILER OUTBD HYD caution lights come
on through grounds provided by No.1 and No.2
Spoiler Low pressure switches.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-63

27-64 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PLA 1 PLA 2
47° 47°

DASH 8 Q400
LIFT
DUMP PCU
VALVE SPLR LVDT
2 RIGHT
OUTBD
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ADVISORY
LIGHTS
ROLL OUT BD
ROLL IN BD

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPLR
LIFT RIGHT
INBD LVDT
DUMP PCU
VALVE
1

28 VDC
FCECU #2 HYD

LIFT
DUMP PCU
VALVE SPLR
LVDT
1 LEFT
INBD

FLIGHT/TAXI
SWITCH

SPLR
LIFT LEFT
DUMP OUTBD LVDT
PCU
VALVE
GROUND
2

PSEU
WOW 1
HYDRAULIC
#1 HYD
WOW 2

ELECTRICAL

fsu67a01.cgm

Figure 27-40.  Ground Spoiler System Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-62-00 SPOILER NOTES

SYSTEM IN GROUND
MODE
INTRODUCTION
All the roll spoilers are automatically deployed

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

on landing. They are deployed when signalled
by the Main Gear Weight-On-Wheels
(MGWOW) and power lever sensors are made.

This action puts all the aircraft weight on the

landing gear, so the wheel brakes can slow the
aircraft with greater efficiently.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-40. Ground Spoiler System
Block Diagram.

The roll spoiler system automatically changes

from the flight mode to the ground mode after
the aircraft has landed.

Ground mode operation occurs when:

•• The Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit

(PSEU) sends the MGWOW1 and
MGWOW2 signals to the FCECU
•• Power levers 1 and 2 are set to less
than 47°
• The FLIGHT/TAXI switch is in the
FLIGHT position.

The ground mode spoiler system includes the

listed components:

• Lift dump valves.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-65

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

NOTE
GLARESHIELD PANEL Left side shown.
A
Right side similar.
1

LEGEND STICK PUSHER

SPOILERS SHUT OFF
1. Flight/Taxi Switch.
FLIGHT
ENGINE FIRE
A/P
ROLL INBD DISENG

TAXI INHIBIT

ELEVATOR TRIM TERRAIN

CF-AEI SHUT OFF INHIBIT

WARNING
PRESS TO RESET

fsz09a02.cgm A

Figure 27-41.  Flight/Taxi Switch

27-66 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-41. Flight/Taxi Switch. NOTES

Selection of the SPOILERS FLIGHT/TAXI
switch to TAXI de-energizes all the lift dump
solenoids causing spoiler panels to retract.
The switch is held in the TAXI position by a
magnetic latch solenoid.

The magnetic latch is provided by the FCECU

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

and PSEU WOW. The spring loaded switch
returns to the FLIGHT position when:

•• Advancing either power lever above

flight idle +12°
•• Removing electrical power from the
aircraft
• PSEU sensing WOFW.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-67

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPOILER
ADVISORY
LIGHTS
FLIGHT
ROLL OUTBD

ROLL INBD
TAXI

FROM FROM
No. 1 FLIGHT IDLE + 12° No. 2
HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM SYSTEM
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FCECU
LIFT DUMP LIFT DUMP
VALVES AND AND VALVES
OPEN OPEN
PSEU

MLG WOW

LH OUTBOARD LH INBOARD RH INBOARD RH OUTBOARD

SPOILER SPOILER SPOILER SPOILER

SPOILERS EXTENDED - LIFT DUMP VALVES OPEN

FROM No. 1 FLIGHT

ROLL OUTBD FROM No. 2
HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM SYSTEM
SPOILER ROLL INBD
TAXI
ADVISORY
LIGHTS

LIFT DUMP FCECU LIFT DUMP

VALVES VALVES
CLOSED CLOSED

PSEU

LH OUTBOARD LH INBOARD RH INBOARD RH OUTBOARD

SPOILER SPOILER SPOILER SPOILER

fsf29a02a.cgm
SPOILERS RETRACTED - LIFT DUMP VALVES CLOSED

Figure 27-42.  Roll Spoiler Ground Spoiler Mode Synoptic

27-68 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

System Description NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-42. Roll Spoiler Ground
Spoiler Mode Synoptic.

When the aircraft lands, the lift dump valves are

energized. The lift dump valves send hydraulic
pressure to all the spoiler PCU extend ports
which extends the spoiler panels to 75°.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The FCECU and the PSEU control the lift
dump function. The FCECU left channel
controls the two inboard lift dump valves and
the right channel controls the two outboard lift
dump valves.

Each pair of lift dump valves are solenoid

operated and connected hydraulically in series.

The FCECU sends a high side signal (+28

VDC) to the lift dump valve solenoids if both
power levers are a less than flight idle plus 12°.

The PSEU sends a low side signal (ground)

to the lift dump valve solenoids when both
MGWOW1 and MGWOW2 signals are present.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-69

27-70 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

J5 P1 J1 J1 P1
PLA LEFT
N 26 26
LEFT
FCECU 16 16
J3
CHANNEL

49 ROLL SPLR INBD GND 42 42

LIFT DUMP HI A SPOILER

DASH 8 Q400
CAUTION 66 66 INBOARD
LIFT DUMP LO B
WARNING J5 VI
64 64 94 94
PANEL ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND
26
P2 J2 J2 P2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

LIFT DUMP HI A SPOILER

FROM ROLL SPLRS IND
54 54 OUTBOARD
LIFT DUMP LO B
J2 J1 42 42 VI

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ROLL INBD J1
ADVISORY
13 LIGHTS 13 C1D
ROLL OUTBD CONTROL
14 DIM/TEST 14 64 64 C1C
RIGHT PROXIMITY
UNIT WOW 1
GLARESHIELD FCECU A6G SENSOR
PANEL CHANNEL ELECTRONIC
16 16 WOW 2 UNIT
J8 C1B
PLA RIGHT
N 26 26 A6?

A4?

FLIGHT/TAXI TAXI SW RTN

79 79

TAXI SW
78 78
LIFT DUMP HI SPOILER
94 94 A OUTBOARD
TAXI SW HOLD LIFT DUMP LO
87 87 B V2

GLARESHIELD
PANEL LIFT DUMP HI SPOILER
A INBOARD
FROM FCECU 2 PWR IN LIFT DUMP LO
B V2

Figure 27-43.  Roll Spoiler in Ground Mode Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-43. Roll Spoiler in Ground NOTES

Mode Schematic.

The FLIGHT/TAXI switch interfaces with the

right channel of the FCECU and is shared with
the left channel for redundancy.

When the FLIGHT/TAXI switch is selected to

the TAXI position, the spoiler lift dump valves

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

de-energize and the spoilers retract.

After retraction plus 6.5 seconds, the FCECU

performs a Event-Built-in-Test (EBIT).
It energizes each lift dump valve solenoid
individually to check if any valve is stuck in
the open position.

When all four spoiler panels are extended greater

than 65° in the ground mode, the FCECU sends
a signal to illuminate the spoiler advisory lights
(ROLL OUTBD and ROLL INBD).

If a solenoid valve fails to energize, the inboard

or outboard ground spoilers will not extend.

The FCECU illuminates the caution lights

ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND and ROLL SPLR
INBD GND if the related spoiler panels do not
extend after touchdown.

These caution lights illuminate after a time

delay of 5 seconds. The FCECU illuminates
the ground caution lights if the spoilers do not
retract in the TAXI mode or if the BIT finds a
failure in the lift dump valves.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-71

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Both valves must open to let extend pressure

through the unload valve to the related spoiler
Lift Dump Valves PCU. This reduces the possibility of in flight
symmetric deployment.
Refer to Figure 27-44. Spoiler Lift Dump Valve.
The lift dump valves provide hydraulic system
The two lift dump valves for the inboard pressure to the spoiler PCU lift dump port and
(No.1) spoiler system are located on the left fully extend each spoiler panel symmetrically.
side of the aircraft in the wing-to-fuselage
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

attachment area. The two lift dump valves for

the outboard (No.2) spoiler system are located
on the right side of the aircraft also in the
wing-to-fuselage attachment area.

LEGEND
1. Electrical Connector.
2. Solenoid.
3. Return Port.
4. Pressure Port.
5. Check Valve. 2
6. Cylinder Port.

D
FW 4
5

ft087a01.cgm

Figure 27-44.  Spoiler Lift Dump Valve

27-72 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

Refer to Figure 27-45. Spoiler Surface Indication.

The spoiler surface positions are displayed on

the PFCS on MFD1. The indication displays
panel deflection angle.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

INSTRUMENT PANEL

LEGEND
WX OFF FMS1 076 1. Spoiler Position Indication
057 00
HDG 073° 35.0 NM
3 E --:--

160
VIE
VCF

YSO
00

--- 80 YCF
TAS 20 TCAS
GS 0 STBY

ADF1 ADF2
1 DME1 H 92.1 NM DME2 92.1 NM 1

I I

Figure 27-45.  Spoiler Surface Indication

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-73

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

LEGEND
1. Spoiler Outboard.
2. Roll Spoiler Inboard Ground.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

2 1

#1 STALL
SYST FAIL

#2 STALL
SYST FAIL

ROLL SPLR PUSHER PARKING

INBD HYD SYST FAIL BRAKE

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

#2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

NOSE FUELING
STEERING ON

MAIN BAT
HOT

fsz05a01.cgm

Figure 27-46.  Roll Spoiler in Ground Mode Caution Lights

27-74 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-46. Roll Spoiler in Ground OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

Mode Caution Lights.
GROUND SPOILER SYSTEM
The FCECU sends signals to the Caution and
The following is an abbreviated description of
Warning panel to illuminate the caution lights
the maintenance practice and is intended for
that follow:
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
ROLL SPLR INBD GND the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• If the FCECU senses a loss of lift dump
This operational test is to confirm that the
valve function, or
FLIGHT/TAXI switch, when in the TAXI
•• If the lift dump valves are operated but position, will return to the FLIGHT position
the spoiler panels fail to extend after when power lever 1 and/or power lever 2 is
landing, or moved to greater than the flight idle position
of +12°.
•• If the spoiler panels extend when the
FCECU carries out the lift dump BIT, with
When the FLIGHT/TAXI switch is in TAXI
the FLIGHT/TAXI switch set to TAXI
position, observe the following indications:
•• PLAs disagree, one > 47°, one < 47°,
WOW disagree •• The PFCS spoiler indications show all
the spoilers retracted
• Internal failure of the FCECU.
•• The spoilers are retracted
ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND •• The ROLL INBD and ROLL OUTBD
advisory lights go out
•• If the FCECU senses a loss of lift dump
valve function, or • The ROLL SPLR INBD GND and
ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND caution
•• If the lift dump valves are operated but lights do not come on.
the spoiler panels fail to extend after
landing, or When the FLIGHT/TAXI switch returns
•• If the spoiler panels extend when the to FLIGHT that you observe the following
FCECU carries out the lift dump BIT, indications:
with the FLIGHT/TAXI switch set to
•• The PFCS spoiler indications show all
TAXI
the spoilers extended
•• PLAs disagree, one > 47°, one < 47°,
•• The spoilers are extended
•• WOW disagree
•• The ROLL INBD and ROLL OUTBD
• Internal Failure of the FCECU. advisory lights come on
•• The ROLL SPLR INBD GND and
ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND caution
lights do not come on

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-75

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-63-00 SPOILER The PCUs that are attached to the inboard

panels are supplied with hydraulic pressure
PANELS from the No.1 hydraulic system.

Refer to Figure 27-47. Inboard and Outboard The PCUs that are attached to the outboard
Spoiler Panels. panels are supplied by the No.2 hydraulic system.

All spoilers are flush mounted on the upper

surface of the flap shroud, behind the wing
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

rear spar.

A spoiler actuator link connects the middle hinge

attachment to the actuator on the spoiler PCU.

The spoiler panels are flush with the wing top

skin when retracted and extend upwards up to
a maximum of 75° when operated.

2
1

LEGEND 6
1. Inboard Hinge Attachment.
2. Inboard Spoiler Panel.
5
3. Spoiler Actuator Link.
4. Middle Hinge Attachment.
5. Outboard Hinge Attachment.
6. Outboard Spoiler Panel.
D
FW
NOTE
Left side shown.
Right side similar.

fs0c2a01.cgm

Figure 27-47.  Inboard and Outboard Spoiler Panels

27-76 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-16-00 ROLL GENERAL

DISCONNECT SYSTEM Refer to Figure 27-48. Roll Disconnect System.

INTRODUCTION When disconnected, the pilot control handwheel

operates the spoiler control circuit and the
The roll disconnect system disengages the co-pilot control handwheel operates the aileron
aileron and roll spoiler control circuits from control circuit. When connected, the control
each other in the event of a jam in either connected handwheels operate both circuits at

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

control circuit. The remaining operational the same time.
circuit maintains roll control of the aircraft.
The roll disconnect system has the following
components:

•• Roll disconnect handle

•• Roll disconnect lever assembly
• Roll disconnect clutch mechanism.

2
1

FW
D
3

LEGEND

1. Roll Control Disconnect Handle.

2. Co-pilot's Control Column.
3. Cables.
4. Spring And Lever Assembly.
5. Roll Spoiler De-Clutch Micro-Switch.
7 4
6. Clutch Mechanism.
6
7. Lever Assembly Roll Disconnect. 5

ft175a01.cgm

Figure 27-48.  Roll Disconnect System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-77

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The roll disconnect mechanism is re-engaged

when the pilots and co-pilot handwheels are
Roll Disconnect Handle moved to the same position, and the roll
disconnect handle is rotated 90° and released.
Refer to Figure 27-49. Roll Disconnect Handle. The spring on the clutch mechanism pulls the
handle back to the engaged position.
The roll disconnect handle is used to operate
the roll disconnect system. The handle pulls out 2 inches (5 cm) maximum
from the center console.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The roll disconnect handle is normally in the

engaged position. The handle is connected to
a clutch mechanism at the base of the co-pilot
control column by cables, pulleys, and a spring-
loaded lever assembly.

The roll disconnect mechanism is disengaged

when the roll disconnect handle is pulled to the
stop and rotated by 90°. When the handle is
pulled out to the limit and rotated 90°, the pin
slides into the slot of the handle shaft to keep
the handle locked in the disengaged position.

ROLL
ROLL DISC

ENGAGED

DISC

DISENGAGED

FW
D

CENTER CONSOLE

Figure 27-49.  Roll Disconnect Handle

27-78 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Roll Disconnect Lever Assembly At the same time, the rotating lever assembly
closes two microswitches which are a part of
Refer to: the roll spoiler advisory light circuit (refer
to 27-60-00).
•• Figure 27-48. Roll Disconnect System.
A return spring attached to the lever assembly
• Figure 27-50. R
 oll Disconnect Lever keeps the tension off the cable joining the
Assembly. lever assembly to the clutch mechanism.
This prevents the clutch from accidentally

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The roll disconnect lever assembly is used to disengaging and helps to return the roll
gain mechanical advantage over the clutch disconnect handle to the engaged position.
mechanism. The roll disconnect lever assembly
is located below the flight compartment floor
near the base of the co-pilot control column.
The lever assembly is attached by a cable
to the roll disconnect handle. Another cable
attaches the lever to the engagement spring
cover of the clutch mechanism.

When the roll disconnect handle is pulled,

the lever assembly rotates and pulls the
engagement spring cover, which causes the
clutch to disengage.

LEGEND 3

1. Clutch Cable Plate.

2. Pivot Point.
3. Lever.
4. Rig Pin Index Hole.
5. Spring.
6. Microswitches.

FW
D

4
6

Figure 27-50.  Roll Disconnect Lever Assembly

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-79

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Roll Disconnect Clutch When clutch is engaged the chain in the

co-pilot control column rotates the sprocket
Mechanism and clutch which drives the clutch plate and
Refer to Figure 27-51. Roll Disconnect Clutch lever. The lever part of the clutch plate and
Mechanism. lever assembly is attached to the pilot’s control
column through the interconnect rod.
The roll disconnect clutch mechanism disconnects
the roll control of the co-pilot handwheel from When the roll disconnect handle is pulled
the roll control of the pilot handwheel. and turned 90°, the clutch plate and lever is
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

separated from the clutch and sprocket. The

The roll disconnect clutch mechanism is attached engagement spring keeps the clutch in the
to the base of the co-pilot control column. engaged position.

The roll disconnect clutch mechanism consists of

an engagement spring, engagement spring cover
and a clutch.

The clutch is made up of two halves:

•• Clutch and sprocket assembly

• Clutch plate and lever assembly.

FW
D
1
FW
D
2

CO-PILOT CONTROL COLUMN

LEGEND

1. Co-pilot Control Column Attachment. 4

2. Roll Disconnect Clutch Housing.
3. Clutch Mechanism Shaft.
4. Roll Control Lever.

ft027a01.cgm

Figure 27-51.  Roll Disconnect Clutch Mechanism

27-80 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Interfaces When the roll disconnect microswitch and

either side of the 50° switches is activated, the
Refer to: SPLR1 and SPLR2 PUSH OFF switchlights
come on. Pushing the switchlights depressurizes
•• Figure 27-52. Aileron Forward Quadrant
the spoiler PCU causing the associated spoiler
Microswitch (50°).
panels to retract flush with the wing surface.
• Figure 27-53. Spoiler Pushoff
Switchlights. This will cause the caution lights to illuminate:

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The roll disconnect system is interfaced with •• ROLL SPLR INBD HYD
the roll spoiler advisory switchlights (SPLR1
• ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD.
and SPLR2).

The SPLR1 and SPLR2 switchlights are located

on the center glareshield panel. When the roll
disconnect handle is pulled, two microswitches
are closed by the roll disconnect lever assembly.

When the co-pilot control handwheel is rotated

more than 50°, the aileron quadrant closes the
50° travel microswitch. This microswitch is
located on the aileron forward quadrant.

AILERON FORWARD QUADRANT

FWD

fs174a01.cgm

Figure 27-52.  Aileron Forward Quadrant Microswitch (50°)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-81

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

GLARESHIELD PANEL

Spoiler 1 Push Off Switchlight Spoiler 2 Push Off Switchlight

POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS

IAS

HSI
SEL

Figure 27-53.  Spoiler Pushoff Switchlights

fs285a01.cgm

27-82 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RIGGING OF THE ROLL NOTES

DISCONNECT SYSTEM
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Install rig pins in aileron and spoiler
quadrants and disconnect lever assembly
•• Push control columns fully fwd and hold
•• Adjust cable tensions
•• Pull control columns fully aft and hold
•• Adjust cable tensions
•• Pull ROLL DISC handle
•• C h e c k f o r f u l l a n d f r e e r a n g e o f
movement of control wheels
•• Reset ROLL DISC handle.

OPERATIONAL CHECK OF THE

ROLL DISCONNECT
MECHANISM
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Release the CONTROL LOCK lever to

the OFF position
•• Pull the ROLL DISC handle and turn it
through 90°
•• Make sure the control wheels can be
turned independently
•• Return the control wheels to their
neutral positions
•• Release ROLL DISC handle to the
normal position
•• Apply the GUST LOCK.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-83

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

2 5

LEGEND
1. Rudder Pedals.
2. Rudder Mixer Quadrant.
8 3. Rudder PCUs (2).
4. Trailing Rudder.
5. Fore Rudder.
6. Rudder Aft Quadrant.
7. Rudder Cables.

fs203a01.cgm

Figure 27-54.  Rudder Control System

27-84 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-21-00 RUDDER NOTES

SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The rudder system transmits the yaw commands
from the pilot and co-pilot rudder pedals to the
rudder control surfaces.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-54. Rudder Control System.

Movement of the rudder pedals is transmitted

to two hydraulic PCUs. The PCUs move the
rudder in proportion to the amount of rudder
pedal input.

The rudder system also has inputs from the

automatic flight control system (Yaw Damper)
and the rudder trim actuator.

The rudder system is comprised of the

components listed below:

•• Rudder pedals
•• Rudder forward quadrants
•• Rudder mixer quadrant
•• Rudder restrictor
•• Rudder aft quadrant
•• Power control unit actuator
•• Rudder shutoff valves
•• PCU input bungee
• Rudder position LVDT.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-85

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Figure 27-55.  Rudder Control System Synoptic

27-86 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-55. Rudder Control System
Synoptic.

There are two pairs of mechanically

linked rudder pedals located in the flight
compartment. Movement from either the
pilot or co-pilot rudder pedals are transmitted

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

simultaneously by two independent cable
circuits to the mixer quadrant.

From the mixer quadrant, a single cable

circuit is routed aft and below the left side of
the cabin floor. The cables pass through the
pressure seals at the aft bulkhead, then up to
the aft quadrant located behind the front spar
of the vertical stabilizer.

From the aft quadrant, a pushrod actuates

two hydraulic PCUs through an artificial feel
spring unit.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-87

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

6
4 5

LEGEND
1. Pedal Column.
2. Rudder Input Connecting Rod.
3. Pedal Adjustment Mechanism.
4. Rudder Pedals.
5. Rudder Control Interconnect Push Rod.
6. Brake Linkages.
7. Input Quadrant Connecting Rod.

ft245a01.cgm

Figure 27-56.  Rudder Pedals

27-88 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Rudder Pedals
Refer to Figure 27-56. Rudder Pedals.

The rudder pedals transmit inputs to the rudder

control system and the main brake system.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The rudder pedals are attached through levers
below the flight compartment floor. Movement
of the rudder pedals rotates the rudder forward
quadrant. The pilot and co-pilot rudder pedals
are connected through an interconnect rod.

The rudder pedals are pivot-mounted to

brackets below the flight compartment floor. A
rudder pedal adjustment handle allows both fore
and aft adjustment of the rudder pedals. Each
adjustment handle is located on the pedestal
between the pilot’s feet.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-89

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

A RUDDER FORWARD ASSEMBLY

4

3
LEGEND
1. Rudder Restrictor Input Lever.
2. Rudder Restrictor.
3. 12 0 Stop.
4. Rudder Input Quadrant.
2 6
5. Travel Stop.
6. Mounting Bracket.
7. Rig Pin Hole.

1 7
NOTE
5 Right Side Shown.

B
ft253a01.cgm

Figure 27-57.  Co-pilot’s Rudder Forward Quadrant

27-90 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Rudder Forward Quadrants ADJUSTMENT OF THE

Refer to Figure 27-57. Co-pilot’s Rudder RUDDER PEDAL POSITION
Forward Quadrant. SENSOR
The rudder forward quadrants transmit rudder The following is an abbreviated description of
pedal inputs to the rudder mixer quadrant. the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
Each rudder forward quadrant is located below description of the practice, refer to the task in

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the flight compartment floor and is attached to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
the aircraft by two mounting brackets.
Refer to Figure 27-58. Download Unit - Hand
The co-pilot rudder quadrant has a rudder Held Onsite FDR_Series 400.
restrictor mechanism and a potentiometer.
•• Energize the electrical system
The restrictor limits rudder pedal movement •• Make sure there are no FCECU faults
to the rudder surface to deflect 12° each side on the ARCDU screen
of the aircraft center line. The potentiometer
transfers rudder pedal movement to the nose •• Connect the Hand Held Download Unit
wheel steering system. (HHDLU) to the FDR
•• Put the aircraft in Weight Off Wheels
condition
•• Pressurize the hydraulic systems
•• Move the FLAP LEVER to 15° position
•• Put the HHDLU in decimal mode and
make the appropriate selections
•• Check the HHDLU figures at neutral
and the other positions listed in the task
•• No adjustment is necessary if the
HA
ND
PA
RT
HE
LD
HHDLU readings are correct.
D
SE NO. 9 OW
RIA 64− NL
DA L NO 0446 OAD
TE . UN
UN CODE IT
IT :
NO W E
M V IGHT
OL :4
TA L
PO GE BS M
: 11 A
WE 5V X
MO R: 10 A
DS W OR 2 C 40
TA M 8 V HZ
TU AX AC
S

12
34
56
78
91
0

Figure 27-58.  Download Unit - Hand Held

Onsite FDR_Series 400

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-91

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Rudder Mixer Quadrant pulleys of the mixer quadrant. These dual

cables ensures continued rudder control if a
Refer to Figure 27-59. Rudder Mixer Quadrant. single cable failure occurs .
The rudder mixer quadrant combines rudder From the lower pulley of the mixer quadrant,
control from the two rudder forward quadrants a single pair of cables is routed aft and below
and transmits it to the rudder aft quadrant. the left side of the cabin floor. The cables
pass through the pressurization seal at the rear
The rudder mixer quadrant consists of a three- pressure dome in the aft fuselage, then up to
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

pulley quadrant installed below the cabin floor, the rudder aft quadrant in the vertical stabilizer.
aft of the turbine rotor burst zone. The two
pairs of control cables are routed aft from the
rudder forward quadrants to the upper two

LEGEND

1. RH Forward Quadrant Control Cables.

2. RH Pulley Bracket. A
3. Rig Pin Hole.
4. Rudder Mixer Quadrant.
5. LH Pulley Bracket.
6. Aft Rudder Quadrant Control Cables.
7. LH Forward Quadrant Control Cables.

1
4
5

D
A FW
ft206a01.cgm

Figure 27-59.  Rudder Mixer Quadrant

27-92 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-93

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FWD RUDDER SYSTEM CONTROL

VERTICAL STABILIZER

6 3

1
LEGEND
1. Push Rod.
2. Rudder Aft Quadrant.
3. Rig Pin Hole.
4. Mounting Brackets.
5. Mixing Quadrant Output Cables.
6. Primary Travel Stops.

6
D
FW 5
ft221a01.cgm

Figure 27-60.  Rudder Aft Quadrant

27-94 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Rudder Aft Quadrant left and right

Refer to Figure 27-60. Rudder Aft Quadrant. •• Re-connect rudder pedal potentiometer
•• Do an operational test of the rudder
The rudder aft quadrant transmits rudder control system.
inputs from the mixer quadrant to the PCUs.
RIGGING OF RUDDER MIXER
The rudder aft quadrant is located halfway up QUADRANT TO THE RUDDER
the vertical stabilizer next to the two PCUs.
AFT QUADRANT

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The rudder aft quadrant has the primary travel
stops for the rudder cable system. The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
RIG RUDDER PEDALS training purposes only. For a more detailed
TO RUDDER FORWARD description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
QUADRANT & RIG FORWARD
QUADRANT TO RUDDER •• Install the rigging pins in the rudder feel
MIXER QUADRANT and trim unit, the rudder aft quadrant,
the rudder mixer quadrant and the left
The following is an abbreviated description of and right forward rudder quadrants
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed •• Move the FLAP LEVER to the 35°
description of the practice, refer to the task in position
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. •• Disconnect the pushrod from the rudder
aft quadrant
•• Remove input push rods to the left and
right forward rudder quadrants •• Check cable tensions observing wait
times if new cables fitted
•• Remove rudder inter-connect pushrod
•• Re-connect the pushrod to the rudder
•• Install rigging pins in the left and right aft quadrant
rudder output levers
•• Remove all rigging pins
•• Install rigging pins in the left and right
forward rudder quadrants •• Operate rudder pedals to full travel left
and right
•• Disconnect the rudder pedals
potentiometer •• Do an operational check of the rudder
system.
•• Rig the rudder pedals
•• Install input push rods to the left and
right forward rudder quadrants and
inter-connect pushrod
•• Install rigging pins in the rudder mixer
and aft quadrants
•• Check cable tensions
•• If new cables were installed follow
TASK for wait times between initial
and final tension adjustments
•• Remove rigging pins
•• Operate the rudder control system fully

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-95

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RUDDER SYSTEM CONTROL

FWD
VERTICAL STABILIZER
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

2 10 3 4

1 5

FW
D

LEGEND 12
1. PCU Input Bungee.
2. Summing Bar.
3. Pressure Control Valve. 8 11
4. Upper PCU.
5. Main Control Valve.
6. Actuator Output Rod.
7. Rudder Connecting Rod.
8. Lower PCU.
9. Compensator.
10. Pressure Transducers.
11. Leak Detection Valves.
12. Compensator level Window (2). ft224a01.cgm

Figure 27-61.  Rudder Power Control Unit

27-96 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Power Control Units Rudder Hinge Moment Limiting

Refer to Figure 27-61. Rudder Power Control (HML)
Unit. The left and right FCECU channels supply
rudder Hinge Moment Limiting (HML)
The PCUs transmit rudder inputs to the rudder commands to the lower and upper rudder PCUs.
surfaces. The HML commands are based on airspeed
signals from the Air Data Units (ADUs) 1 and 2.
There are two PCUs, they are located above As the airspeed signals change, the FCECU uses

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

each other in the vertical stabilizer. The PCUs the HML commands to regulate the pressure
are attached to the fore rudder. in each rudder Power Control Unit (PCU), by
controlling the pressure control valve in the
The No.2 hydraulic system powers the upper PCU. As airspeed increases, the regulated PCU
PCU while the No.1 hydraulic system powers pressure decreases to reduce total rudder travel
the lower PCU. at higher airspeeds.
Each PCU is composed of two major assemblies: The FCECU also receives pressure signals from
two pressure sensors located in each PCU. This
•• Actuator (ram) assembly with a fully lets the FCECU monitor the regulated PCU
balanced ram pressure for any failure modes. If a pressure
• Integral hydraulic manifold assembly. failure occurs, the FCECU commands the rudder
PCU shutoff valve to depressurize the PCU and
The integral hydraulic manifold assembly the RUD1 HYD or RUD2 HYD caution lights
contains the following items: come on. If No.1 and No.2 hydraulic systems
fail the FCECU will cause the RUD CNTRL
•• Pressure port caution light to come on.
•• Inlet check valve
•• Main Control Valve (MCV)
•• Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
•• Compensator
•• Leak detection valve
•• Anti-cavitation check valves (2)
•• Pressure reference relief valves (2)
• Pressure transducers (2).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-97

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
COMPENSATOR LEVEL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

WINDOW

Figure 27-62.  Rudder PCU Schematic

CENTERING
27-98 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to: The return fluid from the failed PCU

is c ir c ula te d thr ough the MC V a nd t h e
•• Figure 27-62. Rudder PCU Schematic. compensator to avoid fluid escape from a failed
•• Figure 27-63. R
 udder PCU Fluid PCU when driven from the serviceable PCU.
Compensator.
Two pressure reference relief valves limit the
The pressure port supplies system hydraulic PCU pressure to 3200 psi. Also, the pressure
pressure to the inlet check valve and then to the reference relief valves will crack at 2-8 psi in the
PCV. The PCV regulates the control pressure event of a MCV jam with the PCU depressurized.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

as a function of airspeed. Thus allowing a jammed PCU to bypass and be
back-driven by the functioning PCU.
The mechanically operated four-way MCV
positions the actuator ram. Position feedback is The two pressure transducers supply PCV HML
done by a mechanical linkage (summing bar), pressure feedback signals to the FCECU.
which compares the commanded ram position
with the actual position.

Input from the pilot or yaw damper causes the

four-way MCV to reposition the ram towards
the commanded position. Movement of the A
ram (and the rudder) stops when the actual ram
position is the same as the commanded position
LEAK
nulled by the summing bar. DETECTION
VALVE
The compensator stores 50 psi in a spring
END CAP
loaded accumulator for use by the PCU in the
event of loss of supply pressure to the PCU.
This aids in maintaining flutter suppression.
The two PCU compensators also perform gust
damping when the PCUs are depressurized. A
level check window indicates the amount of
fluid stored in the compensator.

The compensation level window shows green A

or red if it does not stay pressurized after
hydraulic system depressurized.

The leak detection valve detects unacceptable

PCU internal leakage. The leak detection valve FW
D
incorporates a 50 psi relief valve to prevent the
PCU hydraulic fluid from escaping during a
loss of supply pressure. PCU FLUID
COMPENSATOR
The leak detector valve is checked for open
or short with hydraulic systems pressurized
indicating leaks. FLUID COMPENSATOR
VISUAL LEVEL INDICATOR
The two anti-cavitation check valves
prevent actuator cavitation when one PCU is pb529a01.cgm 16 Apr 01

depressurized. The anti-cavitation valves crack Figure 27-63.  R

 udder PCU Fluid
at 2-8 psid to allow the serviceable PCU to Compensator
overcome the failed unit.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-99

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Rudder Shut-off Valves If a PCU pressure regulation failure is detected,

the FCECU will command zero pressure to the
Refer to Figure 27-64. Rudder Shut-off Valve. PCU pressure control valve and command the
associated rudder SOV to close.
The Rudder Shut-off Valves (SOV) supply
hydraulic system pressure to the rudder PCU. The rudder Push Off switchlight(s) also commands
the FCECU to actuate the rudder SOV.
Each rudder PCU is equipped with a rudder
SOV to shut down the PCU. The rudder SOVs De-energized, the rudder SOV de-pressurizes
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

are located on the vertical stabilizer rear spar its PCU by porting return pressure to the PCU
below the rudder PCU. pressure port for flutter suppression.
Each of the two FCECU channel controls its In the event of complete loss of electrical power
SOV open and close. on the aircraft, the Rudder SOVs will close.

RUDDER SHUT-OFF VALVES

FW
D
1
2
FW
D

3
LEGEND NOTE
1. Solenoid. Left side shown.
2. Electrical Connector. Right side similar.
3. Hydraulic Port Return.
4. Mounting Bracket.
5. Hydraulic Pressure Port.
fss69a01.cgm

Figure 27-64.  Rudder Shut-off Valve

27-100 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-101

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

RUDDER CONTROLS - VERTICAL STABILIZER

FWD

LEGEND

1. Motion Detector Limit Switch.

2. Motion Detector Linkage.
3. Motion Detector Cam Arm.
4. Spring Strut.

1 D
FW

ft214a01.cgm

Figure 27-65.  Rudder PCU Input Bungee

27-102 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PCU Input Bungee •• Move the sum bars of the upper and
lower PCUs forward and aft and check
Refer to Figure 27-65. Rudder PCU Input Bungee. clearances between the switch rollers
and the microswitches
The PCU input bungees transmit rudder
system control feel unit assembly inputs to Observe electrical, hydraulic and moving
the rudder PCU. surfaces warnings

There are two PCU input bungees, one for •• Connect external DC ground power

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

each rudder PCU. Each PCU input bungee •• Pressurize No.1 and No.2 hydraulic
has a spring strut and a motion detector. Each systems
spring strut is installed between the feel unit
assembly and its related PCU summing bar. •• Move the sum bars on the PCUs forward
and backward checking that the RUD1
A spring strut motion detector is installed and RUD2 PUSH OFF switchlights
parallel to each spring strut, and has a cam come ON, and go OFF when the sum
arm, link, and limit switch. bars are in neutral positions
•• Make sure that the rudder movement
During normal operation, each spring strut is not greater than 2.5 inches from the
length stays constant. In the event of a PCU jam rigging point, when moving the sum
or its linkage, any pilot input to the rudder aft bars from neutral
quadrant causes an inner spring in the strut to
either stretch or compress. •• Remove hydraulic and electrical power.

The change in strut length causes the

motion detector cam arm to trigger the limit
microswitch. The microswitch causes the
RUD1 or RUD2 PUSH OFF switchlight on
the glareshield panel to illuminate.

RIGGING OF THE UPPER

SPRING STRUT MOTION
DETECTOR &
RIGGING OF THE LOWER
SPRING STRUT MOTION
DETECTOR
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Adjust the microswitches on the motion

detectors to set the switch rollers in the
center of the cams
•• Make sure that the RUD1 and RUD2
PUSH OFF switchlights do not come on

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-103

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Rudder Position LVDT

Refer to Figure 27-66. Rudder Position LVDT.

The rudder position LVDT supplies an

electrical signal, which is equivalent to the
angular position of the rudder to the FCECU.

A rudder position LVDT is located in the

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

vertical stabilizer.

RUDDER POSITION LVDT ASSEMBLY

FWD

FW
D

fs202a01.cgm

Figure 27-66.  Rudder Position LVDT

27-104 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Controls and Indications

Refer to Figure 27-67. Rudder Position on MFD.

The rudder position LVDT transmits the rudder

position data to the PFCS indicator on MFD1
and to the FDR.

A white rudder position indicator displays

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

against a white scale on MFD1.

MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

WX OFF FMS1 076

057 00
HDG 073° 35.0 NM
3 E --:--

160
VIE
VCF

YSO
00

--- 80 YCF
TAS 20 TCAS
GS 0 STBY

ADF1 ADF2
DME1 H 92.1 NM DME2 92.1 NM

I I

Rudder Position Indication.

Figure 27-67.  Rudder Position on MFD

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-105

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
#1 Rudder Hydraulic Pressure #2 Rudder Hydraulic Pressure

ROLL SPLR #1 STALL

INBD GND SYST FAIL

#2 STALL
SYST FAIL

ROLL SPLR PUSHER PARKING

INBD HYD SYST FAIL BRAKE
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

#2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

NOSE FUELING
STEERING ON

MAIN BAT
HOT

GLARESHIELD PANEL

RUD 1 Push Off Switchlight. RUD 2 Push Off Switchlight.

POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS

IAS

HSI
SEL

Figure 27-68.  Rudder Push Off Switchlights

27-106 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-68. Rudder Push Off Obey all electrical and hydraulic safety
Switchlights. precautions and warnings.

When the PCU input bungee limit microswitch Configure the aircraft as follows:
has been made, the applicable RUD1 or RUD2
rudder switchlight on the glareshield panel •• Put the aircraft in WOFFW mode
comes on. The PUSH OFF switchlight warns
•• ADC 1 and ADC 2 to 50kts
of the jammed condition. The switchlight is
pushed to depressurize the jammed system. The •• Flap lever to 15°

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

illuminated switchlight then shows OFF.
•• Flight/Taxi switch to Flight
The switchlights interfaces with the FCECU •• PLA 1 and PLA 2 to 80%
and are centrally located on the glareshield.
•• Energize the electrical system
Pushing either PUSH OFF switchlight causes
the FCECU to command zero pressure in the •• P r e s s u r i z e t h e h y d r a u l i c s y s t e m s
rudder PCU and also cause the rudder shut off (3000 psi)
valve to close. The FCECU inhibits both RUD
•• Install rigging pins in the aft quadrant
PUSH OFF switchlights from being manually
and the feel unit rigging plate
actuated OFF at the same time.
•• Push RUD1 PUSH OFF switchlight
Low hydraulic pressure causes the related No.1 observe No.1 RUD HYD caution light
RUD HYD or No.2 RUD HYD caution light to ON
come on.
•• Adjust upper spring bungee to center aft
rudder on rigging mark
The No.1 or No.2 RUD HYD caution light
comes on for the following: •• Push RUD1 PUSH OFF switchlight
observe No.1 RUD HYD caution light
• Hydraulic system pressure is < 350 OFF
+/-50 psi (2413 +/-344.7 kPa)
•• Repeat procedure operating RUD No.2
PUSH OFF
The RUD CNTRL caution light comes on for
any of the following: •• Safety rod ends of upper and lower
spring bungees
•• FCECU detects a difference of 17 knots
•• Repeat the operation of RUD1 and
or more between the Airspeed 1 and
RUD2 PUSH OFF switchlights
Airspeed 2 from the air data units
•• Observe correct operation of RUD1 and
•• F C E C U l o s e s i t s a b i l i t y t o l i m i t
RUD2 HYD caution lights
hydraulic pressure
•• Observe trailing rudder is within
•• Both hydraulic systems fail.
tolerance of the rigging mark
• Interfaces.
•• Remove rigging pins
RIGGING OF RUDDER PCUS •• Do operational check of rudder systems.
WITH HYDRAULIC POWER
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-107

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE NOTES

RUDDER SHUTOFF VALVES
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Refer to Figure 27-75. Rudder SOV Hydraulic

Schematic.
•• Energize the electrical system.
•• Pressurize No.1 and No.2 hydraulic
systems.
•• Make sure the rudder pedals and rudder
surfaces are in neutral positions.
•• Push RUD1 PUSH OFF switchlight,
make sure it shows the word OFF.

NOTE
Lower rudder PCU goes into bypass
mode, pressure control valve closes,
rudder SOV remains open.

•• Make sure No.1 RUD HYD caution

light comes ON.
•• Open and tag C.B. RIGHT DC L6 FCS
ECU2
•• NOTE. The FCECU 2 will close the
rudder SOV and the pressure control
valve for the upper rudder actuator. The
actuator will now be hydraulically locked.
•• Make sure the ELEVATOR FEEL,
PITCH TRIM and ELEVATOR
ASYMMETRY caution lights come
ON. The No.2 RUD HYD caution may
come ON momentarily.
•• Make sure that you cannot manually
push the rudder to the right or left.
•• If the rudder can be manually moved
the upper rudder SOV has failed open,
and must be replaced.
•• Remove the tag and close the C.B.
•• Repeat the above for the other rudder
SOV.

27-108 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-109

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RUD LIM RT EHV HI B 3 HI RUD LIM RT EHV

RUD LIM RT EHV LO E 11 LO RUD LIM RT EHV

ADU 2
RUD LIM RT 1 DELTA P LO 1 4 LO RUD LIM RT 1 DELTA P
RUD LIM RT 1 DELTA P CT 5 12 CT RUD LIM RT 1 DELTA P LO 27
RUD LIM RT 1 DELTA P HI 4 13 HI RUD LIM RT 1 DELTA P HI 38
RUD LIM RT 1 EXC HI 2 6 HI RUD LIM RT 1 EXC
RUD LIM RT 1 EXC LO 3 5 LO RUD LIM RT 1 EXC
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

RUD LIM RT 2 EXC HI 2 15 HI RUD LIM RT 2 EXC

RUD LIM RT 2 EXC LO 3 7 LO RUD LIM RT 2 EXC
RUD LIM RT 2 DELTA P LO 1 14 LO RUD LIM RT 2 DELTA P
RUD LIM RT 2 DELTA P CT 5 23 CT RUD LIM RT 2 DELTA P
RUD LIM RT 2 DELTA P HI 4 24 HI RUD LIM RT 2 DELTA P

UPPER RUDDER PRESSURE

CONTROL SERVO VALVE

RUD LIM 2 UP EXC HI A 88 HI RUD LIM 2 UP EXC

RUD LIM 2 UP EXC LO C 80 LO RUD LIM 2 UP EXC

UPPER RUDDER SHUTOFF

VALVE

RUD LIM LT 1 EHV HI 3 B HI RUD LIM LT 1 EHV

RUD LIM LT 1 EHV LO 11 E LO RUD LIM LT 1 EHV

RUD LIM LT 1 DELTA P HI 13 4 LO RUD LIM LT 1 DELTA P

RUD LIM LT 1 DELTA P CT 12 5 CT RUD LIM LT 1 DELTA P
RUD LIM LT 1 DELTA P LO 4 1 HI RUD LIM LT 1 DELTA P
RUD LIM LT 1 EXC HI 6 2 HI RUD LIM LT 1 EXC
RUD LIM LT 1 EXC LO 5 3 LO RUD LIM LT 1 EXC

RUD LIM LT 2 EXC HI 15 2 HI RUD LIM LT 2 EXC

RUD LIM LT 2 EXC LO 7 3 LO RUD LIM LT 2 EXC
RUD LIM LT 2 DELTA P LO 14 1 LO RUD LIM LT 2 DELTA P
RUD LIM LT 2 DELTA P CT 23 5 CT RUD LIM LT 2 DELTA P
RUD LIM LT 2 DELTA P HI 24 4 HI RUD LIM LT 2 DELTA P

LOWER RUDDER PRESSURE

CONTROL SERVO VALVE
ADU 1

27 LO
38 HI

RUD LIM LO SOV HI 88 A HI RUD LIM LO SOV

RUD LIM LO SOV LO 80 C LO RUD LIM LO SOV

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS)

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
LOWER RUDDER
SHUTOFF VALVE

Figure 27-69.  FCECU Rudder Inputs and Outputs

27-110 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTES
Normal System Operation
Refer to Figure 27-69. FCECU Rudder Inputs
and Outputs.

When the FCECU is powered, it energizes open

the upper and lower Rudder SOVs.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The pressure control servo valves in the PCUs
are used by the FCECU to control the pressure
supplied to the actuators.

The lower rudder servo valve gets inputs from

the FCECU as follows:

•• From Pins 3 and 11

The upper rudder servo valve gets inputs from

the FCECU as follows:

•• From Pins 3 and 11

As the airspeed increases, the FCECU

decreases the hydraulic pressure providing
Hinge Moment Limiting (HML).

Airspeed inputs to the FCECU from the ADUs

are at the connections that follow:

•• ADU1 at Pins 27 and 38

• ADU2 at Pins 27 and 38.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-111

27-112 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS

RUD 1 SPLR 1 SPLR 2 RUD 2

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

OFF OFF OFF OFF

IAS NOSE UP HDG

AP
U/F FWD FUSE VERT STAB
VS NAV

(E7) J/P2 P/J18

RUDDER POS'N EXC HI 45 1 HI RUDDER POS'N EXC
RUD SYS ISOL P/J177

DASH 8 Q400
+28 V DC RUDDER POS'N EXC LO 34 2 LO RUDDER POS'N EXC
2A L
L MAIN BUS S3 RUDDER POSITION HI 55 3 HI RUDDER POSITION
RUDDER POSITION CT 44 4 CT RUDDER POSITION
ON PUSH RUDDER POSITION LO 33 5 LO RUDDER POSITION
LEFT DC C/B PNL B A A C
24-61-00
G

A A A D RUDDER POSITION
LINEAR VARIABLE
OFF OFF
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER
H2 (LVDT)
H3
H1

J2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

J3
J1

K2
FORE AFT
K3
RUDDER RUDDER
K1

L2 J/P177 P/J1
L3 J 32 LEFT RUDDER SHUT-OFF
VERTICAL STAB RH CB CONS L1 CR6

3313- 3313-
RUD 1 PUSH OFF SW
NC P/J1 J/P2
15 15 G
NO
S3

S5
LOWER SPRING
BUNGEE JAM SW PUSH
P/J176 B A A C
16 H
ON J/P1
VERTICAL STAB F G
#1 RUDDER HYD CAUTION LT 63
F

NC A A A D
16 OFF
NO 3312-
S4 H2 P/J5
H3 OFF J/P2 6 #1 RUD HYD
ACU RUDDER PRESSURE CAUTION LT 43
H1 25 RUD PRESSURE
UPPER SPRING 31-57-00 28 #2 RUD HYD
#2 RUDDER HYD CAUTION LT 63
BUNGEE JAM SW J2
J3
POWER CONTROL FORE J1 CAUTION AND WARNING
UNIT [PCU(2)] RUDDER PANEL
K2 (OH CONSOLE)
TRAILING
K3 31-51-00

d4s272100_a_003.dg, pg, apr30/2007

RUDDER
K1

L2 J/P176 P/J2
L3 K 32 RIGHT RUDDER SHUT-OFF
L1 CR7

HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE RUD 2 PUSH OFF SW

PCU SUMMING FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS)

GLARESHIELD PANEL
LINK (2) ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
(FLIGHT COMPARTMENT)
PCU INPUT
BUNGEE (2)

Figure 27-70.  Rudder Control System - Electrical Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-70. Rudder Control System OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

- Electrical Schematic.
RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
The pressure sensing transducers send delivery The following is an abbreviated description of
pressure information back to the FCECU. The the maintenance practice and is intended for
FCECU knows what pressure it has commanded training purposes only. For a more detailed
and, with the feedback from the transducers, description of the practice, refer to the task in
knows the actual pressure being delivered from the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
the pressure control servo valve.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Obey all electrical safety precautions and
Rudder movement is monitored by a LVDT. warnings.
The FCECU provides the excitation (pins
34 and 45) to the LVDT (pins 1 and 2). The •• Energize the electrical system
LVDT supplies an electrical signal (from pins
3, 4 and 5), equivalent to the angular position •• Pressurize No.1 hydraulic system
of a flight control surface to the FCECU (pins •• Lower the flaps to 50
33, 44 and 55).
•• Push the rudder pedals fully left and right
The FCECU transmits the rudder position •• Make sure the MFD PFCS indicator
data to the IFC to display the position of the shows full travel
rudder on the PFSCI. Another signal is also
sent to the FDR. •• Verify full travel by visual check of
rudder positions
•• Operate rudder pedal adjustment to the
full forward and full aft positions and
check full rudder travel
•• De-pressurize No.1 hydraulic system
•• Pressurize No.2 hydraulic system and
repeat checks.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-113

27-114 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS

RUD 1 SPLR 1 SPLR 2 RUD 2

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

OFF OFF OFF OFF

IAS NOSE UP HDG

AP

VS NAV

(E7)
RUDDER POS'N EXC HI 45 1 HI RUDDER POS'N EXC
+28 VDC RUD SYS ISOL RUDDER POS'N EXC LO 34 2 LO RUDDER POS'N EXC

DASH 8 Q400
2A L
L MAIN BUS S3 RUDDER POSITION HI 55 3 HI RUDDER POSITION
RUDDER POSITION CT 44 4 CT RUDDER POSITION
ON PUSH RUDDER POSITION LO 33 5 LO RUDDER POSITION
LEFT DC C/B PNL B C

A D RUDDER POSITION
LINEAR VARIABLE
OFF OFF
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

H2 (LVDT)
H3
H1

J2
J3

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

J1

K2
FORE AFT
K3
RUDDER RUDDER
K1

L2
L3 J 32 LOWER RUDDER SHUT-OFF
L1 CR6

RUD 1 PUSH OFF SW

NC
15 15 G
NO
S1

S5
LOWER SPRING
BUNGEE JAM SW PUSH
B A A C
16 H
F G ON
#1 RUDDER HYD CAUTION LT 63
F

NC A A A D
16 OFF
NO
S2 H2
H3 OFF 6 #1 RUD HYD
H1 RUDDER PRESSURE CAUTION LT 43 25 RUD PRESSURE
ACU
UPPER SPRING #2 RUDDER HYD CAUTION LT 63 28 #2 RUD HYD
BUNGEE JAM SW J2
J3
POWER CONTROL FORE J1 CAUTION AND WARNING
UNIT [PCU(2)] RUDDER PANEL
K2
TRAILING
RUDDER
K3
K1

L2
L3 K 32 UPPER RUDDER SHUT-OFF
L1 CR7

HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE RUD 2 PUSH OFF SW

PCU SUMMING FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS)

GLARESHIELD PANEL
LINK (2) ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
PCU INPUT
BUNGEE (2)

Figure 27-71.  Lower Rudder Control Jam Indicated

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Abnormal Operation NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-71. Lower Rudder Control
Jam Indicated.

Rudder Jam
A jam of the PCU servo valve causes the
input bungee to change length. This is

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

detected by the motion detector and closes
switch S3 or S4 providing a ground to the
RUD1 or RUD2 switchlight.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-115

27-116 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS

RUD 1 SPLR 1 SPLR 2 RUD 2

PUSH PUSH PUSH

OFF OFF OFF OFF

IAS NOSE UP HDG

VS NAV

DASH 8 Q400
(E7)
RUDDER POS'N EXC HI 45 1 HI RUDDER POS'N EXC
+28 VDC RUD SYS ISOL RUDDER POS'N EXC LO 34 2 LO RUDDER POS'N EXC
2A L
L MAIN BUS S3 RUDDER POSITION HI 55 3 HI RUDDER POSITION
RUDDER POSITION CT 44 4 CT RUDDER POSITION
ON PUSH RUDDER POSITION LO 33 5 LO RUDDER POSITION
LEFT DC C/B PNL B A A C

F
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

A A A D RUDDER POSITION
LINEAR VARIABLE
OFF OFF
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER
H2 (LVDT)
H3
H1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

J2
J3
J1

K2
FORE AFT
K3
RUDDER RUDDER
K1

L2
L3 J 32 LOWER RUDDER SHUT-OFF
L1 CR6

RUD 1 PUSH OFF SW

NC
15 15 G
NO
S1

S5
LOWER SPRING
BUNGEE JAM SW PUSH
B A A C
16 H
F G ON
#1 RUDDER HYD CAUTION LT 63
F

NC A A A D
16 OFF
NO
S2 H2
H3 OFF 6 #1 RUD HYD
ACU H1 RUDDER PRESSURE CAUTION LT 43 25 RUD PRESSURE
UPPER SPRING #2 RUDDER HYD CAUTION LT 63 28 #2 RUD HYD
BUNGEE JAM SW J2
J3
POWER CONTROL FORE J1 CAUTION AND WARNING
UNIT [PCU(2)] RUDDER PANEL
K2
TRAILING
RUDDER
K3
K1

L2
L3 K 32 UPPER RUDDER SHUT-OFF
L1 CR7

HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE RUD 2 PUSH OFF SW

PCU SUMMING FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS)

GLARESHIELD PANEL
LINK (2) ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
PCU INPUT
BUNGEE (2)

Figure 27-72.  Rudder 1 PUSH OFF Switch Pushed

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Lower Rudder PCU Jam Operation ADU Failure

Refer to Figure 27-72. Rudder 1 PUSH OFF Should the FCECU detect that an ADU has
Switch Pushed. failed, or that there is a difference of greater
than 17 knots between the two ADUs , then
The Pilot pushes the RUD1 switchlight to the FCECU will determine the data is invalid.
de-energize the shutoff valve and remove the
hydraulics from the failed PCU. If airspeed is invalid the rudder hydraulic
pressure will default to 700 psi.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The No.1 RUD HYD caution light illuminates.

The HML will double the rudder pressure to

the remaining PCU.

Hydraulic Failure
With failure of either No.1 or No.2 hydraulic
systems, the FCECU de-energizes the rudder,
SOV, causing it to close, and sets the pressure
control valve of the failed system to zero pressure.

The failure will cause a No.1 RUD HYD or a No.2

RUD HYD caution light to illuminate. At the same
time, the FCECU increases the pressure to the active
PCU to compensate for the loss. The rudder control
system will continue to operate if one PCU fails.

Failure of both rudder hydraulic systems will

cause the three caution lights No.1 RUD HYD,
No.2 RUD HYD and RUD CTRL to illuminate.
The aircraft will fly without rudder control and
the rudder compensator will prevent the rudder
from fluttering.

FCECU Failure
A failure of a single FCECU channel will
de-energize the related rudder shut-off valve
and the other system will continue to operate at
twice the normal pressure. The pilot indication
will be the associated No.1 RUD HYD or a
No.2 RUD HYD caution light illuminated.

A failure of both FCECU channels closes both

rudder SOVs and rudder control is lost.

The following caution lights will illuminate:

•• No.1 RUD HYD

•• No.2 RUD HYD
• RUD CTRL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-117

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-73. RUD CTRL Caution Light.

If airspeed and flap position are invalid, the

hydraulic pressure will default to 1225 psi.

The RUD CTRL caution light illuminates if:

•• FCECU detects a difference of 17

knots (37.06 km/h) or more between
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the Airspeed 1 and Airspeed 2 from the

air data units
•• F C E C U l o s e s i t s a b i l i t y t o l i m i t
hydraulic pressure
• Both hydraulic systems fail.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE Rudder Control

ROLL SPLR #1 STALL

INBD GND SYST FAIL

#2 STALL
SYST FAIL

ROLL SPLR PUSHER PARKING

INBD HYD SYST FAIL BRAKE

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

#2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

NOSE FUELING
STEERING ON

MAIN BAT
HOT

Figure 27-73.  RUD CTRL Caution Light

27-118 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-22-00 RUDDER FEEL GENERAL

AND SUMMING Refer to Figure 27-74. Rudder Feel and Summing
System Block Diagram.
INTRODUCTION
Rudder pedal feel is artificially produced by feel
The rudder feel and summing unit transmits springs on the rudder feel and summing unit.
rudder system artificial feel to the rudder
pedals and biases the complete rudder system The rudder feel and summing unit mechanically

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

during rudder trimming or yaw damping. transmits rudder system commands to the
rudder PCUs.
The rudder system is a powered flight control,
the unit is used to prevent the pilot from over- The rudder feel and summing system has the
controlling the aircraft in flight. following components:

•• Trim actuator
•• Rudder feel and summing unit
•• Summing yaw damper actuator
•• Rudder trim switch
• Rudder trim indicator.

RUDDER TRIM
SWITCH &
INDICATOR

TRIM ACTUATOR

RUDDER PEDALS RUDDER

FEEL & SUMMING RUDDER
(PILOT & CO-PILOT)
UNIT

SUMMING -YAW
DAMPER
ACTUATOR

FGM 1
&
FGM 2
fst11a01.cgm

Figure 27-74.  Rudder Feel and Summing System Block Diagram

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-119

27-120 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FORE
RUDDER
FEEL SPRING POWER CONTROL
(DUAL RATE) UNIT [PCU(2)] TRAILING

DASH 8 Q400
TRIM RUDDER
CO-PILOT'S ACTUATOR
PEDALS +18¡ +36¡

YAW DAMPER 0¡
ACTUATOR
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

-18¡ -36¡

HYDRAULIC

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PRESSURE
PILOT STATURE
ADJUSTMENT PCU SUMMING
LINK (2)

YAW DAMPER PCU INPUT

RUDDER BUNGEE (2)
AFT QUADRANT SUMMING ARM

RUDDER
MIXER QUADRANT
RUDDER
FORWARD QUADRANTS

FORCE APPLIED NOTE

1 Hydraulic pressure reduces with
PILOT'S
PEDALS speed to limit Hinge Moment.
2 Trailing Rudder moves twice as
far as the Fore Rudder.

fs277a01.cgm

Figure 27-75.  Rudder Control System Synoptic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to:
• Figure 27-75. R
 udder Control System
Synoptic.
•• Figure 27-76. R
 udder Trim Switch and
Indicator.

The rudder trim switch is located on the center

console. Turning the RUDDER trim switch

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

fully to the left (L) or right (R) gives trim at a
high rate.

When the switch is turned to the first

graduation line, a slower trim rate is given.
The trim actuator can move the rudder surface a
maximum of 10°. The rudder trimmed position
is shown on the RUDDER trim indicator.

Rudder trim indication is transmitted by the

trim actuator’s integral LVDT. The LVDT
signal is also transmitted to the IFC FDR.

If the LVDT fails, the trim actuator stays

functional but no trim position is shown on the
RUDDER trim indicator.

AIL
I

Rudder Trim
TRIM Indicator
TRIM

CENTER CONSOLE

Rudder Trim
AILERON Switch

FW
D

Figure 27-76.  Rudder Trim Switch and Indicator

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-121

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM
Trim Actuator
The following is an abbreviated description of
Refer to Figure 27-77. Rudder Trim Actuator.
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
The trim actuator transmits linear movement
description of the practice, refer to the task in
to the rudder feel and summing unit to bias the
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
rudder control system for yaw deviations.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Energize the external DC power system

The trim actuator is attached to the mid-spar
of the vertical stabilizer and connected at the •• Pressurize No.1 and No.2 hydraulic
rear with two trim arms, that form part of the systems
summing unit. The trim actuator has a DC
•• Move the rudder fully left and right 3
motor which extends and retracts the actuator.
times stopping in the neutral position
If the actuator extends to its limit, the extend •• Turn the rudder trim switch fully left
limit switch disconnects power to the motor. and right
•• Make sure trim indicator shows full
The trimming system is powered from the left
deflections and neutral when the switch
essential bus, through two circuit breakers, RUD
is neutral
TRIM ACT F7 for the trim actuator and RUD
TRIM IND G7 for the RUDDER trim indicator. • Remove hydraulic power and DC
electrical power.

FWD

RUDDER CONTROLS - VERTICAL STABILIZER

D
FW

fs252a01.cgm

Figure 27-77.  Rudder Trim Actuator

27-122 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Rudder Feel and Summing Unit The springs are attached to the feel unit arms at
the actuator end, rotation of the shaft actuating
Refer to Figure 27-78. Rudder Feel and arms extends the spring in the direction of
Summing Unit. rotation while the opposite spring is unaffected.

The rudder feel and summing unit gives This gives the pilot artificial feel of loading on
artificial feel to the pilots when operating the the rudder pedals.
rudder pedals.
During trimming, the feel springs and trim

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The rudder feel and summing unit is installed arms move together.
in series with the rudder control system.

The rudder feel and summing unit has two

feel springs attached to a summing bar that is
connected to the rudder hydraulic PCUs.

FWD

RUDDER CONTROLS - VERTICAL STABILIZER

1 2

FW
D 4

LEGEND
1. Rudder Trim Actuator. 5
2. Trim Arms.
3. Feel Springs. 8
4. Summing Bar.
7
5. PCU Bungee Attachment Points.
6. Quadrant Push Rod Attachment Point.
6
7. Yaw Damper Attachment Point.
8. Mounting Frame.
ft208a01.cgm

Figure 27-78.  Rudder Feel and Summing Unit

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-123

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Summing-Yaw Damper Actuator

Refer to Figure 27-79. Yaw Damper.

The summing-yaw damper actuator transmits

small inputs to the Rudder Feel Summing Unit
(RFSU) to compensate for yaw oscillations
in flight.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The yaw damper is a linear servo actuator

installed between the rudder aft quadrant and
the summing arm. The yaw damper supplies
small rudder deflections to compensate for
yaw oscillations in flight.

Yaw damper authority is 4.5° either side of

center. The yaw damper has its own summing
arm, which mechanically transmits any yaw
damper inputs on to the rudder feel and
summing unit.

FW
D

fs251a01.cgm

RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM

VERTICAL STABILIZER

Figure 27-79.  Yaw Damper

27-124 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-125

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RUDDER TRIM ROTARY SWITCH (SLOW TRIM)

T
RUDDER TRIM AVIONICS RACK
INDICATOR

RUDDER IFC1
TRIM IND SHLD
C 28 VDC
LEFT ESS

T T RUDDER TRIM ACTUATOR

SHLD
HI
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

172 50 EXT
(EXT 15 L) Vl F E
WIPER Vl G F
LO Vl H D
(RET 15 R) T 1750 50 RET
SHLD
PNL LTS H lV A 4B LT SYS HALL HALL
(5V LTC) C lV B 3F (5V DC) LIMIT LIMIT
II D SWITCH SWITCH
II E EXT RET

RUDDER TRIM B
MOTOR
ACTUATOR CASE
28 VDC C CONTROLLER M
LEFT ESS A ELECTRONICS
R3 R4
1
10.0 15.0
2
A 3
R1 R2 D2
11
4 10.0 15.0
RUDDER
LEFT 5
D1
6 IV
7
8
B 9
11
RUDDER 10
RIGHT

RUDDER TRIM ROTARY SWITCH (RAPID TRIM)

RUDDER TRIM B
MOTOR
ACTUATOR CASE
28 VDC C CONTROLLER M
LEFT ESS A ELECTRONICS
R3 R4
1
10.0 15.0
2
A 3
R1 R2 D2
11
4 10.0 15.0
RUDDER
LEFT 5
D1
6 IV
7
28 Vdc
8
B 9 5 Vdc
11
RUDDER 10 Ground
RIGHT
fst02a02a.cgm

Figure 27-80.  Rudder Trim Switch/Indicator Schematic

27-126 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RUDDER TRIM OPERATION NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-80. Rudder Trim Switch/
Indicator Schematic.

Rudder Trimming
When the rudder trim switch is selected fully
to ‘L’ for rapid trim, power is directed by

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the rudder trim switch from the 28 VDC left
essential bus through a normally closed extend
limit switch to provide power to drive the
actuator in an extend direction rapidly.

If the actuator is extended to its limit, the

extend limit switch is opened to disconnect
power to the motor and connect the motor to
a common ground.

When the rudder trim switch is selected to

the mid graduation L line for slow trim,
reduced voltage is directed to the rudder trim
actuator through voltage reducing resistors
R3 and R4.

Extension of the actuator resets the quadrant

to bias the complete rudder system to the
left. Actuator movement is transmitted
through feel unit arms and the link arms
to move the feel and trim unit input to the
newly trimmed neutral position.

As the rudder trim actuator extends the rudder

trim LVDT extends and provides a signal to
move the rudder trim indicator pointer towards
its ‘L’ position as follows:

The LVDT information is transmitted to the

indicator and to the FDR through the IFC1.

When rudder trim switch is selected to ‘R’,

operation is similar but in an opposite direction.

If power to the indicator is removed, the

indicator pointer will go off the scale.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-127

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-23-00 RUDDER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

SURFACES Rudder surfaces extend almost the entire length
of the trailing edge of the vertical stabilizer.
GENERAL The rudders are attached to the aircraft through
a series of hinges and safety hinges.
Refer to Figure 27-81. Rudder Empennage.
Each rudder rotates on sealed bearings. The
The rudder is a primary flight control surface fore rudder is attached to the rear spar of the
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

that is attached to the rear spar of the vertical vertical stabilizer and is actuated by two PCUs.
stabilizer.
The aft rudder is attached to the fore rudder by
The rudder is divided into two sections: hinges and is actuated by push-rods so that the
aft rudder deflects twice as far as the fore rudder.
•• Fore rudder
Unrestricted rudder travel equals 18° left/right
• Trailing rudder.
movement as measured at the fore rudder.

1
2

Upper Dual Load Path

1 2 3
4

LEGEND

1. Vertical Stabilizer.
2. Fore Rudder. Lower Dual Load Path
3. Trailing Rudder.
4. Rear Fuselage Section.

fs223a01.cgm

Figure 27-81.  Rudder Empennage

27-128 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-31-00 ELEVATOR The elevator system has the following

components:
SYSTEM •• Control columns
INTRODUCTION •• Handwheels
The elevator surfaces move in proportion to the •• Left forward quadrant
amount of control column movement. •• Right forward quadrant

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Elevator tension regulators
GENERAL
•• Left aft quadrant
Refer to Figure 27-82. Elevator Control System.
•• Right aft quadrant
The left and right elevators are installed on the •• Elevator power control unit/actuators
trailing edge of the left and right horizontal
stabilizers, respectively. •• Compensator
•• Torque tubes
The elevators are positioned by commands from
either the pilot control system or the AFCS. •• Centering device
Trim control and surface position indication is •• Overload bungees
also supplied for each elevator.
•• Elevator position LVDT.
The PCUs move the elevators using hydraulic
system pressure.

LEGEND 3

1. Elevator Autopilot Servo.

2. Elevator PCU’s.
3. Elevators. 2
4. Pitch Feel and Trim Unit.
5. Control Cables.
6. Stick Pusher. 1
7. Elevator Forward Quadrant.
8. Pitch Disconnect Handle. 2
9. Control Column. 4

6
9
8 7

Figure 27-82.  Elevator Control System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-129

27-130 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PCU INPUT
TORQUE TUBE BUNGEE
CENTRING (17 LBS)
SPRING

H1 -30
0

CO-PILOT CONTROL
H 2

DASH 8 Q400
COLUMN
00

OVERLOAD H3 0
PITCH 20
DISCONNECT BUNGEE
HANDLE (75 LBS) STANDBY
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

PCU
RIGHT
RIGHT FEEL UNIT ELEVATOR
SURFACE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PITCH
DISCONNECT

TENSION REGULATOR AFT TRIM

PUSHER FORWARD QUADRANT QUADRANT ACTUATOR PITCH FEEL
QUADRANT (DUAL) ACTUATORS

PILOT CONTROL AUTOPILOT BEAM SPRING

COLUMN QUADRANT LEFT FEEL UNIT

-30°
STICK PUSHER OVERLOAD
BUNGEE H3
0°
CAPSTAN
H2 20°
AUTOPILOT
SERVO
H1

TORQUE TUBE ELEVATOR

CENTRING SPRING PCU INPUT SURFACE
BUNGEE
fs549a01.cgm (17 LBS)

Figure 27-83.  Elevator Control System Synoptic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION An elevator PCU compensator installed in

the return line of the No.3 hydraulic system
Refer to Figure 27-83. Elevator Control System gives hydraulic gust lock protection. The
Synoptic. compensator also gives elevator flutter
suppression during flight.
Fore and aft movement of the pilot and co-pilot
control columns is transmitted simultaneously
to the pilot and co-pilot elevator control
circuits. The two elevator control circuits are

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

routed independently on the left and right
side of the aircraft. This independent routing
prevents loss of manual pitch control in the
event of an engine rotor burst.

The pilot and co-pilot control columns are

connected to each other by the pitch disconnect
system (refer to 27-38-00).

Control column input is transferred by push-

rods to the left/right forward elevator quadrants
below the flight compartment floor. The two
forward elevator quadrants also act as cable
tension regulators. The left forward (pilot’s)
elevator quadrant has an input from the stick
pusher system (refer to 27-33-00).

The elevator cables are routed from the

forward elevator quadrants aft below the
flight compartment and cabin floor to the rear
fuselage. The cables terminate at the two aft
(left and right) elevator quadrants in the vertical
stabilizer. Elevator control cables pass through
seals in the rear pressure dome to prevent loss
of cabin pressure.

The aft quadrants transfer the pitch control

movement through the overload bungees
to the PCU input torque tubes. The left aft
elevator quadrant has input from the AFCS
servo actuator. The torque tubes transfer the
pitch control movement through the PCU input
bungees to the elevator PCU which are attached
to the elevator control surfaces.

There are three identical elevator PCUs

connected to each elevator surface.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-131

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Pitch Trim Switch

Hand Wheel

FW
D
Control Column

NOTE
Co-pilot Control Column Shown.
Pilot Opposite.
fs625a01.cgm

Figure 27-84.  Elevator Control Column

27-132 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Control Columns
Refer to Figure 27-84. Elevator Control Column.

Each control column provides the operational

control of the elevators.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The pilot control column operates the left
elevator through the left elevator circuit. The
co-pilot’s control column operates the right
elevator through the right elevator circuit.
Each column is attached to a lateral torque
tube with bolts, which is installed in bearings
below the flight compartment floor. The torque
tube has a clutch, which can be disconnected
in the event of a jam in either elevator control
circuit to allow for individual control column
operation of the elevators.

A stick shaker for the stall warning system is

attached to the forward face of each control
column (refer to 27-33-00).

Handwheels
The handwheels provide the physical input to
the control columns. A hand operated control
wheel is pivot-mounted to the top of each
control column. A pitch trim split switch is
located in the center of the outboard handgrip
of each control handwheel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-133

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

LEGEND
1. Mounting Bracket.
1 2. Quadrant.
3. Push Rod.
2 4. Secondary Stops.
5. Rig Pin Hole.
6. Tension Indicator.
6

HN
C

4 D
INB
FW
D
5
ft113a01.cgm

Figure 27-85.  Elevator Right Forward Quadrant

27-134 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Left Forward Quadrant The secondary stops provide a backup travel

stop in the event of malfunction of the elevator
Refer to: system. The stick pusher quadrant is attached
to the left forward quadrant. A rig pin point is
• Figure 27-85. E
 levator Right Forward located in the quadrant.
Quadrant.
•• Figure 27-86. E
 levator Left Forward The right forward quadrant is identical but
Quadrant. without a pusher quadrant.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The left forward quadrant transmits the pilots The attached H-N-C scale and pointer is used
control column inputs to the left aft quadrant. to rig the tension regulator in accordance with
temperature related graphs.
The left forward quadrant is located below the
flight compartment floor. There are springs
installed in the left forward quadrant to supply
tension regulation of the cable system. There
are fixed secondary stops integral with the
tension regulator.

3
2

D 5
FW
8 6

7
LEGEND
1. Push Rod. 5. Mounting Bracket.
2. LH Cable Tension Regulator (Quadrant). 6. LH Tension Regulator Secondary Stops.
3. Stick Pusher Quadrant. 7. Rig Pin Hole.
4. Centering Spring. 8. Stick Pusher Quadrant Stop.
ft189a01.cgm

Figure 27-86.  Elevator Left Forward Quadrant

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-135

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Aft Quadrants The elevator autopilot quadrant is directly

attached to the left aft quadrant with input from
Refer to Figure 27-87. Elevator Aft Quadrants. the autopilot servo. A rig pin point is located in
both quadrants. The right aft quadrant has the
The left aft quadrant transmits pilot pitch primary stops.
commands to the left elevator PCU.

The right aft quadrant transmits pilot pitch

commands to the right elevator PCU.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The aft quadrants are located in the vertical

stabilizer. The quadrants are made of aluminum
and rotate on a sealed bearing. They transmit
the pilot’s pitch control commands from the
forward quadrants through a series of push-
rods, torque tubes and linkages to the six
elevator PCUs.

ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

VERTICAL STABILIZER

D
FW

2 3

LEGEND
1. Quadrant Primary Stop.
2. Left Autopilot Quadrant. 4 D
1 FW
3. Elevator Quadrant.
4. Primary Stops Elevator.

ft178a01.cgm

Figure 27-87.  Elevator Aft Quadrants

27-136 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Elevator-Power Control Units

(PCU)
Refer to Figure 27-88. Elevator Power Control
Unit.

The elevator PCU transmit system inputs to

move the elevator surfaces.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The elevator control system has six identical
elevator PCUs; three attached to each elevator
surface and the horizontal stabilizer rear spar.

The PCU is a hydro-mechanical servo actuator.

They receive input commands from the PCU
input bungees and the PCU input torque tubes.

The PCU actuator body is attached to the

elevator control surface. ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

D
FW

LEGEND
1. Elevator Attachment.
D
FW 2. Horizontal Rear Spar Attachment.
3. MCV.

NOTE
1 Left Elevator Shown.
Right Elevator Similar.

Three PCUs Per Elevator.

3
fs396a01.cgm

Figure 27-88.  Elevator Power Control Unit

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-137

27-138 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

INLET CHECK
PRESSURE PORT
VALVE
AND INLET SCREEN

DASH 8 Q400
RETURN PORT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAIN CONTROL

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

VALVE

ANTICAVITATION ANTICAVITATION
CHECK VALVE CHECK VALVE

LOAD LIMIT LOAD LIMIT

RELIEF VALVE RELIEF VALVE

ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY

fss99a01a.cgm

Figure 27-89.  Elevator PCU Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-89. Elevator PCU Schematic.

Elevator PCU
Each PCU is composed of two sub assemblies:

•• Actuator assembly with a balanced area

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

cylinder and a translating body
• Integral hydraulic manifold assembly.

The Integral hydraulic manifold assembly

contains the following:

•• Pressure port
•• Inlet check valve
•• MCV
•• Anti-cavitation check valves (2)
• Load limit relief valves (2).

The pressure port supplies system hydraulic

pressure to the inlet check valve and then to the
MCV. Pitch input from the torque tube causes
the MCV to port up or down pressure to the
actuator to command elevator position. The
MCV moves the actuator balanced area cylinder
and then PCU body moves to null the input.

The two anti-cavitation check valves prevent

actuator cavitation. The anti-cavitation valves
crack at 2-8 psid to allow the serviceable PCU
to overcome the jammed unit.

The PCU actuator balance area cylinder fluid

is then circulated through the anti-cavitation
valves to the other side of the cylinder.

The two load limit relief valves limit the PCU

pressure to 3600 psid.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-139

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Compensator
Refer to Figure 27-90. Compensator.

The elevator compensator keeps hydraulic fluid

50 psi (344.7 KPa) pressure in both inboard
PCUs, to give gust damping on the ground.

The compensator is installed in the return

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

line of the No.3 hydraulic system on the front

spar of the vertical stabilizer. This limits PCU
movement to prevent structural damage during
windy conditions.

The compensator also maintains a positive

pressure to supply flutter suppression when
the PCUs are depressurized in flight. It
compensates for changes in fluid volume due
to thermal expansion and contraction.

INL
ET

FW
D

fs360a01.cgm

Figure 27-90.  Compensator

27-140 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Torque Tubes Centering Device

Refer to Figure 27-91. Centering Device. Refer to Figure 27-91. Centering Device.

There are two PCU input torque tubes. One is The centering spring assists the springs of the
installed in the pilot elevator control circuit Pitch Feel and Trim Unit to return the torque
in the left horizontal stabilizer. The other is tube to neutral.
installed in the co-pilot elevator control circuit
in the right horizontal stabilizer. The torque A centering spring is installed in each PCU

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

tubes are mass balanced and an attachment is input torque tube. When the PCU input torque
provided for a centering spring. tube rotates, a load is placed on the centering
spring causing the spring to increase tension.
If the elevator circuit up-stream from the torque
tube is disconnected from the centering spring, After the pilot releases the input command, the
a balancing mass will prevent the torque tube load exerted by the centering spring causes the
from rotating, thus preventing elevator surface control column to return to the neutral position.
runaway. Attachment is provided for three PCU
input bungees and an LVDT on each torque
tube. A rig pin point is located in the outboard
bellcrank of each PCU input torque tube. ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
7

FWD
5 6 7
4 LEGEND

1. Adjusting Plate.
2. Pin Drive.
3 3. Torque Shaft Support Pin.
4. Spring.
5. Cover.
2 6. Retaining Ring.
7. Torque Tube.

NOTE
FWD

Left Component Shown.

ft409a01.cgm
Right Component Similar.

Figure 27-91.  Centering Device

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-141

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Overload Bungees The overload bungee between the aft

quadrants and its related torque tube function
Refer to Figure 27-92. Overload Bungee. as a pushrod until there is a linkage jam
downstream of the bungee.
The overload bungees contract or expand to
compensate for excessive deflections. There The breakout force of the bungee is 75 ±
is one overload bungee for each elevator. 5 lbs. The unaffected elevator will then
continue to move. This prevents structural
The overload bungee is located between the damage to the elevators, cable circuits and
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

aft quadrant and its torque tube. The other six the surrounding structure.
input bungees are installed between the two
torque tubes and the six elevator PCUs.

ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

D
FW

NOTE

D Left Component Shown.

TB Right Component Similar.
OU
fs392a01.cgm

Figure 27-92.  Overload Bungee

27-142 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Overload Bungees (PCU INPUT) Elevator Position LVDT

Refer to Figure 27-93. Elevator Position LVDT Refer to Figure 27-93. Elevator Position LVDT
and PCU Input Bungee. and PCU Input Bungee.

The PCU input overload bungees contract or The LVDT is a single channel, single sensor
expand to compensate for a PCU main control LVDT. It senses the elevator surface position
valve jam. There are three input bungees for and transmits the position data to the FCECU
each elevator. to IFC, and to the PFCSI on MFD1. There are

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

two LVDTs located in the horizontal stabilizer;
Three PCU input bungees are installed in series one attached to each elevator surface.
between the three elevator PCU and the PCU
input torque tubes.

They function as a pushrod until there is a PCU

main control valve jam downstream of the
bungee. The breakout force of the PCU input
bungee is 17 ± 1.5 lbs. The unaffected elevator
PCU continue to control the elevator surface.
ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

D
FW
PCU input bungee Elevator position LVDT

FW
D

Figure 27-93.  Elevator Position LVDT and PCU Input Bungee

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-143

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

WX OFF FMS1 076

057 00
HDG 073° 35.0 NM
3 E --:--

160
CAUTION PANEL VIE
VCF

PITCH
TRIM YSO
00

--- 80 YCF
TAS 20 TCAS
GS 0 STBY

ADF1 ADF2
DME1 H 92.1 NM DME2 92.1 NM

EMER LTS
DISARMED

CABIN
PRESS
I I

1 2
LEGEND

1. Left Elevator Position Indication.

2. Right Elevator Position Indication.

Figure 27-94.  Elevator Position on MFD

27-144 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Controls and Indications •• Install an inclinometer on the top surface

of the left elevator at a right angle to the
Refer to Figure 27-94. Elevator Position on trailing edge and adjust the inclinometer
MFD. to a 0° indication
Elevator position is normally shown on the •• Hold the pilot and co-pilot control
pilot Multi-Function Display (MFD1). column in the elevator neutral position.
In the flight compartment, pull and turn
If a disagreement occurs between elevator the PITCH disconnect handle

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

surface position indications, the ELEVATOR •• In the flight compartment, slowly pull
ASYMMETRY caution light illuminates on the the pilot’s control column aft until the
Caution and Warning panel. ELEVATOR ASYMMETRY caution
light comes on. Make sure that the
For the caution light to illuminate, the difference indication is 6.0° ±1.0°
in elevator position must be greater than:
•• Repeat the procedure for the right
•• 4 ± 1.6° for airspeed > 215 kts. elevator
• 6 ± 1.6° for airspeed < 215 kts. •• Adjust the airspeed test set to 220 kts
and repeat the procedure for the left and
right elevator
ASYMMETRY CHECK OF THE
ELEVATORS •• Make sure that the indication is 4.5°
±1.0°.
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Connect the airspeed test set to the left

and right primary pitot-static probes.
Adjust the airspeed test set to 60 kts.
•• Install the four deactivation targets
on the proximity sensors on the main
landing gear to simulate a weight-off-
wheels condition
•• In the flight compartment, set the
configuration that follows:
°° Set the FLAPS selector to the 0°
position
°° Set the FLIGHT/TAXI switch to the
FLIGHT position
°° Set the No.1 and No.2 POWER lever
to a position more than 12° above
FLIGHT IDLE

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-145

27-146 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FMS #2

4 HI GPDB2

DASH 8 Q400
5 LO A429

TMCU #2

(G4) D3
PITCH TRIM ACT 1 D2
3A G5 C4 7 +28 VDC
B1 6 RTN
28 VDC A1 D1
L ESS BUS 47 HI GPDB2
(M3) 2-K1 24 LO A429
FCS ECU 1
5A 56 +28 VDC RELAY JUNCTION ECS
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

67 +28 VDC RTN BOX NO. 1 ELEVATOR

LEFT DC CBP 35 CHASSIS GND
ADU 27 HI 1 4 HI
PITCH TRIM LT POS'N PITCH TRIM LT POS'N
#1 LO 9 13 LO
38
PITCH TRIM LT EXTEND 17 10 PITCH TRIM LT EXTEND 203 HI FCS ECU
PITCH TRIM LT RETRACT 18 2 PITCH TRIM LT RETRACT 204 LO R A429 (IN)

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PITCH TRIM LT DISCRETE REF 8 8 PITCH TRIM LT DISCRETE REF
PITCH TRIM LT ENABLE 10 3 PITCH TRIM LT ENABLE 31-41 A1 IOP #1
MAINT PITCH TRIM LT SPEED 2 1 PITCH TRIM LT SPEED
CLEAR NVM 41 74 MAINT CLEAR NVM
LEFT PITCH TRIM ACTUATOR

MAINTENANCE PANEL
AHARS
ADU 27 HI 47 331 HI GPDB2
#2 FCS ECU RA429 (OUT) 332 LO A429 (OUT) # 1 & 2
38 LO 37
HI 48
GRDB2 A429 (IN) 31-41 A2 IOP #2
LO 49

HI 47
FCS ECU A429
LO 37

TB-B/D2 31 PILOT TRIM RETURN

TB-B/B1 41 PILOT TRIM NOSE UP 1
233 HI FCS ECU
TB-B/D1 30 PILOT TRIM NOSE DOWN 1
232 LO L A429 (IN)
TB-A/B2 21 PILOT TRIM NOSE UP 2
TB-B/A2 22 PILOT TRIM NOSE DOWN 2
31-41 A1 IOP #1
48 HI GENERAL PURPOSE
FMS #1
49 LO DATA BUS IFC RECV'D
ELEVATOR TRIM CONT
SWITCH PITCH FEEL LT EXTEND 19 10 PITCH FEEL LT EXTEND
PILOT'S CONTROL PITCH FEEL LT RETRACT 20 2 PITCH FEEL LT RETRACT
HANDWHEEL PITCH FEEL LT DISCRETE REF 28 8 PITCH FEEL LT DISCRETE REF 7 HI FCS ECU
PITCH FEEL LT ENABLE 40 3 PITCH FEEL LT ENABLE 5 LO L A429
PITCH FEEL LT SPEED 50 1 PITCH FEEL LT SPEED

HI 29 4 HI 10 +28 VDC
PITCH FEEL LT POS'N PITCH FEEL LT POS'N
LO 39 13 LO 12 +28 VDC RTN
ELEVATOR
7 +28 VDC
6 +28 VDC RTN PITCH TRIM
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) INDICATOR
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
(H4)
PITCH FEEL ACT 1
3A LEFT PITCH FEEL ACTUATOR

28 VDC
(F4)
L ESS BUS
PITCH TRIM IND
3A

LEFT DC CBP

Figure 27-95.  Pitch Feel and Trim

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-95. Pitch Feel and Trim. •• Move the control column fully forward
and aft, 3 times, making sure the elevators
The FCECU uses airspeed information from the move smoothly to full deflections.
ADUs and acceleration from the AHARS to control
•• Make sure full deflections are shown on
pitch feel, by controlling the Pitch Feel Actuators.
the PFCS indicator.
As airspeed and acceleration increase, the FCECU • Move control column to neutral position.
commands the two independent feel actuators to
extend. This action, through the levers in the ELEVATOR DROOP RATE

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PFTU, increases the force required to rotate the
aft quadrants. This force is felt back through
CHECK
the cable system, to the front quadrants and the The following is an abbreviated description of
control columns increasing the feel to the pilots. the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
As airspeed and acceleration decrease, feel is description of the practice, refer to the task in
decreased, by reversing the process. the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
Rotating the torque tubes transfers the pitch •• The procedure that follows is to check
control movement through the PCU input the droop rate of the elevator and to make
bungees to the elevator PCUs. sure that the elevator Power Control Unit
(PCU) internal leakage is within the
Extension or retraction of the PCUs moves the flutter requirements, even though the
elevator surfaces. droop rate exceeds the threshold when
all the systems are depressurized.
The outboard PCU is powered by No.1 hydraulic
system, the center PCU by No.2 hydraulic • This task must be done in the hanger or
system, and the inboard PCU by the No.3 outside with zero wind conditions.
hydraulic system, when necessary.
NOTE
As the PCUs extend or retract, it is the body of
the PCU that moves, to displace the elevators, Use the Standby Power Unit
thereby returning the servo valve towards the (SPU) and Power Transfer Unit
null position as the PCU moves. (PTU) first, and then STNDBY
No.3 by itself to have the systems
pressurized.
OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE
ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM •• Set the elevators to a neutral position
and shut off the No.1, No.2 and No.3
The following is an abbreviated description of
hydraulic system
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed •• On the (CDS) proceed to page 3 of the
description of the practice, refer to the task in FCECU diagnostic page.
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
•• Record the LH elevator position and RH
elevator position as “LH No.1 and RH
•• Move the control column to the neutral
No.1”. Record the time as “t1”.
position.
•• Wait for 10 minutes and repeat step 3.
•• Make sure the PFCS indicator shows
both elevators in neutral. •• Record the LH elevator position and
RH elevator position as “LH No.2 and
RH No.2”.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-147

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• Record the time as “t1+10”. Refer to:

•• Subtract the recorded values and divide •• Figure 27-96. Elevator Position Feedback.
by 10 to calculate the droop rate.
• Figure 27-97. Elevator Caution Lights.
•• If the droop rate exceeds 0.12°/minute
proceed to TASK 27-31-36-720-801 As the elevator moves, the position is shown
on the MFD1 by means of LVDTs attached to
each elevator surface.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

ELEVATOR HI 76 1 HI ELEVATOR
POSITION EXC LO 66 2 LO POSITION EXC

ELEVATOR HI 85 3 HI ELEVATOR
POSITION CT 75 4 CT POSITION
LEFT LO 65 5 LO LEFT LEFT
ELEVATOR

LEFT ELEVATOR
LINEAR VARIABLE DIFFERENTIAL
TRANSFORMER (LVDT)

(M3)
+28 VDC
L ESS FCS ECU 1
5A 56 +28 VDC
BUS
67 DC RTN

35 CHASSIS GND

LEFT DC C/B PNL NOSE UP CMD 72 420 NOSE UP CMD

NOSE DOWN CMD 73 419 NOSE DOWN CMD

22-00 A1 FGM #1

+28 VDC (L6)

R ESS FCS ECU 2
5A 56 +28 VDC
BUS
67 DC RTN

ELEVATOR HI 76 1 HI ELEVATOR
POSITION EXC LO 66 2 LO POSITION EXC

RIGHT DC C/B PNL ELEVATOR HI 85 3 HI ELEVATOR

POSITION CT 75 4 CT POSITION
RIGHT LO 65 5 LO RIGHT RIGHT
ELEVATOR

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) RIGHT ELEVATOR

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) LINEAR VARIABLE DIFFERENTIAL
TRANSFORMER (LVDT)

Figure 27-96.  Elevator Position Feedback

27-148 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 AIRCRAFT
AIRSPEED > 215 KTS
LEFT AND RIGHT ELEV CDS MSG: ELEV ASYM FAILURE
SURFACES DISAG BY
MORE THAN 4.0 DEGREES

DASH 8 Q400
LEFT AND RIGHT ELEV
SURFACES DISAG BY
MORE THAN 6.0 DEGREES LATCHED - IN AIR
NOT LATCHED - ON GND
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

AIRCRAFT
AIRSPEED < 215 KTS
ELEVATOR ASYMMETRY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CAUTION LIGHT

CDS MSG: LT ELEVATOR LVDT FAILURE

FCECU CH No.1 DETECTS
A VOLTAGE FAILURE OF
LT ELEV SURFACE LVDT

AIRCRAFT ON GND NOT LATCHED

FCECU CH No.2 DETECTS

A VOLTAGE FAILURE OF
RT ELEV SURFACE LVDT
CDS MSG: RT ELEVATOR LVDT FAILURE

NOTES
LATCHED - Caution light will remain illuminated for duration of
flight. Will not be reset until FCECU power is cycled and fault
condition is no longer present.
NOT LATCHED - Caution light will extinguish when fault condition
is no longer present regardles of phase of flight.
27-149

Figure 27-97.  Elevator Caution Lights

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-150 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

COPILOT
CONTROL
COLUMN

ADU

DASH 8 Q400
AIRSPEED
COPILOT
PITCH TRIM
SWITCHES
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

TRIM DUAL PITCH

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

INDICATOR TRIM ACTUATOR

FCECU RIGHT PITCH PFTU

FEEL ACTUATOR

AUTOPILOT
TRIM LEFT PITCH
FEEL ACTUATOR

PILOT
PITCH TRIM
SWITCHES
AHARS
ACCELERATION

PILOT
CONTROL
COLUMN

fst20a01.cgm

Figure 27-98.  Pitch Feel and Trim Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-32-00 ELEVATOR NOTES

FEEL AND TRIM
INTRODUCTION
The input commands from the control columns
to the elevator PCU move the elevator
surfaces. Therefore the pilot is unable to

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

feel the aerodynamic forces acting on the
elevator surfaces. The elevator control system
incorporates an artificial feel/trim.

The elevator Pitch Feel and Trim Unit (PFTU)

provides artificial feel and trimming to counter
the effects of longitudinal pitch control changes
during flight.

The artificial feel acts on the control column to

help prevent the pilot from over-controlling the
aircraft. Trim counters the effects of changes to
the aircraft center of gravity, airspeed and lift
during flap extension or retraction.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-98. Pitch Feel and Trim
Block Diagram.

The dual PFTU which inputs to both elevator

surfaces.

The PFTU is located near the aft elevator

quadrants in the vertical stabilizer.

The elevator feel and trim system has the

following components:

•• Pitch Feel and Trim Units (PFTUs)

•• Dual pitch trim actuator
• Pitch Feel Actuators (PFAs).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-151

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If one pitch feel actuator fails, the elevator

control system continues to operate using
Refer to: the operational actuator but with reduced
artificial feel.
•• Figure 27-99. Elevator Feel Caution Light.
• Figure 27-100. Pitch Feel and Trim Units. In this case, the ELEVATOR FEEL caution light
illuminates to advise the crew of this condition.
The input commands from the control columns
are transferred to the elevator PCU which, in
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

turn, move the elevator surfaces. Therefore, the

pilot is unable to feel the aerodynamic forces
acting on the elevator surfaces.

The PFTU increases elevator control column

forces with column displacement as a function of
airspeed and normal acceleration of the aircraft.

The Air Data Units (ADU) send the airspeed

information to the FCECU. The Altitude
Heading and Reference System (AHRS) send
the acceleration information to the FCECU.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE Elevator Feel.

PITCH
TRIM

EMER LTS INTERNAL

DISARMED DOORS

CABIN CHK
PRESS FIRE DET

Figure 27-99.  Elevator Feel Caution Light

27-152 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE •• Holding the column forward, make

sure an opposite force is felt toward
PITCH FEEL SYSTEM the neutral position
The following is an abbreviated description of •• Increase test set to 200 kts make sure
the maintenance practice and is intended for the opposite force increases
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in •• Program test set to 0 kts and move
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. columns to the neutral position
•• Move the column full aft and repeat the

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Make sure the PITCH DISC is engaged above sequence
•• Install the air data test set on the pitot- •• On completion remove the test set.
static tubes
•• Move control columns full forward and
hold in position
•• Program the air data test set to 100 kts,
check ASI increases to 100 kts

ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

VERTICAL STABILIZER

D
FW

2
3

LEGEND
D
FW 1. Pitch Feel Actuator RH.
2. Trim Bellcrank RH.
3. Trim Bellcrank LH.
4. Trim Push Rods.
5. Trim Actuators.
1 6 6. Pitch Feel Actuator LH.
ft226a01.cgm

Figure 27-100.  Pitch Feel and Trim Units

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-153

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PITCH FEEL AND TRIM UNIT

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

D
FW

3
1

D
FW

LEGEND
1. Motor Controller Circuit Card LH.
2. Motor Controller Circuit Card RH.
3. Pitch Trim Actuator RH.
4. Actuator Housing.
5. Pitch Trim Actuator LH.

Figure 27-101.  Dual Pitch Trim and Pitch Feel Actuators

27-154 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Dual Pitch Trim Actuator Pitch Feel Actuators

Refer to Figure 27-101. Dual Pitch Trim and Refer to Figure 27-101. Dual Pitch Trim and
Pitch Feel Actuators. Pitch Feel Actuators.

The dual pitch trim actuator reduces the The pitch feel actuators provide PFTU with
aerodynamic forces acting on the control columns. FCECU commanded inputs to create elevator
control column artificial feel.
The dual pitch trim unit is installed on the front

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

face of the PFTU. The pitch trim actuator is a The left and right pitch feel actuators are located
single electro-mechanical unit that includes: in the PFTU. The pitch feel actuators extend or
retract as commanded by the FCECU in relation
•• DC motors (2) to the airspeed and acceleration of the aircraft.
•• Motor control cards (2)
Each pitch feel actuator is a single electro-
•• Gears (1 set) mechanical unit which has:
•• Driveshaft
•• DC motor
•• Actuators (2) and
•• Motor controller circuit card
• LVDTs (2).
•• Gears (1 set)
Only one motor is needed at any time to •• Actuator and
operate the two actuators. A motor rotates
• LVDT.
the single shaft which drives the gear set. The
gears operate both the left and right pitch trim
The pitch feel actuators are powered by the
actuators at the same time.
left and right essential buses through the FEEL
ACT 1 and FEEL ACT 2 circuit breakers.
The pitch trim actuators are powered by left
essential and right essential buses TRIM ACT
The left motor controller receives its commands
1 and TRIM ACT 2 circuit breakers.
from the FCECU channel 1, and the right motor
controller receives its commands from the
The FCECU commands the dual pitch trim
FCECU channel 2.
actuator. Pitch trim signals from the NOSE
DN/NOSE UP split trim switches on the
Each FCECU channel supplies three signals to
control handwheels, or from the autopilot, are
its related motor controller:
prioritized by the FCECU in this order:
•• Enable “ON or OFF”
•• Pilot
•• Motor direction
•• Co-pilot and
• Motor speed.
• Autopilot.
The two LVDT located in the pitch feel
NOTE actuators supply feedback signals to the
FCECU. The FCECU monitors the position
Maximum elevator trim is 13°
and speed of the pitch feel actuators.
nose up and 10° nose down.
The airspeed is supplied by the ADUs and the
acceleration information is supplied by the
AHRS. This data is shared between channels
1 and 2 of the FCECU so that an identical

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-155

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

signal is sent to each pitch feel actuator. This The LVDT located in the pitch trim actuators
reduces mistrack or asymmetry between the send their signals to the IFC and the FCECU
pitch feel actuators. which then supplies the signal to the elevator
trim indicator. The indicator is labelled:
Both pitch feel actuators are normally in the
active mode. •• “NU” for nose up,
•• “ND” for nose down and
The failure of a pitch feel actuator is sensed by
the FCECU through the LVDT feedback signals. • “TO” for take-off.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The FCECU then switches the enable signal of

the failed actuator to the “OFF” position. The A white band next to the “TO” setting shows
FCECU continues to supply the enable “ON” the amount of elevator trim that is acceptable
signal to the other actuator. The aircraft will for take-off. An aural warning sounds if the
continue to operate with a degraded pitch feel. power levers are advanced above Flight Idle
plus 12°, with the elevator trim position outside
CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS the take-off range.

Elevator Trim Indicator

Refer to Figure 27-102. Elevator Trim Indicator.

The elevator trim indicator displays the elevator

dual pitch trim actuator position. The elevator
trim indicator is an analog type gauge located
in the flight compartment on the center console.

LEGEND
1. Nose Down Range.
2. Take-Off Range.
3. Nose Up Range.
4. Indicator.
R R
A A
T T
I I
N N I
G G

FLIGHT
IDLE
1
DISC

2
I

Figure 27-102.  Elevator Trim Indicator

27-156 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Pitch Trim Split Switch

Refer to Figure 27-103. Pitch Trim Switch.

The pitch trim switches give manual control of

the elevator pitch trim. A pitch trim split switch
is located in the center of the outboard hand
grip of each control handwheel.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The pitch trim switches are split in two; both
halves of the switches must be activated for the
pitch trim command to proceed. This prevents
manual pitch trim runaway in the case of a
single switch contact failure.

The switches are spring-loaded to the center-

off position. When the switches are pushed
forward, a nose-down trim is commanded, and
when the switches are pulled aft, a nose-up
trim is commanded.

TCS

PTT FW
A/P D

NOSE DN D/S

INHP

NOTE NOSE UP

Pilot Control Column shown.

Co-pilot similar.
FW
D

fs110a01.cgm

Figure 27-103.  Pitch Trim Switch

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-157

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Elevator Trim Shutoff Switchlights

Refer to Figure 27-104. Elevator Trim Shutoff
Switchlights.

The ELEVATOR TRIM SHUTOFF (PUSH

OFF) switchlights provide shutdown indication
and control of elevator dual pitch trim actuator.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The PUSH OFF switchlights are located on

both sides of the glareshield panel. They
indicate “PUSH OFF” if the FCECU detects
a pitch trim command that persists for longer
than 3 seconds.

An aural alert will sound during this fault. The

aural warning will stop and the PUSH OFF
indication will cancel when the pitch trim
command is removed or the switchlight is pushed.

Selecting the PUSH OFF switchlight will isolate

the dual pitch trim actuator from the FCECU
and cause the PITCH TRIM caution light on
the Caution and Warning panel to illuminate.

NOTE:

LH Glareshield shown.
RH Glareshield similar.
STICK PUSHER
SPOILERS SHUT OFF

FLIGHT

A/P
ROLL INBD DISENG

TAXI INHIBIT

ELEVATOR TRIM TERRAIN

CF-AEI SHUT OFF INHIBIT

WARNING
PRESS TO RESET

Elevator Trim Shut Off Switchlight.

Figure 27-104.  Elevator Trim Shutoff Switchlights

27-158 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Caution Lights
Refer to Figure 27-105. Elevator Caution Lights.

The FCECU sends signals to the Caution and

Warning panel to bring on the caution lights
that follow:

ELEVATOR FEEL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Left or right Pitch Feel Actuator fails, or
•• Airspeed No.1 and Airspeed No.2
disagree, or
• Acceleration No.1 and Acceleration
No.2 disagree.

PITCH TRIM

•• One pitch trim motor, or its control card

fails, or
•• Elevator trim shutoffs switch light
pressed, or
•• Airspeed No.1 disagrees with Airspeed
No.2, or
• When on ground, Pitch trim input
commands disagree.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
CAUTION PANEL

1
PITCH
TRIM
2

EMER LTS
DISARMED
LEGEND
CABIN
PRESS 1. Pitch Trim.
2. Elevator Feel.

Figure 27-105.  Elevator Caution Lights

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-159

27-160 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

34-61-00
VERTICAL STAB FMS #2
9811- 9811- UNDERFLOOR - CENTER
RJB1-P/J1F RJB1-J/P1F
(G4) D3
D2 P/J9 3061
PITCH TRIM ACT 1
3A G5 C4 7 +28 V DC P/J2-2
CENTER FUSELAGE - UNDERFLOOR B1 6 RTN 4 HI GPDB2
28V DC A1 D1 5 LO A429

DASH 8 Q400
L ESS BUS
(M3) 2-K1 TMCU #2
P/J1
FCS ECU 1 30-61-00
5A 56 +28 V DC RELAY JUNCTION UNDERFLOOR - CENTER
67 +28 V DC RTN BOX NO. 1 ELEVATOR
LEFT DC CBP J/P1 2100-
35 CHASSIS GND
24-61-00 P/J2
HI 1 4 HI 47 HI GPDB2
PITCH TRIM LT POS'N PITCH TRIM LT POS'N
LO 9 13 LO 24 LO A429
(WARDROBE) PITCH TRIM LT EXTEND 17 10 PITCH TRIM LT EXTEND
PITCH TRIM LT RETRACT 18 2 PITCH TRIM LT RETRACT ECS
PITCH TRIM LT DISCRETE REF 8 8 PITCH TRIM LT DISCRETE REF 21-00-00
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

9811- PITCH TRIM LT ENABLE 10 3 PITCH TRIM LT ENABLE AVIONICS RACK

J/P340 P/J2 PITCH TRIM LT SPEED 2 1 PITCH TRIM LT SPEED
MAINT
CLEAR NVM 41 74 MAINT CLEAR NVM 3141-
LEFT PITCH TRIM ACTUATOR P/J1A-A1
203 HI FCS ECU
R A429 (IN)

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

MAINTENANCE PANEL 204 LO
AFT AVIONICS RACK
45-45-00
31-41 A1 IOP #1
3133-
31-41-00
J/P10
AVIONICS RACK
PLT TRIM NOSE UP 1 51
PLT TRIM NOSE DOWN 1 50
PLT TRIM NOSE UP 2 3141-
49 J/P2 P/J1C-A2
PLT TRIM NOSE DOWN 2 36
HI 47 331 HI GPDB2
FCS ECU RA429 (OUT) 332 LO A429 (OUT)
SIGNAL CONDITIONING LO 37
UNIT HI 48
GRDB2 A429 (IN) 31-41 A2 IOP #2
LO 49
PILOT'S CONTROL J/P1 31-41-00
HANDWHEEL HI 47 AVIONICS RACK
FCS ECU A429
LO 37
P/J1
3141-
TB-B/D2 31 PILOT TRIM RETURN
TB-B/B1 41 PILOT TRIM NOSE UP 1 P/J1C-A1
VERTICAL STAB 233 HI FCS ECU
TB-B/D1 30 PILOT TRIM NOSE DOWN 1
232 LO L A429 (IN)
TB-A/B2 21 PILOT TRIM NOSE UP 2
TB-B/A2 22 PILOT TRIM NOSE DOWN 2
31-41 A1 IOP #1
48 HI GENERAL PURPOSE 31-41-00
FMS #1 (34-61-00)
49 LO DATA BUS IFC RECV'D
J/P1 CTR PED - LH SIDE
ELEVATOR TRIM CONT P/J11
SWITCH PITCH FEEL LT EXTEND 19 10 PITCH FEEL LT EXTEND
PITCH FEEL LT RETRACT 20 2 PITCH FEEL LT RETRACT P/J100
PITCH FEEL LT DISCRETE REF 28 8 PITCH FEEL LT DISCRETE REF 7 HI FCS ECU
PITCH FEEL LT ENABLE 40 3 PITCH FEEL LT ENABLE 5 LO L A429
PITCH FEEL LT SPEED 50 1 PITCH FEEL LT SPEED

HI 29 4 HI 10 +28 V DC
PITCH FEEL LT POS'N PITCH FEEL LT POS'N
LO 39 13 LO 12 +28 V DC RTN
ELEVATOR
7 +28 V DC
6 +28 V DC RTN PITCH TRIM
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) INDICATOR
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
(H4)

d4s273200_a_004.dg, nr, apr22/2008

PITCH FEEL ACT 1
3A LEFT PITCH FEEL ACTUATOR

28V DC
(F4)
L ESS BUS
PITCH TRIM IND
3A

LEFT DC CBP
24-61-00

Figure 27-106.  Elevator Feel and Trim System - Electrical Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION The FCECU matches the trim speed to the

airspeed as follows:
Refer to Figure 27-106. Elevator Feel and Trim
System - Electrical Schematic. •• Airspeed < 150 KIAS high speed trim
0.75°/sec.
Pitch Trim •• Airspeed > 250 KIAS low speed trim
Pitch trim is prioritized by the FCECU in the 0.10°/sec.
following order. • Trim speed is “increased proportionally”

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

between the two airspeed limits.
•• Pilot
•• Co-pilot If airspeed is invalid and both flap positions are
< 5°, trim speed is 0.1°/sec.
• Autopilot.
If airspeed is invalid and both flap positions are
The command with the highest priority is used > 5°, trim speed is 0.75°/sec.
by the FCECU for trim control.
If airspeed and flap position are invalid trim
Manual Trim speed is 0.75°/sec.
When the pitch trim switch is pushed/pulled to
If any of the above discrepancies occur the
the Nose up/ Nose down position the FCECU
“PITCH TRIM”, caution light will illuminate.
commands the Dual pitch trim actuator extend
or retract using the left motor. The right motor
is in standby mode.

The FCECU controls trim speed and also

supplies a pitch trim enable signal.

Trim inputs move the trim pushrods and

stabilizing linkage, in the PFTU, and move the
trim bellcrank.

Moving the bellcrank rotates the elevator aft

quadrants, through the input bungees, pushrods
and torque tubes which extends or retracts the
PCUs. This moves the elevators to match the
trim input.

The trim input is felt back through the cable

system to the forward quadrants, rotating the
quadrants, and through the push rods, moves
the control columns.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-161

27-162 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

S7
PUSH
B A A C

DASH 8 Q400
G K-
38 PUSH
F E 39 OFF
9811-GM103 58 PITCH TRIM
M A A A D 59 PITCH TRIM
OFF 63 PUSH
NORMAL 64 OFF
H2 74 PITCH TRIM
H3 P- 73 PITCH TRIM
H1

ACU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

J2
OFF J3 G
J1 9811-GM103
9811-GM103
A B
K2
K3
K1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

L2 11 PITCH TRIM
L3
L1
CAUTION AND WARNING
ELEVATOR TRIM
PANEL
DISC (PILOT)

9811-GM102
B B-
S8
PUSH
B A A C
NORMAL
G A

F B

A A D4
A D
H5 D3 C4
OFF OFF SEE SHT. 1
G5 D2 B1
SEE SHT. 1 A1 D3
TRIM AURAL WRNG 54 B H2 D1
H4
9811-GM102 H3
C3 C3
A H1 9811-GM102 SEE SHT. 2
G4 C2 A8
PITCH TRIM DISC 81 SEE SHT. 2
G A7 C1
RELAY ENG J2
J3 C-
B3 C2
PITCH TRIM DISC 69 J1 9811-GM102 G3 B2
RELAY ENG 9811-GM102 H CR1 CR 2 B1 CR 3 CR4
K2
PITCH TRIM CAUTION 43 E
K3
A3
K1
A2 G1
9811-GM102 Q-
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) A1 NC H1
L2
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) F J1
L3
K3 X1
L1
K4
K5 X2
ELEVATOR TRIM
DISC (CO-PILOT) 2-K1

A10 B10
GLARESHIELD PANEL

RELAY JUNCTION BOX NO. 1

Figure 27-107.  Elevator Trim Runaway or Manual Trim > 3 secs

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Abnormal Operation Pitch Trim NOTES

Runaway
Refer to Figure 27-107. Elevator Trim Runaway
or Manual Trim > 3 secs.
A pitch trim runaway, or manual trim selection,
for > 3 seconds will cause the following:

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• An audible warning in the form of
“clicks”
•• A ground signal from the FCECU to
contacts in co-pilot’s elevator trim
disconnect switchlight (S8).
Then to the Advisory Control Unit (ACU).

The ACU outputs grounds for the ELEVATOR

TRIM SHUTOFF switchlights PUSH and OFF.

Pushing either switchlight causes the following:

•• A ground is provided by the operated

switchlight to energize relay 2-K1.
This relay removes power to the pitch trim
actuators, and removes the ground for the
PITCH TRIM caution light, causing the light
to illuminate.

The PUSH goes off and the OFF stays on in

the switchlight.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-163

27-164 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

S7
PUSH
B A A C

G K-

DASH 8 Q400
38 PUSH
F E 39 OFF
58 PITCH TRIM
M A A A D 59 PITCH TRIM
OFF 63 PUSH
NORMAL 64 OFF
H2 74 PITCH TRIM
H3 P- 73 PITCH TRIM
H1

J2 ACU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

OFF J3 G
J1

A B
K2
K3
K1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PITCH TRIM
L2 11
L3
L1
CAUTION AND WARNING
ELEVATOR TRIM
PANEL
DISC (PILOT)

B B-
S8
PUSH
B A A C
NORMAL
G A

F B

A A D4
A D
H5 D3 C4
OFF OFF G5 D2 B1
A1 D1 D3
TRIM AURAL WRNG 54 B H2
H4
H3
C3 C3
A H1
G4 C2 A8
PITCH TRIM DISC 81
G A7 C1
RELAY ENG J2
J3 C-
B3 C2
PITCH TRIM DISC 69 J1
G3 B2
RELAY ENG
H CR1 CR 2 B1 CR 3 CR4
K2
PITCH TRIM CAUTION 43 E
K3
A3
K1
A2 G1
Q-
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) A1 NC H1
L2
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) F J1
L3
K3 X1
L1
K4
K5 X2
ELEVATOR TRIM
DISC (CO-PILOT) 2-K1

A10 B10
GLARESHIELD PANEL

RELAY JUNCTION BOX NO. 1

Figure 27-108.  Trim Push/Off Switch Pushed-Pitch Trim Caution Light ON

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-108. Trim Push/Off Switch NOTES

Pushed-Pitch Trim Caution Light ON.

Autopilot Trim
When flying on autopilot, the FGM monitors the
amount of torque required on the pitch control
capstan to keep the longitudinal trim correct.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

If the torque force exceeds the threshold, the
FGM sends a signal to the FCECU. The FCECU
will command pitch trim until the torque forces
are removed at the pitch control capstan.

Flap Compensation Trim

During flap extension or retraction, with the
autopilot Off, flap compensation pitch trim
is provided. As the flaps extend or retract,
the center of lift on the wing moves forward
or backward, causing the aircraft nose to rise
or fall. To prevent this from happening the
signal comes from the FGM to the FCECU to
command the pitch trim actuators to move the
elevators to the required positions.

OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Use pilot's or co-pilot's control column

•• Pitch disconnect handle in
•• Elevator trim NEUTRAL
•• Move control columns to neutral, fully
fwd and fully aft
•• Make sure elevator control surfaces
follow, and movement is smooth.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-165

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Figure 27-109.  SPS Block Diagram

27-166 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-33-00 STALL WARNING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

/STICK PUSHER The SPS operates in the following modes:
•• Initialization (INIT)
INTRODUCTION •• Power-On Self Test (POST)
The Stall Protection System (SPS) gives •• Operational (OPER)
indications when the aircraft is near a stall
•• Maintenance

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

condition.
•• Teleloading.
When the aircraft is in a stall condition, the
SPS gives a positive input to the flight controls Initialization Mode: The SPS operates in this mode
to help the flight crew regain aircraft control. after an electrical power interruption to initialize the
hardware and software. After a successful INIT the
GENERAL SPS progresses to the POST mode.

Refer to Figure 27-109. SPS Block Diagram. Power-On Self Test: The SPS does a POST
after a long power interruption while the
The SPS has the following units: aircraft is on the ground. The POST senses SPS
hardware malfunctions that are not continuously
•• SPM1 and SPM2 monitored in the operational mode or apparent
•• Stick Pusher Actuator to the flight crew. The results of the 25 second
POST are saved in the BITE and are sent to the
•• Stick Pusher Capstan Central Diagnostic System (CDS).
•• Stick Pusher Quadrant
Each SPM does a POST twice before a
•• Stick Shaker malfunction condition is set. If the POST
•• Angle of Attack Transducer senses a malfunction, the SPM prevents related
Stick Shaker and Stick Pusher operation.
•• STICK PUSHER SHUTOFF
Annunciator Switch The SPM does not do a POST when the aircraft
•• STALL WARN TEST Switch. is not on ground. It will use the saved POST
results to calculate its status.
The SPS has two primary functions:
Operational Mode: The SPS uses two Stall
•• Stick shakers Protection Modules to control their related
Stick Shakers. Both Stall Protection Modules
•• Stick pusher.
operate together to control the Stick Pusher.
Stick Shakers: Stick shakers give tactile and
The operational mode is divided into two
aural indication of a near stall condition.
sub-modes:
Stick Pusher: A stick pusher moves the •• Pre-Flight Test
elevators reducing the angle of attack when
the aircraft is in a stall condition. •• In flight.

Pre-Flight Test: The STALL WARN toggle

switch located on the pilot side console is set
to the TEST1 position and then to TEST2 to do
an operational test of the SPMs. The switch is
held at the set position during the test.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-167

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

In-Flight Operational Mode: The stick Maintenance Mode: The BITE uses the Central
shaker and stick pusher only operate when Diagnostic System (CDS) to report the condition
the aircraft is airborne. of the unit and saves faults in a Non Volatile
Memory (NVM) for reporting to line and
The stick pusher operation is inhibited when shop maintenance. The SPM does a test when
the calibrated airspeed is greater than 215 it receives a maintenance discrete command
Kts (399 km/h), and the Above Ground Level through IOM1while the air speed is less than 50
(AGL) altitude is less than 200 ft (60.8 m). Kts (93 km/h) and the aircraft is on the ground.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

To calculate a near a stall condition and actuate Besides self or internal monitoring, the SPS
the stick shakers, the SPMs use the following does the following monitoring:
parameters:
•• External Input Monitoring
•• Angle of attack data
•• Stick Shaker Monitoring
•• Flap position
•• Stick Pusher Monitoring.
•• Mach number
External Input Monitoring: Each SPM
•• Engine torque
monitors the following external inputs:
•• Icing status.
•• AOA (Transducers and Correction
To calculate a stall condition and actuate the Data)
stick pusher the SPMs use the above mentioned •• FPIU (Flap Position Data)
parameters as well as:
•• REF SPEEDS (Toggle Switch)
•• Power lever angle
•• PSEU (Weight On Wheels Data)
•• Condition lever angle.
•• ADU Data
Each SPM uses its related AOA transducer angle •• AHRS Data
input for stick shaker calculations and an average
•• Radio Altimeter Data
of the two for the stick pusher calculations.
•• FADEC Engine Data.
The SPM will use the same input as the other
SPM if any related data inputs shown above AOA Transducer Monitoring: The AOA
have malfunctioned. If no data is available, transducer angles are critical parameters for
the SPM will then use default data. the SPS functions. If an AOA transducer
malfunctions, each SPM will use the
An AOA malfunction or difference is the only serviceable transducer to make its stick shaker
input that prevents the stick pusher from operating. calculation. The Stick Pusher will not operate.

When the aircraft is in icing conditions, the These malfunctions will be apparent to the flight
lift supplied by the wings can be decreased crew in the form of the following caution lights:
enough to cause the aircraft to stall at a
lower angle of attack. The stall operating •• No.1 STALL SYST FAIL
angle of the stick shaker and stick pusher is •• No.2 STALL SYST FAIL.
set to a lower angle of attack when in icing
conditions. The SPS receives icing condition Non-critical malfunctions do not show in flight.
data from the REF SPEEDS toggle switch in The caution light(s) comes on after the aircraft
the ICE PROTECTION Control Panel. The has landed and slowed to less than 50kts.
Electronic Instrument System (EIS) shows an
[INCR REF SPEED] message.

27-168 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Non-critical malfunctions are as follows: OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

•• Flap Position data STALL PROTECTION MODULE
•• PSEU WOW Data The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
•• ADU Data
training purposes only. For a more detailed
•• AHRS description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
•• RAD ALT

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• FADEC. •• Energize DC and AC electrical systems.
Initiate a POST of the SPMs by resetting
Stick Shaker Monitoring: The SPMs monitor their applicable circuit breakers
their related stick shakers for the following
•• Make sure that the SPS caution lights
malfunctions:
are off
•• Current •• Set and hold the STALL WARN switch
•• Open Circuit in the TEST 1 position and observe the
following:
•• Short Circuit
°° The left stick shaker operates
Stick Pusher Monitoring: Monitoring of °° No.1 STALL SYST FAIL caution
the stick pusher is by the SPMs and the stick light ON
pusher actuator.
°° PUSHER SYST FAIL caution light
The SPMs monitor for the following: ON
•• Release the test switch and make sure
•• Un-Commanded Stick Push
that the stick shaker stops and the
•• No Stick Push When Commanded caution lights go OFF
•• SPM Stick Pusher Driver Failure •• Repeat the test selecting TEST 2
position on the STALL WARN switch.
The stick pusher actuator monitors for the
following:
•• Loss of the 28 VDC Main Power input
to the stick pusher actuator
•• Difference between the PUSH1 and
PUSH2 commands from the SPMs
•• S e l e c t i o n o f e i t h e r / b o t h S T I C K
PUSHER SHUTOFF switches
•• Internal malfunction of the stick pusher
actuator.

When a malfunction is sensed, the stick pusher

actuator sets its FAIL signal output discrete
signal.

Teleloading Mode: The teleloading mode

supplies new operational software to the SPMs
(Shop Only).

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-169

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Stall Protection Modules
Refer to Figure 27-110. Stall Protection
Modules Locator.

Each SPM is guided into the Integrated Flight

Cabinet (IFC1, IFC2) using a guide rail and guide
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

pins. The top and bottom guide pins at the IFC

back panel make sure that the module and the
back panel come together precisely in the correct
location.

The SPM are held in place using front locking

levers. This gives easy installation and removal of
the Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) without tools.

A D
FW

A AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION

B INTEGRATED FLIGHT CABINET C

fs899a01.cgm

Figure 27-110.  Stall Protection Modules Locator

27-170 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Stick Pusher Actuator The stick pusher actuator needs two independent
PUSH input signals from the SPMs to operate.
Refer to Figure 27-111. Stick Pusher Actuator
Locator. The PUSH1 signal operates the motor and the
PUSH2 signal engages an electromechanical
The stick pusher actuator mounts to the stick clutch. The output torque is nominally set to
pusher capstan with four mounting bolts. approximately 32 kilograms (kg) of column force.
The actuator turns an output pinion to move the
NOTE

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

capstan that moves the control columns forward.
The stick pusher actuator can
The stick pusher actuator uses two, 28 VDC operate against a stalling load
electrical power sources. One supplies motor for only a short time before
current and the other supplies the monitor circuits. overheating. The SPS has software
protection to limit the stick pusher
operation to a maximum of 15
seconds, with a time delay of 1
minute before the stick pusher can
be activated again.

FW
D

FW
D

fs983a01.cgm

FW
D

STICK PUSHER CAPSTAN

Figure 27-111.  Stick Pusher Actuator Locator

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-171

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FW
D

fs984a01.cgm

FW
D

STICK PUSHER CAPSTAN

Figure 27-112.  Stick Pusher Capstan Locator

27-172 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Stick Pusher Capstan NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-112. Stick Pusher Capstan
Locator.

The stick pusher capstan mounts to the aircraft

structure and connects to the elevator control
system with cables.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Two aircraft cables attach to the capstan pulley
using staged ball fittings that anchor to pockets
in the pulley.

The stick pusher capstan gives the mechanical

interface with the elevator control system.

The capstan has an adjustable override slip

clutch that lets the cable pulley turn if the stick
pusher actuator cannot move due to a mechanical
malfunction.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-173

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Stick Pusher Quadrant

Refer to Figure 27-113. Stick Pusher Quadrant
Locator.

The stick pusher quadrant is located below the

left flight compartment floor and inputs to the
pilots’ elevator forward quadrant.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

D
FW

FW
D

A LEFT ELEVATOR FORWARD

A
QUADRANT ASSEMBLY

D
FW

fsa09a01.cgm

Figure 27-113.  Stick Pusher Quadrant Locator

27-174 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Stick Shaker
Refer to Figure 27-114. Stick Shaker Locator.

The stick shaker mounts to the control column

with a bracket. The stick shaker has a housing
that contains an electrical motor that turns an
unbalanced weight.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

NOTE
Pilot Side Shown.
Co-pilot Side Similar.

CONTROL COLUMN ASSEMBLY

FWD

Figure 27-114.  Stick Shaker Locator

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-175

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Angle of Attack Transducer (AOA)

Refer to Figure 27-115. Angle Of Attack
Transducer Locator.

Each AOA transducer mounts to the aircraft

with five screws and two locating pins.

The transducer has a fixed body that attaches

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

to the aircraft and a transducer that moves by

the relative airflow.

The transducer connects to a shaft that turns

freely. A counterweight and a damper attach to
the shaft to balance the transducer.

The transducer has two resolvers that send

angular data to the SPMs.

A self-regulated heater prevents icing. The

body is not heated.

4
D
5
FW

LEGEND
A 1 1. Angle of Attack Transducer.
2. Cover plate.
3. Screws.
4. Sealing ring.
5. Connector.

2
FW
D

A A

NOTE
Left side shown.
Right side similar. 3 st019b01.cgm

Figure 27-115.  Angle Of Attack Transducer Locator

27-176 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Stick Pusher Shutoff Annunciator Stall Warn Test Switch

Switch
Refer to Figure 27-116. SPS Stick Pusher The STALL WARN TEST switch mounts to
Shutoff Annunciator Switch Locator. the pilot’s side console panel.

The two STICK PUSHER SHUT OFF The TEST switch provides operational tests.
annunciator switches attach to the glareshield The switch is a positive break, double pole,
panel assembly. toggle switch with a lever that springs back to

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the center OFF position.
If either switch is pushed, the stick pusher
actuator will not operate and the OFF light in
the switch comes on.

GLARESHIELD PANEL

OF
F

fs982a01.cgm

Figure 27-116.  SPS Stick Pusher Shutoff Annunciator Switch Locator

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-177

27-178 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

ADU #1-2
HI 16 107 HI ADU #1-2 A429
A429 (OUT)
LO 49 108 LO

ADU #1

301 GND
AHRS #1-2 223 HI
HI D17 AHRS #1-2 A429
A429 (OUT) 222 LO
LO D12

AHRS #1 135 CH GND 2 201 GND

435 CH GND 4
IOP #1-1 HI 213 227 HI
IOP #1-1 A429
FROM IRPS LO 212 226 LO
J / P1- A3

DASH 8 Q400
TIMER & MONITOR 132 POST IFC #1 NG WOW 1
7 HI 17 435 HI
HEATER 1 115 V AC AOA #1 MEAS 1 COS IOP #1
8 LO 16 434 LO
1 HI SPM #1 EXCITATION 4 432 HI
SEE SH 2 H AOA #1 MEAS 1 SIN
2 LO 7.5 V AC 2500 HZ 3 433 LO
22 GND
P/J1A-A1
ANGLE OF ATTACK #1 VANE IOP #2-1 HI 213 125 HI
IOP #2-1 A429
LO 212 124 LO
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FROM IRPS 426 P PGM SP INHIB IOP #2

TIMER & MONITOR
7 HI 17 335 HI
HEATER 2 115 V AC AOA #2 MEAS 1 COS

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

8 LO 16 334 LO
1 HI SPM #1 EXCITATION 4 332 HI
SEE SH 2 J AOA #2 MEAS 1 SIN
2 LO 7.5 V AC 2500 HZ 3 333 LO
308 PUSHER GND REF POST NG WOW1 2A
22 201 GND IFC #1 NG WOW2 8J 104 POST IFC #1 NG WOW 2
401 GND
ANGLE OF ATTACK #2 VANE PSEU

ADU #2-4 HI 14 129 HI

A429 (OUT) ADU #2-4 A429
LO 47 128 LO
101 GND 200 FT. ALT W 425 200 FT. ALT TRIP #1
ADU #2 401 GND TRIP #1

AHRS #2-3 HI C5 213 HI RADIO ALT #1

AHRS #2-3 A429 IN
A429 (OUT) LO C10 214 LO

TEST 211 HI
AHRS #2 FLIGHT TEST A429 IN
SOCKETS 212 LO
HI 6 221 HI
DOWNLOAD D DOWNLOAD D
LO 7 222 LO
HI 14 115 HI
DOWNLOAD C DOWNLOAD C
71 329 REF SPEED LO 15 114 LO
REF SPEED
SPM #1 LOAD REQD 2 232 SPM #1 LOAD REQD

(IRPS) PANEL
PMAT DOWNLOAD
L VANE HEATER B 427 L VANE HEATER FAIL
RS422 CONNECTOR
FAIL P/J3
R VANE HEATER L 327 R VANE HEATER FAIL
FAIL 431 HI
FLAP POS L
430 LO
IRPS TIMER AND FLAP POSITION
331 HI
INDICATION FLAP POS R
MONITOR UNIT 330 LO
(27-53-00)
428 FLAP HEALTHY L PUSHER FAIL C 422 PUSHER FAIL
328 FLAP HEALTHY R PUSHER PUSH U 408 PUSHER PUSH C

PRE-FLIGHT TEST F-
423 PRE FLIGHT TEST STICK PUSHER
STALL PROTECTION
MODULE (SPM) #1
STALL PROTECTION
PILOTS SIDE CONSOLE
MODULE (SPM) #1
STALL PROTECTION MODULE (SPM) #1 INPUTS STALL PROTECTION MODULE (SPM) #1 INPUTS

Figure 27-117.  SPM Inputs

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Inputs Timer Monitor Unit: The SPMs receive the

status of the left and right AOA Vane heaters
Refer to Figure 27-117. SPM Inputs. from the TMU. If the AOA vane is not heated,
the SPMs prevent the SPS from using its inputs.
Air Data Units: Each SPM receives an ARINC
429 data bus from both ADC No.1 and ADC TEST Switch: Input to SPM and Radio
No.2. The SPS uses the Mach number and the Altimeter to initiate a Stall Warning Test.
True Airspeed to perform the stall warning and
stall identification calculations. The SPS uses IOP: Each SPM receives an ARINC 429 data

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the Calibrated Airspeed to inhibit the Stick bus from each of the IOP data concentrators.
Pusher at airspeeds greater than 215 knots, and These buses transmit the Radio Altitude and
to inhibit AOA Vane comparison monitoring at FADEC data to the SPMs. The SPMs use
airspeeds below 60 knots. engine torque in the Stick-Shaker firing angle
computations and Power Lever Angle and
Attitude & Heading Reference System: The Condition Lever Angle in the Stick Pusher
AHRS inputs are used to compute the angle- firing angle computations.
of-attack rate of the aircraft. When the aircraft
angle-of-attack rate exceeds 3° per second, PSEU: Each SPM receives WOW1 and WOW2
the SPS computes a stick pusher advance discretes that indicate air/ground status based
term that is added to the angle-of-attack when on the two nose gear Weight on Wheels
determining if the stick pusher firing angle is proximity sensors. The SPS uses the WOW
exceeded. The stick pusher advance term is discretes to inhibit the Stick-Shakers and the
intended to compensate for the dynamics of a Stick Pusher when the aircraft is on-ground,
rapid approach to stall by activating the Stick and to prevent the SPMs from performing
Pusher earlier, to prevent a large overshoot into POST following a power interrupt, when the
the stall. aircraft is airborne.
Angle Of Attack Vanes: Each of the left and Inc. Ref Speed: The SPS uses the Inc Ref
right AOA Vanes contains 2 synchro resolvers, Speed switch selection in the Stick-Shaker and
one for each SPS channel. The outputs of the Stick Pusher firing angle computations.
AOA Vanes are AC voltages equivalent to the
sine and cosine of the AOA Vane angles. The Radio Altimeter: The SPMs receive a RA TRIP
SPMs use the AOA Vane angles to determine discrete when the radio Altitude is less than 200
when to activate the Stick-Shakers and the feet to inhibit the Stick Pusher below 200 feet.
Stick Pusher.
The SPMs also receive Radio Altitude
Stall Protection Module: Each SPM transmits indirectly via the IOPs. The SPS uses the actual
an ARINC 429 data bus to the other SPM for Radio Altitude to determine aircraft air/ground
internal SPS communication between the two status when the Weight On Wheels inputs from
channels. The data transmitted on these buses the PSEU disagree.
includes the validity status of each channel. The
SPMs cross-exchange hardware discretes that PMAT: Software download.
indicate the healthy status of each SPM, and
indicate when each SPM is ready to command Stick Pusher: The outputs from the Stick
a stick push. Pusher Actuator to the SPMs are the PUSH
discrete, which indicates the Stick Pusher
IRPS Panel: The selection of the REF SPEEDS is pushing, and the FAIL discrete, which
toggle switch inputs to the SPM to set a new indicates that the Stick Pusher Actuator internal
reference for stall warning actuations. monitoring is invalid, or the flight crew has
depressed a Stick Pusher Shutoff switchlight.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-179

27-180 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

HI 301
SPM #1 EXCITATION H
LO 302 SEE SH. 1
HI 403
SPM #1 EXCITATION J
LO 404

STALL 1 NO WARNING 324 30 #1 STALL SYST FAIL

DASH 8 Q400
PUSHER SYSTEM NOT FAIL 323 31 PUSHER SYST FAIL
STALL 1 NO WARNING FBA 424 DECISION HEIGHT 420 33 DECISION HEIGHT
L/GEAR DOWN GND 421 16 L/GEAR DOWN GND
CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL BACKCOURSE 419 19 BACKCOURSE
HI 305 1 HI
ROLL ATT SYNCRO ROLL ATT SYNCRO
LO 306 21 LO
HI 303 62 HI
BARO ALT RATE BARO ALT RATE
LO 304 43 LO
HI 433 63 HI
AIRSPEED IN AIRSPEED IN
LO 434 44 LO
BARO ALT RATE VAL 313 9 BARO ALT RATE VAL
G/S SELECT GND 423 20 G/S SELECT GND
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

HI 307 65 HI
GS DEV GS DEV
LO 308 46 LO
G/S VALID 314 11 G/S VALID
RADIO ALT +28 VDC 418 29 RADIO ALT +28 VDC
HI 431 64 HI
RADIO ALT OUTPUT RADIO ALT INPUT
LO 432 45 LO

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

36 GPWS AUDIO SUPPRESS
SHAKER FB CMD 405
CMD 305 A CMD GPWC
SHAKER 1 SHAKER 1
RTN 306 B RTN
GPWS AUDIO SUPPRESS 312

STICK SHAKER #1

LANDING FLAP POS 1 422 F LANDING FLAP POS 1

LANDING FLAP POS 3 424 H- LANDING FLAP POS 3
LANDING FLAP POS 2 312 G- LANDING FLAP POS 2

REF GND B
HYDRAULIC/FLAP OVERRIDE
PUSHER CMD N 307 PUSHER CMD MOTOR
CONTROL PANEL
407 PUSHER CMD FDBK
SH 3 M
HI 217 111 HI
SPM #1-1 FT A429 SPM #1-1 FT A429
LO 218 112 LO
M +28 VDC IN
(K1) STICK T +28 VDC RTN IOP #1
PUSHER TEST HI 121 209 HI
SPM #1-1 A429 SPM #1-1 A429
+28 VDC L +28 VDC IN SOCKETS LO 122 210 LO
7.5A
L MAIN BUS G +28 VDC RTN
STICK PUSH READY 313 413 STICK PUSH READY
(K6) STICK
SPM #1 HEALTHY 108 235 SPM #1 HEALTHY
PUSHER STICK PUSHER
+28 VDC 111 HI
7.5A SPM #1-1 FT A429
R MAIN BUS 112 LO
27-30 A2 STALL PROTECTION
IOP #2 MODULE (SPM) #2
AVIONICS CBP SH 3 N

405 AP DISCONNECT RA TEST ENABLE 414 N- RA TEST ENABLE

HI 303 M- HI
R/A TEST SIG R/A TEST SIG
FGM #1 LO 304 A- LO

STALL PROTECTION RADIO ALT # 1

MODULE (SPM) #1

302 AP DISCONNECT
STALL PROTECTION MODULE (SPM) #1 OUTPUTS
AP DISCONNECT 310
FGM #2

STALL PROTECTION
MODULE (SPM) #1 STALL PROTECTION MODULE (SPM) #1 OUTPUTS

Figure 27-118.  SPM Outputs

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Flap Position: Each SPM receives left and NOTES

right Flap Positions and a FLAP HEALTHY
discrete from the FPIU. The SPS uses the Flap
Positions to determine the Stick-Shaker and
Stick Pusher firing angles.

Aircraft Configuration Module: Each SPM

receives installation correction values for each
AOA Vane from the ACMs. The installation

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

correction values are specific to the individual
aircraft, and are intended to compensate for errors
of up to 2° in the mounting of the vanes.

Outputs
Refer to Figure 27-118. SPM Outputs.

Caution and Warning Panel: No.1 STALL

SYST FAIL, No.2 STALL SYST FAIL and
PUSHER SYST FAIL.

Stick Pusher Actuator: A PUSH command

from SPM No.1 to the motor, and a PUSH
command from SPM No.2 to the clutch.

Stick Shaker: A 2-wire connection, one wire

for 28 VDC, and one wire for Return, which
allows the SPMs to both command and monitor
the Stick-Shaker motors.

Auto Pilot: Each SPM sends a discrete to the

AFCS to disengage the Autopilot when the
aircraft angle-of-attack has reached the stall
warning condition.

EGPWS: Each SPM sends a discrete to the

Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System
to inhibit the “Pull-up” aural warning when the
aircraft has reached the stall warning condition.

IOP 1 and IOP 2: The SPS outputs data to

the FDR via IOP No.1. Each SPM outputs Left
AOA, Right AOA, Left or Right Stick-Shaker
Event, and Stick Pusher Event.

AOA Vanes: Excitation for AOA resolvers.

SPM: Cross talk between the two SPMs. Data

includes health status and a discrete that indicates
when each SPM is ready to command a push.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-181

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PUSH
C A A B

'PUSH OFF CO-PILOT LT' 28 V

TO ACU, 3313-P/J2, PIN 106 L G
(22-11-00) NORMAL

(SEE SH. 3) +28V DC N M D A A A

OFF
H2
H3 OFF
H1

J2
K J3
J1 P P SP PILOT RELEASE
R SP CO-PILOT RELEASE
K2
K3
K1 STICK PUSHER

L2
L3
L1

PILOTS
GLARESHIELD
STICK
PUSHER

PUSH
C A A B

'PUSH OFF PLT LT'

TO ACU, 3313-P/J2, PIN 105 H- G
(22-11-00) NORMAL

(SEE SH. 3) +28V DC M G- D A A A

OFF

H2
H3 OFF
H1

J2
F- J3
J1 J-

K2
K3
K1
I- 'OFF PLT LT CMD'
L2 TO ACU, 3313-P/J1, PIN 105
L3
L1
N 'OFF CO-PLT LT CMD'
CO-PILOTS TO ACU, 3313-P/J1, PIN 106
GLARESHIELD
STICK
PUSHER

GLARESHIELD PANEL

Figure 27-119.  Stick Pusher Shutoff Switchlights

27-182 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-119. Stick Pusher Shutoff NOTES

Switchlights.

Stick Pusher Shutoff Switchlights: The

Stick Pusher Shutoff switchlights are used to
disable the stick pusher. If either switchlight is
depressed a ground is applied to the stick pusher
to disable the internal drive circuitry. The “OFF”
indications in both switchlights will come on.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The Stick Pusher actuator electronic circuits
supply a discrete “FAIL” signal to the SPMs
to cause the Pusher System Fail caution light
to come on.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-183

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

1 2 3

#1 STALL
SYST FAIL

#2 STALL
SYST FAIL

PUSHER PARKING
SYST FAIL BRAKE
LEGEND INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID
1. Pusher System Fail (Amber).
2. # 2 Stall System Fail (Amber). FLAP LDG GEAR
3. # 1 Stall System Fail (Amber). DRIVE INOP

NOSE FUELING
STEERING ON

MAIN BAT
HOT

Figure 27-120.  SPM Caution Light Indications

27-184 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-120. SPM Caution Light
Indications.

The stall protection system malfunctions are

shown with the caution lights that follow:

•• No.1 STALL SYST FAIL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• No.2 STALL SYST FAIL
• PUSHER SYST FAIL.

The No.1 STALL SYST FAIL, No.2 STALL

SYST FAIL: The No.1 STALL SYST FAIL
or No.2 STALL SYST FAIL caution light
comes on if a malfunction condition of the SPS
prevents stick shaker operation.

The No.1 STALL SYST FAIL or No.2

STALL SYST FAIL caution light comes on
immediately, while the aircraft is on the ground
or airborne, for the malfunction conditions that
follow:

•• Related SPM
•• The two stick shakers
• The two Angle of Attack transducers
(AOA).

Malfunctions of not critical parameters are not

shown in flight. The No.1 STALL SYST FAIL
or No.2 STALL SYST FAIL caution light will
come on 30 seconds after the aircraft is on
the ground for the malfunction of non-critical
parameters.

PUSHER SYST FAIL: The PUSHER SYST

FAIL caution light comes on when a STICK
PUSHER SHUTOFF annunciator switch
is set to OFF or for any malfunction that
prevents stick pusher operation. The PUSHER
SYST FAIL caution light also comes on if a
malfunction condition of the SPS prevents stick
shaker operation.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-185

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-121. PFD Low Speed Cue

Indications.

A Low Speed Cue (LSC) is calculated by the

SPS to show the minimum operating speed. It
is a red and black band that starts with a red
edge at the low speed value and extends to the
bottom of the IAS scale.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

It is out of view when the aircraft is on the ground.

WING LVL GA
ALT SEL

14000
200 10

160
IAS 60
120 5 40
20

100

80 0 0
140 1013 HPA TCAS
151 STBY

6
HDG 073 3 E VOR1 350
H 113. 50
92.1 NM
12
N

S15
30

21
W
ADF1 24 ADF2

DME1 H 92.1 NM DME2 92.1 NM

Figure 27-121.  PFD Low Speed Cue Indications

27-186 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-122. PFD Low Speed Cue NOTE

Malfunction Indications.
If AHRS1 or AHRS2 malfunctions,
The two Indicated Air Speed (IAS) indicators a CUE flag is shown on the related
show a vertical yellow CUE flag for the IAS indicator.
malfunction conditions that follow:
NOTE
•• Left or right AOA transducer
The AOA CUE flag is out of view
•• Left or right AOA transducer heat

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

when the aircraft is on the ground
•• ADC1 or ADC2 and the KIAS is less than 60 kts.
•• FADEC1 (A and B channels) or
FADEC2 (A and B channels)
• Left and right flap position.

WING LVL GA
ALT SEL

14000
200 10

160
IAS 60
120 5 40
20

100
C
U
80 E 0 0
140 1013 HPA TCAS
151 STBY

6
HDG 073 3 E VOR1 350
H 113. 50
92.1 NM
12
N

S15
30

21
W
ADF1 24 ADF2

DME1 H 92.1 NM DME2 92.1 NM

Figure 27-122.  PFD Low Speed Cue Malfunction Indications

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-187

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Tests
Refer to Figure 27-123. Stall Warn Test Toggle
Switch.

The STALL WARN toggle switch is set to

the TEST1 position for more than 10 seconds
and then to the TEST2 position to do a SPS
operational test. The test has the indications
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

that follow:

•• Related STALL SYST FAIL caution

light comes on
•• PUSHER SYST FAIL caution light
comes on
•• Related stick shaker operates
• Related stick pusher does not operate.

NOTE
On aircraft with two Radio
Altimeters (RA): When the STALL
WARN toggle switch is set to the
TEST1 or TEST2 position, the RA
indications in the related Electronic
Attitude Direction Indicators
(ATT1, ATT2) shows 500 ft and
then 50 ft.

CIR BKR W/S WIPER PILOTS

LIGHT ICE DETECT FLT PNL

STEERING
LEFT SIDE CONSOLE

fs985a01.cgm
Stall Warn Test Toggle Switch

Figure 27-123.  Stall Warn Test Toggle Switch

27-188 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-34-00 ELEVATOR GENERAL

SURFACES Refer to Figure 27-124. Elevator Surface.

INTRODUCTION There are two elevator surfaces installed on

the trailing edge of the left and right horizontal
The elevator surfaces give longitudinal control stabilizers. Three elevator PCUs are attached
of the aircraft in flight, around the lateral axis. to each elevator surface to drive the elevators.
A LVDT is also attached to the front of each

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

elevator surface.

LEGEND A
1. Inboard Elevator Hinge
2. LVDT Attachment
3. Inboard PCU Attachment
4. Inboard Center Hinge
5. Middle PCU Attachment
6. Outboard PCU Attachment
7. Outboard Center Hinge
8. Elevator Surface
9. Outboard Elevator Hinge
10. Static Discharge Wicks.

FWD

3
4
5
10
6
7
A 8

NOTE
Left Side Shown,
right Side Similar.

Figure 27-124.  Elevator Surface

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-189

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

CABLE
SYSTEM

PITCH DISCONNECT
CLUTCH MECHANISM

Figure 27-125.  Pitch Disconnect Clutch Mechanism Component Location Index

27-190 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-38-00 PITCH Pitch Disconnect Clutch

DISCONNECT SYSTEM Mechanism
Refer to Figure 27-125. Pitch Disconnect
INTRODUCTION Clutch Mechanism Component Location Index.

The pitch disconnect system allows the The clutch mechanism connects the left and
left and right elevator control circuits to be right sides of the torque tube.
disconnected from each other in the event of a

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

jam. The remaining operational circuit controls The clutch mechanism is located in the torque
the pitch of the aircraft. tube connecting the two control columns below
the flight compartment floor. When the PITCH
GENERAL DISC handle is pulled to the limit and rotated
90°, the cable operates the clutch lever and
Refer to Figure 27-125. Pitch Disconnect cam assembly. The cam followers withdraw
Clutch Mechanism Component Location Index. the spring loaded clutch from the clutch plate.
This disconnects the two columns.
If a jam occurs in either control circuit, the
PITCH DISC handle in the flight compartment When the handle is in the engaged “IN” position,
is pulled. This will disconnect the left elevator the clutch and clutch plate are kept in positive
circuit from the right elevator circuit. contact with each other by the clutch spring.

The pitch disconnect system has the following To re-engage the pitch disconnect mechanism,
components: the pilot and co-pilot control columns must
be placed in the neutral position. Then rotate
•• Pitch disconnect handle The PITCH DISC handle 90° and lower to the
engaged position. When the control columns
• Pitch disconnect clutch mechanism.
are properly aligned, the clutch returns to the
engaged position by the clutch springs.
Pitch Disconnect Handle
Refer to Figure 27-125. Pitch Disconnect
Clutch Mechanism Component Location Index.

The PITCH DISC handle operates the pitch

disconnect system.

The PITCH DISC handle is located in the

flight compartment, on the left side of the
center console. A pin in the shaft of the pitch
disconnect handle rides in a slot in the shaft
housing. When the handle is pulled out and
rotated 90° the pin moves into the slot to keep
the handle locked in the disengaged position.

The PITCH DISC handle has a cable routed

below the flight compartment floor and is
connected to the clutch. When the handle is
pulled, the clutch is disengaged. Adjustment of
the pitch disconnect system is by a turnbuckle
installed in the cable.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-191

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATIONAL CHECK OF THE NOTES

ELEVATOR CONTROL PITCH
DISCONNECT MECHANISM
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

The operational check of the pitch disconnect

system is done with hydraulic power is off.

Pull the pitch disconnect handle and turn

90° counterclockwise to disconnect the pitch
control system.

•• Move the pilot control column fully

forward and aft, make sure the co-pilot
control column does not move.
•• Move the co-pilot control column fully
forward and aft, make sure the pilot
control column does not move.
Turn the pitch disconnect handle 90° clockwise
and make sure the pitch disconnect handle is
fully retracts.

•• Move the pilot or co-pilot control

column fully forward and aft to make
sure the pitch disconnect clutch and the
control columns move together.

27-192 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-193

27-194 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

L FLAP POSITION INDICATION R FLAP POSITION INDICATION

FLAP INDICATOR
0 5
10

DASH 8 Q400
35 FLAP LEVER
FPIU
10
5 15
0 35 FCECU

ARMING
IFC 1
SWITCH
IFC 2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FLAP LEVER RVDT FLAP

DRIVE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

C & W PANEL
FLAP
ARM COMMAND
POWER
WOW
LANDING GEAR
PSEU WARNING HORN
LEFT FLAP POSITION FEEDBACK RIGHT FLAP POSITION FEEDBACK

PTU

FCU #1 ENG
HYD PUMP
ON > 5°

STBY
HYD
PUMP
SUPPLY
HYDRAULIC POWER
FPU
TRANSMISSION SHAFTS RETURN ACTUATORS

#9 #8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9
#4 #3 #2 #1 #1 #2 #3 #4

FLAP FLAP
POSITION POSITION
DUAL DUAL
RVDT RIGHT OUTBOARD RVDT
LEFT OUTBOARD LEFT INBOARD
RIGHT INBOARD FLAP
FLAP FLAP
FLAP

TORSION TORSION
BAR BAR
fs794a01.cgm

Figure 27-126.  Wing Flap System

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-51-00 FLAP CONTROL NOTES

SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The flap control system operates the flaps during
extension, retraction from the selected position.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The flap control system uses a digital position
control loop to operate the flap surfaces by
modulating the flow to the hydraulic motor of
the flap power unit.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-126. Wing Flap System.

The flap control system monitors flap position,

selection signals and produces the output
signals to the Flap Power Unit (FPU) to control
flap movement.

The flap control is comprised of the following

components:

•• Flap Control Unit (FCU)

•• Flap selector lever/quadrant
• Flap lever transducer.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-195

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FCECU
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

FCU

D
FW

UNDERFLOOR TRAY

3
LEGEND
2
1. Electrical Connectors.
2. Mounting Bracket.
3. Flap Control Unit Box.

D
FW

ft196a01.cgm

Figure 27-127.  Flap Control Unit (FCU)

27-196 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Flap Control Unit (FCU)
Refer to:
•• Figure 27-127. F
 lap Control Unit
(FCU).
• Figure 27-128. F
 lap Control Unit

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Block Diagram.

The FCU provides control, monitoring, and

caution indications of the flap control system.

The FCU is located below the cabin floor. The

FCU receives its power from the 28 VDC left
essential FLAP CONT circuit breaker.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-197

27-198 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Flap Selector
Flap Selector Maint Panel Left Wing
Arming Switch PSEU WOW
RVDT NVM Reset RVDT
Ground

DASH 8 Q400
RH Wing
28 VDC
RVDT
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Flap Position Solenoid Valve
Select on FPU
Flap
Control
Unit

Servo Valve Flap Power

in FPU
Flap Drive

Pressure Switch EDP No.1

in FPU Pressure
Take Off
ARINC 429
Warning

fs0c0a01.cgm

Figure 27-128.  Flap Control Unit Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-129. Flap System Caution The FLAP DRIVE caution light illuminates for
Panel. the faults that follow:

Continuous Monitoring is performed by the •• Hydraulic pressure at FPU without

FCU to check for system failures. Flap failures selection command
detected by the FCU command FPU shutdown
•• Flap stall
through the following actions:
•• Flap position output from the FCU is
•• De-energizing the FPU solenoid valve not valid

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

• De-energizing the FPU EHSV. •• ARINC 429 transmission integrity.
Only during Power-On BIT and
If a failure locks the flap system, the FLAP functional checks
POWER caution light will illuminate. All
• Read Only Memory failure in
further flap movements are inhibited. If an
microprocessor of FCU.
asymmetry or uncommanded movement is
detected, the FCU latch relay is opened.
The power On Built-In-Test is performed for
5 seconds at each on ground power up. It will
The latch relay can only be reset with the
check the FCU components for dormant failures.
aircraft on the ground. This is done with the
maintenance panel NVM reset button after
mechanically correcting the fault.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE LEGEND
The FLAP POWER caution light will remain 1. Flap Drive (Amber).
on. It is reset at the next on ground FCU 2. Flap Power (Amber).
Power On BIT.

The FLAP POWER caution light will illuminate

for the following faults:

•• Flap asymmetry #1 STALL

STAL
T L
F L
FAI
SYST FAIL
•• Flap un-commanded movement #2 STALL
STAL
T L
F L
FAI
SYST FAIL
•• Flap position transducer failure
PUSHER PARKIN
P
PARKINGG

•• Flap lever transducer failure F L

FAI
SYST FAIL BRAKE

INBD OUTBD
•• No hydraulic pressure after selection 1
ANTISKID ANTISKID

command FLAP
DRIVE
LDG GEAR
INOP
2
•• Select command and no arm signal NOSE FUELING
STEERING ON

•• Electrical power loss MAIN BAT

A
HOT
•• Servo valve drive failure
•• Micro-controller failure
(Watch dog intervention) CAUTION PANEL

• Latch relay open status.

Figure 27-129.  Flap System Caution Panel
If the flap system is operated in a degraded
mode, then the FLAP DRIVE caution light will
illuminate. The caution light will not extinguish
until the fault resets itself, or no longer exists.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-199

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

MIN

Flap Selector Position

R R Flap Selector Lever

A A
T T
I I
N N I
G G

FLIGHT
IDLE

DISC

Figure 27-130.  Flap Selector Quadrant

27-200 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Flap Selector Lever/Quadrant OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

Refer to Figure 27-130. Flap Selector Quadrant. FLAP CONTROL MODULE
The following is an abbreviated description of
The flap selector lever provides the flap
the maintenance practice and is intended for
selection command. The flap selector lever is
training purposes only. For a more detailed
located on the right side of the center console.
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
The flap selector lever moves in a detented

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

cam from 0° (fully retracted) through detents
•• Observe all electrical safety precautions
at 5°, 10°, 15° to a 35° setting (fully extended).
and energize the aircraft electrical
The flap selector lever must stop at each detent
systems.
in order to be moved to the next detent. The
lever has a spring-loaded cam follower, which •• Observe all safety precautions regarding
engages the cam detents at each selected moving control surfaces.
position. The cam follower is released from
•• Pressurize No.1 hydraulic system.
the detents by a trigger on the lever.
•• Make sure you cannot move the FLAP
The flap selector lever mechanically operates selector lever until you lift the trigger.
the flap lever transducer, which sends the flap
•• Move the lever to all the flap selectable
position demand signal to the FCU.
positions.
An arming switch is located on the flap selector • Do the electrical checks in all flap
lever. If the lever is in one of the five detented positions refer to TASK 27-50-00-760-801
positions and the arming switch is enabled,
then the enable signal to the FCU allows the
flaps to move to the selected position.

The flap selector lever is mechanically

connected to the rudder restrictor mechanism,
which restricts the rudder travel to 12 when the
flap lever is in the 0° position.

Flap Lever Transducer

Refer to Figure 27-130. Flap Selector Quadrant.

The flap lever transducer is a single section, five-

wire type RVDT. The RVDT is mechanically
operated by the flap selector lever, it receives
excitation from the FCU.

The RVDT senses the angular position of the

flap selector lever. The RVDT sends the position
data to the FCU. The FCU will also receives
secondary output signals from the flap position
sensors and calculates the difference between the
two signals. This difference is used by the FCU
to move the flaps to the selected position.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-201

27-202 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

RW H U A RW H
RW L V B RW L

(L7) RW A Y C RW A
RW B Z E RW B
FLAP CONT RW C A- D RW C
28 VDC 5A A +28 VDC IN
L ESS BUS B +28 VDC RTN
ROTARY VARIABLE
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER (RVDT)
LEFT DC CBP

DASH 8 Q400
GND/DC
DISCRETE O/P 4A C WOW
ARINC 429 U 114 FLAP MAINT
32-61 A1 PSEU
31-40 A1 IOM #1
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

RIGHT
4 T FL1 H FLAPS
12 I- FL1 L

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SOL VALVE C- A SOL VALVE
1 B- FL1 A RET D- B RET
3 C- FL1 B
2 D- FL1 C
EHSVH Z E EHSVH
9 EHSVL Y F EHSVL
33-11-00
10
NO PRESS SW A- D PRESS SW
6 D ARM SW LEFT
PRESS RET B- C PRESS RET
FLAPS

C FLAP POWER
ARM UNIT (FPU)
SWITCH C EDP NOP
29-11-00
D STBY HYD
FLAP LEVER
ROTARY
VARIABLE DIFFERENTIAL
TRANSFORMER (RVDT)

NVM RESET

A4 A1 GS1
S5
LW H W A LW H
DECK 1 LW L X B LW L
C
FLAP LW A V E LW A
51 L ASYFLTRST LW B W C LW B
102
101 LW C X D LW C

ROTARY VARIABLE
MAINTENANCE PANEL FLAP CONTROL UNIT DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER (RVDT)

Figure 27-131.  Flap Control System - Electrical Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• Remove hydraulic pressure

•• On the maintenance panel do as follows:
OPERATION
•• Set CDS GND MAINT
Normal Flap Operation •• Set selector switch to the FLAP position
Refer to Figure 27-131. Flap Control System -
•• Push and hold NVM RESET switch for
Electrical Schematic.
2 seconds
•• After 10 seconds open FLAPS CONT

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

When the flap lever is moved to a new selected
position the FCU receives feedback from the CB (L7)
following:
•• Close the CB (L7)
•• The flap lever RVDT •• After approximately 5 seconds make
sure the FLAP POWER and FLAP
• A ground from the arming switch.
DRIVE caution lights come ON for
approximately 3 seconds
THE FCU outputs signals to, and receives
feedback from the following: •• On ARCDU select FLAPS page
•• Make sure there are no PRESENT
•• The open solenoid that allows hydraulic
FAULTS and no faults in FAULT
pressure to the FPU. The pressure switch
HISTORY
signals the FCU that hydraulic pressure
is available. •• M a k e s u r e t h a t o n t h e S Y S T E M
CALIBRATION page the values are
•• The Electro Hydraulic Shutoff Valve
within correct range
(EHSV) that is positioned to either
extend or retract the flaps by the FCU. •• Do the above check in all the other flap
lever positions
As the flaps either extend or retract, the Channel
A of the RVDTs at flap actuators No.4 in each •• R E M E M B E R : M o v e m e n t o f t h e
wing, feedback flap position to the FCU. FLAP selector lever with no hydraulic
pressure will cause faults to show on the
When the flaps reach the position required, the FAULTS page
FCU removes the signal, to de-energize the
•• Each time you move the FLAPS selector
solenoid valve, and commands the EHSV to
lever you must make the OTHER
the neutral position.
SYSTEMS and FLAPS page selection
on the CDS again
Hydraulic pressure is removed from the FPU
and the irreversible flap actuators hold the flaps •• This will show the new values of the
in the new position. flap lever transducer
• Retract the flaps.
WING FLAP SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL CHECKS
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Move the flaps to the 35° position

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-203

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE NOTES

WING FLAPS
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Pressurize No.1 hydraulic system

NOTE
A crew member is necessary
near the flaps to monitor flap
movement.
NOTE
Start the test with the flaps at the
0º position

•• Obtain visual clearance to lower the flaps

•• Make sure the FLAP POWER and
FLAP DRIVE caution lights do not
come on during the test.
•• Select the flap lever to the 5º, 10º, 15º
and 35º
• • Make sure the flaps move smoothly to
the selected positions with no unusual
noises.
•• Start the flap retraction test at the 350
position and then move to all selected
positions.
•• Make sure flaps retract smoothly and
with no unusual noises.

27-204 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-205

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-52-00 FLAP DRIVE The flap drive system has the following
components:
SYSTEM
•• FPU
INTRODUCTION •• Transmission shafts
The flap drive system is responsible for •• Torsion bars
moving the flaps to new selections and holding
•• Flap actuators
that position.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

• Flap tracks.
GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-132. Flap Drive.

The system is electronically controlled and

hydro-mechanically operated. It is designed
to move the four flap sections together to the
position set by the flap selector lever.

No. 1 Flap Track.

No. 1 Flap Actuator.

No. 2 Flap Actuator.

No. 2 Flap Track.

No. 3 Flap Track.

No. 3 Flap Actuator.

No. 4 Flap Track.

Transmission Shafts.

No. 5 Flap Track.

ft525a01.cgm

Figure 27-132.  Flap Drive

27-206 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The energized solenoid valve allows the No.1

hydraulic pressure to spool the FPU SOV open.
Refer to Figure 27-133. Flap Drive System. This ports hydraulic pressure to the FPU EHSV.

The FPU turns two torsion bars that turn 16 The new flap position from the flap lever
transmission shafts installed on the wing aft transducer is processed by the FCU and converted
spars. The transmission shafts operate eight into a ramp command. The FCU generates the
irreversible ballscrew flap actuators which drive analog EHSV current command to control the
the four sections of flap. The 4 sections of flap hydraulic fluid flow to the FPU hydraulic motor

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

move along 10 tracks located under the wings. for direction and speed of actuation.

Flap actuation begins when the FCU receives At the end of actuation, the FCU de-energizes
the input signals from the flap lever transducer the FPU solenoid valve. This ports hydraulic
and the wing flap position transducers. Based system to return closing the FPU SOV.
on flap lever transducer and flap position
transducer signals, the FCU commands the
FPU solenoid valve and the FPU EHSV.

Left Wing Rear Spar.

Right Torsion Bar.

Flap Power Unit.

Left Torsion Bar.

Flap Transmission Shaft No. 1.

Flap Transmission Shaft No. 2.

Flap Actuator No. 1.

Flap Transmission Shaft No. 3.

Flap Transmission Shaft No. 4.

FW
D
Flap Actuator No. 2. ft204a01.cgm

Figure 27-133.  Flap Drive System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-207

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FLAP POWER UNIT

FW
D
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Mounting Bracket

Solenoid

Pressure Switch

Electrical Connector

FW
D

EHSV
Splined Coupling

Pressure Port

Return Port
Drain Port
ft093a01.cgm

Figure 27-134.  Flap Power Unit

27-208 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Refer to Figure 27-135. Flap Power Unit

Schematic.
Flap Power Unit (FPU)
Hydraulic fluid is sent through a filter and a
Refer to Figure 27-134. Flap Power Unit. restrictor at the inlet port. A return line carries
the hydraulic fluid back to the system reservoir.
The FPU converts No.1 hydraulic system A plastic drain line carries any internal fluid
pressure to rotary mechanical power to operate leakage from the FPU to an overboard drain.
the flap actuators.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The pressure switch is located downstream
The FPU is located on the wing aft spar, to the of the shutoff valve monitors No.1 hydraulic
right of the aircraft center line. system pressure. This is a feedback signal to
the FCU of solenoid and shutoff valve status.
The FPU has a hydraulic module and a gearbox.
The FCU commands the two-stage EHSV to
The hydraulic module includes the following actuate the flap drive system.
components:
The motor is a cartridge construction axial
•• Inlet filter piston. The motor drives the gearbox at rated
•• Solenoid and shutoff valve speed of 7500 RPM.
•• Pressure switch The gearbox has a two-stage spur reduction
•• Two-stage EHSV geartrain housed in an aluminum casing. The
total speed reduction equals a ratio of 1:10 and
• Hydraulic motor. output speed is 750 RPM.

The gearbox is lubricated for life.

TORQUE
MOTOR SERVO VALVE

SOLENOID PRESSURE
VALVE SWITCH

HYDRAULIC
POWER FLAP
SUPPLY EXTEND LINE
INLET
FILTER HYDRAULIC
FLAP RETRACT LINE MOTOR
SHUT-OFF
RETURN VALVE

MOTOR DRAIN
fsu74a01a.cgm

Figure 27-135.  Flap Power Unit Schematic

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-209

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Transmission Shafts
Refer to Figure 27-136. Flap Transmission Shafts.

The transmission shafts transmit the

mechanical power generated from the FPU to
the eight flap actuators.

The 16 transmission shafts are located along

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the aft spars of the wings. Nine shafts extend

outward from the FPU along the left wing aft
spar to the four flap actuators. Seven shafts
extend outward from the FPU along the right
wing to the four right flap actuators. The shafts
are high strength aluminum tube assemblies.

FW
D

NOTE
No. 1 Shaft Shown.
ft212a01.cgm No. 8 Shaft (LH and RH) Similar.

Figure 27-136.  Flap Transmission Shafts

27-210 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Torsion Bars
Refer to Figure 27-137. Flap Torsion Bars.

The two torsion bars transmit the high speed,

low torque rotating force generated by the FPU
to the transmission shafts and flap actuators.

Each torsion bar is an aluminum alloy shaft

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

with external splined connections.

FW
D

Flap Power Unit Assembly

3
1
2

D
1
FW
2

ft085a01.cgm

Figure 27-137.  Flap Torsion Bars

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-211

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Flap Actuators LUBRICATION OF FLAP BALL

SCREW ACTUATORS
The flap actuators move the flap surfaces to a
selected position. They also keep the selected The following is an abbreviated description of
position against the aerodynamic forces acting the maintenance practice and is intended for
on the flap surfaces. training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
There are four flap actuators installed on the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.
each wing. The flap actuators are mechanical
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

units designed to a convert high speed, low •• Observe all hydraulic precautions
torque rotary drive to a low speed, high
•• Pressurize No.1 hydraulic system
torque linear drive.
•• Observe all moving control surfaces
Each actuator transfers the rotary force to precautions
the next actuator. The No.1 and No.2 flap
•• Move the flaps to 35º position
actuators on each wing are identical and
operate the inboard flap section. The No.3 •• Remove hydraulic pressure
and No.4 flap actuators on each wing are
•• With a cloth moistened in approved
constructed slightly different from each
cleaning solvent, remove contamination
other and operate the outboard flap section.
around grease fittings. Make sure the
area is dry
Each flap actuator includes the listed components:
•• Check for excessive amount of grease
•• No-back/torque limiter device on the ballscrew shaft (seal failure)
•• Wormgear •• Clean the ballscrew shaft with lint free
cloth
• Ballscrew and ballnut.
•• Install grease dams to the ballnut and
The no-back/torque limiter device limits the ballscrew shaft
load transferred from the transmission shaft to
•• Install and tighten clamp.
the flap actuator and supplies irreversibility in
both directions of rotation. The no-back device
consists of two springs with input and output
CAUTION:
elements. The spring provides the irreversibility. DO NOT MIX GREASE FROM
The torque limiter device trips before reaching DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS
loads that would damage the system. OR SPECIFICATIONS.

The rotary motion of the worm gear disengages •• Use a grease gun to pump grease into
the no-back/torque limiter device and is the fitting until new grease comes out
transmitted to the ballnut. of the vent hole
•• Remove the clamps, grease dams and
The ballnut changes the rotary motion into
excess grease
linear motion of the ballscrew. The ballscrew
shaft moves the flap surfaces in the flap tracks •• With the grease gun apply more grease
forward or aft. The dog stops of the ballnut to the fittings
are machined to provide ice scrapping. Once
•• Check for grease leakage at the dynamic
the movement of the flap surface has stopped
seal of the ballnut.
the no-back/torque limiter device reengages to
supply irreversibility. Maximum flap travel is
limited by end stops.

27-212 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Flap Tracks cantilever type, roller carriage tracks attached

to the wing rear spar extending aft from the
Refer to: bottom of the wing surface.
•• Figure 27-138. Flap Tracks.
The roller carriage assemblies use four
•• Figure 27-139. No.3 and 4 Flap Rollers. different types of rollers to support the flaps.
• Figure 27-140. Flap Carriage. Deadweight rollers are used for support when
the aircraft is on the ground.
The flap tracks control the incidence angle of

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the flaps during flap deployment. The three remaining rollers are used during
flight. Sideload rollers prevent lateral
There are five flap tracks on each wing. Flap movement of the flaps. “0 to 16°” rollers
tracks No.1 and No.2 are cam type tracks, support the flaps to the 15° decent position.
which support the inboard flap section. Flap “16 to 35°” rollers support the flaps from the
track No.1 is located on the side of the fuselage. 15° decent position to full extension of 35°.
Flap track No.2 is located on the inboard side
of the nacelle. In the event of roller failure, the outboard flap
is retained to tracks No.3 and No.5 by fail-safe
The inboard flaps rollers engage in tracks No.1 cables, the inboard flap is retained to tracks
and No.2. The rollers give support for the flap No.1 and No.2 by fail-safe fittings.
and allow for smooth extension and retraction
of the flap. Rubbing pads are supplied to prevent excessive
side movement of the flaps in the tracks. In
Flap tracks No.3, No.4 and No.5 support the the fully retracted position, the leading edge of
outboard flap section. Flap track No.3 is a cam the flap aligns with the upper flap shroud on
type track and is located on the outboard side the wing to give an aerodynamically smooth
of the nacelle. Flap tracks No.4 and No.5 are wing surface.

5 LEGEND

1. No. 1 Flap Track.

4
2. No. 2 Flap Track.
3 3. No. 3 Flap Track.
2 4. No. 4 Flap Track.
5. No. 5 Flap Track.

2
3

fsq01a01.cgm

Figure 27-138.  Flap Tracks

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-213

27-214 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

LEGEND

FW
1. Deadweight Roller.
D 2. 0° Roller.

DASH 8 Q400
A 3. Sideload Roller. 1
4. 35° Roller.
A
5. Deadweight Roller.
6. 16° Roller.
7. No. 4 Flap Track Carriage.
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

8. No. 3 Flap Track Rollers.

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

8

2
8

7
FWD

INB
3
D

D 6
FW

A A 4

VIEW LOOKING AT
fst41a01.cgm
OUTBOARD FLAP END 5
A

Figure 27-139.  No.3 and 4 Flap Rollers

 2
3

DASH 8 Q400
A
1 4
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

5

LEGEND 6
1. Cable.
2. Deadweight Roller.
3. Cable.
4. Serrated Plate. 13
5. Cable Fitting.
6. 0° Rollers.
7. Cable Fitting.
8. Sideload Roller. IN
BD
7
9. 35° Roller.
10. Deadweight Rollers. 12 8
D
11. Serrated Plate. FW
12. 16° Rollers.
13. No. 5 Flap Track Carriage. 9
11
10
A
27-215

Figure 27-140.  Flap Carriage

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-216 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

L FLAP POSITION INDICATION R FLAP POSITION INDICATION

FLAP INDICATOR
0 5
10

DASH 8 Q400
35 FLAP LEVER
FPIU
10
5 15
0 35 FCECU

ARMING
IFC 1
SWITCH
IFC 2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FLAP LEVER RVDT FLAP

DRIVE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

C & W PANEL
FLAP
ARM COMMAND
POWER
WOW
LANDING GEAR
PSEU WARNING HORN
LEFT FLAP POSITION FEEDBACK RIGHT FLAP POSITION FEEDBACK

PTU

FCU #1 ENG
HYD PUMP
ON > 5°

STBY
HYD
PUMP
SUPPLY
HYDRAULIC POWER
FPU
TRANSMISSION SHAFTS RETURN ACTUATORS

#9 #8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9
#4 #3 #2 #1 #1 #2 #3 #4

FLAP FLAP
POSITION POSITION
DUAL DUAL
RVDT RIGHT OUTBOARD RVDT
LEFT OUTBOARD LEFT INBOARD
RIGHT INBOARD FLAP
FLAP FLAP
FLAP

TORSION TORSION
BAR BAR
fs794a01.cgm

Figure 27-141.  Wing Flap System

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-53-00 FLAP NOTES

POSITION INDICATION
INTRODUCTION
The flap position indication system supplies flap
position data to the flight compartment indicator
and interfaces with other aircraft systems.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-141. Wing Flap System.

This system supplies data to the:

•• FCU
•• FCECU and
• IFCs.

The data is used for flap position monitoring

and recording.

The flap position indication system is

comprised of the following components:

•• Flap Position Indication Unit (FPIU)

• Flap position transducer.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-217

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer to Figure 27-142. Flap Position
Indication Unit.

The FPIU is located below the cabin floor. The

two flap position transducers are installed on
the outboard flap actuators.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

The FPIU sends RVDT analog signals to the

Flight Data Processing System (FDPS) in
IFC1 and 2.

The FDPS then converts these analog signals

into digital signals for display on MFD2 as flap
degrees of indication.
D
FW
The FCU uses RVDT channel A signals with
flap position command signals to calculate and
monitor the speed and direction of the flaps to
the new position.

UNDER FLOOR AREA

Flap Position Indication Unit

Mounting Bracket D
FW

Electrical Connectors

ft239a01.cgm

Figure 27-142.  Flap Position Indication Unit

27-218 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The FPIU sends the analog position signals to

IFC1-2 for Stall Protection Modules (SPM) 1-2
Flap Position Indication Unit (FPIU) to calculate the stall angle.
Refer to Figure 27-143. Flap Position Indication The FPIU sends signals to the FCECU for
Unit Block Diagram. scheduling default values when airspeed is
not valid. This FPIU data is also used for flap
The FPIU supplies flap position data to the compensation trim to the elevator.
MFD indicator and interfaces with other

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

aircraft systems. The FPIU is divided The FPIU sends discrete signals to IFC1-2 and
into two separate and independent analog FCECU for flap position health.
channels (Left and Right) on a single printed
circuit board. The flap indication system FPIU converts
RVDT analog position signals of > 7.5 and
Each channel in the FPIU performs the > 25 into digital format and sends these signals
following functions: to the ADU 1-2.
•• Gives flap position indication to the The ADU 1-2 need to correct for the errors
IFC and the FCECU created to static air pressure at > 7.5 and
•• Interfaces with, and supplies electrical > 25 flap. The ADU 1-2 use these signals for
excitation to the flap position RVDT corrections to airspeed and altitude.
•• Demodulates the signal from the flap
position RVDT
•• Performs an analog monitor of its
applicable RVDT
• Supplies signals to the SPM 1-2 and
ADU 1-2.

Channel Channel
Left Flap Position 1 2 Right Flap Position
IFC 1 IFC 1

Left Flap Position Right Flap Position

IFC 2 Left Position Healthy Right Position Healthy IFC 2

FCECU Left
Left Flap Position
FPIU Right Flap Position
FCECU Right
Left Position Healthy Right Position Healthy

Left Flap > 7.5º Right Flap > 7.5º

ADU 1 Left Flap > 25º Right Flap > 25º ADU 2

RVDT Left Left Flap Position Right Flap Position RVDT Right
B B

Figure 27-143.  Flap Position Indication Unit Block Diagram

fs0c3a01.cgm

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-219

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Flap Position Transducer

Refer to Figure 27-144. Flap Position Transducer.

The flap position transducers provide the actual

flap position to the FPIU and the FCU.

The two flap position transducers are installed

on the outboard flap actuator of each wing.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Each flap position transducer is a two section

RVDT consisting of channel A and B.

Channel A is electrically supplied by the FCU

and supplies flap position feedback to the flap
control loop.

Channel B is electrically supplied by the FPIU

and supplies flap position data for indication
purposes.

A NOTE
Right side shown.
Left side similar.

B
D
FW

A OUTBOARD FLAP ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY

2
3
C

LEGEND
TBD 1. Red Dot On Transducer Shaft.
OU
2. 0° Flaps.
3. Red Band On Transducer Housing.
4 4. 35° Flaps.

C
B FLAP POSITION TRANSDUCER
ftc01a01.cgm

Figure 27-144.  Flap Position Transducer

27-220 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

Refer to Figure 27-145. Flap Position
Indication/Multi-Function Display.
The MFD2 FLAP DEG indicator displays flap
angle in degrees of incidence as an analog
indication. The gauge scale has the following
degree indication positions; 0°, 5°, 10°, 15°,

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

and 35°.

The FDPS displays an arrow indicator to

the appropriate degree of flap incidence as
signalled by the FPIU.

ELECTRICAL

MAIN 00
AUX 00
STBY 00

ESS
MAIN
SEC

PSI x 1000

Flap Position Inidication

Figure 27-145.  Flap Position Indication/Multi-Function Display

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-221

27-222 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

ELECTRICAL
DC EXT AC EXT
(F7) POWER POWER
+28 VDC FLAP POS IND R
R ESS BUS 2A D 28VL2 BATT APU GEN AC GEN 1

DASH 8 Q400
E 28VL2RET IFC1R F 67 SPM #1/IOM #1 LOAD ¡ C LOAD VOLT LOAD
IFC1RET G 66
MAIN +1. 00 +22 +1. 00 A 115 . 06
RIGHT DC CBP IFC2R H 56 SPM #2/IOM #2 AUX +22 B 115 . 06
IFC2RRET J 55 - . 34
STBY - . 34 +22 DC GEN C 115 . 06
RFPHEAL1 M 57 SPM #2/IOM #2
RIGHT WING 1 LOAD 2
ARINC HI 315
A429 MFD 2 LO 314 DC BUS +1. 00 . 06 AC GEN 1
RWMH F U RWMH L VOLT R VOLT LOAD
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

RWML G V RWML 31-41 A2 IOP #2 ESS 28. 1 28. 1 A 115 . 06

TRU
RWMA H W RWMA IFC1L F 68 MAIN 28. 1 28. 1 1 LOAD 2 B 115 . 06
SPM #1/IOM #1
RWMB J X RWMB IFC1LRET G 67
SEC 28. 1 28. 1 +1. 00 +1. 00 C 115 . 06
RWMC K Y RWMC
IFC2L H 57

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPM #2/IOM #2
IFC2LRET J 56
ROTARY VARIABLE ARINC HI 315 HI
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER A429 MFD 2 ARINC A429 MFD 2
LO 314 LO
(RVDT)
LFPHEAL1 M 58 SPM 1/IOM 2/IOM 1
LEFT WING 31-41 A1 IOP #1

LWMH F U LWMH AVIONICS RACK HIRF ENCLOSURE

LWML G V LWML SPOILERS
0 5
LWMA J W LWMA FLAP 10
RUD
LWMB H X LWMB DEG LO LI RI RO
LWMC K Y LWMC
35 L R
ROTARY VARIABLE ELEV ELEV
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER HYD PRESS PSI HYD QTY %
(RVDT) PK BRK STBY 1 2 3 1 2 3
3000 0 3000 3000 0 100 100 100

(M7) CO-PILOT MFD PAGE 1

+28 VDC FLAP POS IND L REFER ALSO TO CO-PILOT MFD PAGE 2
L ESS BUS 2A D 28VL1
E 28VL1RET

FCELFT N 51 (HI)
LEFT DC CBP FLAP POS L
FCELRET P 61 (LO)

LFPHEAL2 R 62 FLAP HEALTHY L

FCERGT N 51 HI
FLAP POS R
FCERRET P 61 LO

RFPHEAL2 R 62 FLAP HEALTHY R

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS)

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
FLAP POSITION
INDICATION UNIT (FPIU)

Figure 27-146.  Flap Position Indication - Electrical Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTES
Normal Flap Position Indication
Operation
Refer to Figure 27-146. Flap Position Indication
- Electrical Schematic.

The FPIU sends excitation current to, and

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

receives feedback from the RVDT’s at
No.4 flap actuator on each wing. The right
side signal is sent to the MFD for the flap
position display. The left side is used if the
right side fails.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-223

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-54-00 FLAP SURFACES NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-147. Flaps.

The flaps are single slotted, high lift Fowler

type flap. The inboard flaps have a constant
chord cross-section of approximately 39% of
the total wing chord. The outboard flaps have
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

a tapered chord cross-section of approximately

39% of the total wing chord.

In the fully retracted position, the flap

leading edge aligns with the wing to give an
aerodynamically surface.

LEGEND

1. Outboard Flap.
2. Inboard Flap.

1
NOTE
Left side shown.
Right side similar.
fs525a01.cgm

Figure 27-147.  Flaps

27-224 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ERASE THE DATA FROM Procedure

THE CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC •• On the maintenance panel, set the
SYSTEM (CDS) - FLAPS CDS GND MAINT toggle switch to
SYSTEM (FLAPS) the “up” position and make sure the
CDS GND MAINT light comes on. On
The following is an abbreviated description of the CDS Maintenance panel, turn the
the maintenance practice and is intended for system selector rotary switch to the
training purposes only. For a more detailed FLAP position. Make sure the system

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

description of the practice, refer to the task in selector LED is on. Push the NVM
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. RESET (Guarded) switch. On the FLAP
DRIVE SYSTEM PRESENT FAULTS
General page, make sure the CDS shows the NO
FAULTS REPORTED message.
•• Obey all the electrical/electronic safety
precautions. •• On the CDS Maintenance panel, turn
the system selector rotary switch to the
•• Energize the aircraft electrical system. OFF position. Make sure the system
• Put the aircraft in the weight-on-wheels selector LED is off.
condition. •• On the maintenance panel, set the
CDS GND MAINT toggle switch to
the “down” position and make sure the
CDS GND MAINT light goes off.
•• De-energize the electrical system.
•• Remove all tools, equipment, and
unwanted materials from the work area.

ECS PRESENT
FLAP FLT R CH 1/3
DRIVE SYSTEM 2/7
CDS GND MAINT PROP DEICE CAL PRESENT FAULTS
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2
#1 #2 XXXX - R NAPRSOV
ECS AUTO NVM RESET
NO FAULTS REPORTED
ON FAIL PSEU XXXX - APU DIFF PR
XXXX - CAB ACM
PSS
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
PSEU
OFF MAINT OPER XXXX - CAB TSOV
FLAP
PAA
PROP TEST XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
DEICE 2
28 VDC
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
CPC PROP XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
DEICE 1 XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
ECS AFR
FLT DEICE XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
CTL XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP

Figure 27-148.  Task 45-00-27-743-802 CDS System Pages Indications

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-225

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ERASE THE DATA FROM the FLT CTL position. Make sure the
system selector LED is on. Push the
THE CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC NVM RESET (Guarded) switch. On
SYSTEM (CDS) FLIGHT the FCECU PRESENT FAULTS page,
CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) make sure the CDS shows the NO
FAULT REPORTED message.
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for •• On the CDS Maintenance panel, turn
training purposes only. For a more detailed the system selector rotary switch to the
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

description of the practice, refer to the task in OFF position. Make sure the system
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. selector LED is off.
•• On the maintenance panel, set the
General CDS GND MAINT toggle switch to
the “down” position and make sure the
•• Obey all the electrical/electronic safety
CDS GND MAINT light goes off.
precautions.
•• De-energize the electrical system.
•• Energize the aircraft electrical system.
•• Remove all tools, equipment, and
• Put the aircraft in the weight-on-wheels
unwanted materials from the work area.
condition.

Procedure
•• On the maintenance panel, set the
CDS GND MAINT toggle switch to
the “up” position and make sure the
CDS GND MAINT light comes on.
On the CDS Maintenance panel, turn
the system selector rotary switch to

FCECU SYS FAULTS 1/4

CDS GND MAINT PROP DEICE CAL PRESENT FAULTS

#1 #2
ECS AUTO NVM RESET
ON FAIL PSEU

NO FAULTS REPORTED
PSS PSEU
OFF MAINT OPER
FLAP
PAA
PROP TEST
DEICE 2
28 VDC
CPC PROP
DEICE 1
ECS AFR
FLT DEICE
CTL

Figure 27-149.  Task 45-00-27-743-801 CDS System Pages Indications

27-226 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RETRIEVAL OF DATA FROM The CDS main menu is displayed as follows:

THE CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC •• Push the LSK 2L to access the OTHER
SYSTEM (CDS) FLAPS SYSTEM SYSTEM menu. Page 1 of the CDS
(FLAPS) OTHER SYSTEMS menu is displayed.
Push the NEXT key to access page 2 of
The following is an abbreviated description of 2. Push the LSK 1L to access the FLAP
the maintenance practice and is intended for DRIVE SYSTEM PRESENT FAULTS
training purposes only. For a more detailed page, 1 of 3. If no faults are reported,

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

description of the practice, refer to the task in the CDS will show a NO FAULTS
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2. REPORTED message.

General
ECS OTHER
PRESENT FLT R
SYSTEM 1 CH 1/2
2/7
•• Obey all the electrical/electronic safety < EMU
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2 ANTI-SKID >
precautions XXXX - R NAPRSOV
XXXX - APU DIFF PR
•• Energize the aircraft electrical system < FCS- CAB ACMICE PROTECTION >
XXXX
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
• Put the aircraft in the weight-on-wheels XXXX - CAB TSOV
condition. < ECS
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2 APU >
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
Procedure < TMCU1
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP TMCU2 >
XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
•• On the maintenance panel, set the CDS XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I
GND MAINT toggle switch to the “up”
position and make sure the CDS GND
MAINT light comes on. ECS OTHER
PRESENT FLT R
SYSTEM 2 CH 2/2
2/7

•• Set either ARCDU to the ON position < FLAPS

XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2
and push the MAINT key. XXXX - R NAPRSOV
XXXX - APU DIFF PR
< CABIN
XXXX PRESS
- CAB ACM CONTROL
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB TSOV
< AUXILIARY
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
CDS XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
< AVIONICS I

ECS PRESENT
FLAP FLT R CH 1/
DRIVE SYSTEM 2/7
< OTHER SYSTEMS PRESENT FAULTS
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2
XXXX - R NAPRSOV
NO FAULTS REPORTED
XXXX - APU DIFF PR
< AVIONICS DATA XXXX - CAB ACM
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB TSOV
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I

Figure 27-150.  Task 45-00-27-742-802 CDS System Pages Indications (1 of 2)

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-227

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• If faults are recorded the menu shows •• On the maintenance panel, set the
the present list of faults in the order of CDS GND MAINT toggle switch to
newest fault at the top, to the oldest fault the “down” position and make sure the
at the bottom. Push the NEXT key on CDS GND MAINT light goes off.
the ARCDU to get to the FLAP DRIVE
•• De-energize the electrical system.
SYSTEM FAULT HISTORY page, 2
of 3. If no faults are reported, the CDS •• Remove all tools, equipment, and
will show a NO FAULT REPORTED unwanted materials from the work area.
message. If faults are recorded the menu
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

shows the list of faults in the order of

newest fault at the top, to the oldest
fault at the bottom. Push the NEXT key
to show the FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM,
SYSTEM CALIBRATION page 3 of 3.
The number below the TRANSDUCERS
indicate the angular position of the flap
in degrees and the number associated
with the FLAP LEVER TRANSDUCER
indicate the angular position of the flap
lever in degrees.

ECS PRESENT
FLAP FLT R CH 1/3
DRIVE SYSTEM 2/7
PRESENT FAULTS
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2
XXXX - R NAPRSOV
UNCOMMANDED MOVEMENT
XXXX - APU DIFF PR
XXXX - CAB ACM
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB TSOV
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I

ECS PRESENT
FLAP FLT R CH 2/3
DRIVE SYSTEM 2/7 ECS PRESENT
FLAP FLT R CH 3/3
DRIVE SYSTEM 2/7
PRESENT FAULTS SYSTEM CALIBRATION
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2 XXXX - ECU DIG CH
RANGE OF 2SIGNALS
XXXX - R NAPRSOV XXXX - R NAPRSOV
- 1 TO 11
NO FAULTS REPORTED
XXXX - APU DIFF PR XXXX - APU DIFF PR
XXXX - CAB ACM LEFT -POSITION
XXXX CAB ACM TRANSDUCER
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP 72
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB TSOV XXXX - CAB TSOV
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2 RIGHT- ECU
XXXX POSITION
ANLG CHTRANSDUCER
2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW 7
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
FLAP LEVER TRANSDUCER
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP XXXX - CAB CMP -OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I I

Figure 27-151.  Task 45-00-27-742-802 CDS System Pages Indications (2 of 2)

27-228 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RETRIEVAL OF DATA FROM •• Push the LSK 2L to access the OTHER

SYSTEM menu. Page 1 of the CDS
THE CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC OTHER SYSTEMS menu is displayed.
SYSTEM (CDS) FLIGHT Push the LSK 2L to access page 1 of 4,
CONTROL SYSTEM (FCS) the FCS list of recorded faults. If no faults
are reported, the CDS will show a NO
The following is an abbreviated description of PRESENT FAULTS message. If faults
the maintenance practice and is intended for are recorded the menu shows the present
training purposes only. For a more detailed list of faults in the order of oldest fault at

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

description of the practice, refer to the task in the top, to the newest fault at the bottom.
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

GENERAL
•• Obey all the electrical/electronic safety
precautions.
•• Energize the aircraft electrical system.
• Put the aircraft in the weight-on-wheels ECS OTHER
PRESENT FLT R
SYSTEM 1 CH 1/2
2/7

condition. < EMU

XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2 ANTI-SKID >
XXXX - R NAPRSOV
XXXX - APU DIFF PR

PROCEDURE
< FCS- CAB ACMICE PROTECTION >
XXXX
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB TSOV
< ECS APU >
•• On the maintenance panel, set the CDS XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
GND MAINT toggle switch to the “up” XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
< TMCU1
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP TMCU2 >
position and make sure the CDS GND XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
MAINT light comes on. I

• O n t h e c e n t e r c o n s o l e s e t e i t h e r
ARCDU to the ON position and push ECS
FCECU PRESENT FLT R CH 1/
FAULTS 2/7
the MAINT key. PRESENT FAULTS
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2
XXXX - R NAPRSOV
XXXX - APU DIFF PR
The CDS main menu is displayed as follows: XXXX - CAB ACM
NO FAULTS
XXXX - CAB REPORTED
OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB TSOV
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
FCECU SYS FAULTS 1/ XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
PRESENT FAULTS XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I

ECS PRESENT FLT R CH 1/

FCECU FAULTS
2/7
PRESENT FAULTS
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2
NO FAULTS REPORTED XXXX - R NAPRSOV
PIL TRIM SW FAILURE
XXXX - APU DIFF PR
XXXX - CAB ACM
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB TSOV
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I

Figure 27-152.  Task 45-00-27-742-801 CDS System Pages Indications (1 of 2)

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-229

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• Push the NEXT key on the ARCDU •• On the maintenance panel, set the
to get to the FCECU SYS FAULTS 2 CDS GND MAINT toggle switch to
of 4 FAULT HISTORY. If no faults the “down” position and make sure the
are reported, the CDS will show a NO CDS GND MAINT light goes off.
FAULTS REPORTED message. If faults
•• De-energize the electrical system.
are recorded the menu shows the list of
faults in the order of newest fault at the •• Remove all tools, equipment, and
top, to the oldest fault at the bottom. A unwanted materials from the work area.
maximum number of 10 faults can be
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

displayed. Push the NEXT key on the

ARCDU to get to the FCECU ANLG
I/O STATUS 3 of 4. Push the NEXT
key on the ARCDU to get to the FCECU
ANLG I/O STATUS 4 of 4.

ECSS PRESENT
FCECU S FAULTS FLT R CH 2/
2/7
FAULT HISTOR
XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2
XXXX - R NAPRSOV
IFC FAILURE
XXXX - APU DIFF PR
IFC FAILURE
XXXX - CAB ACM
ADC FAILURE
ADC FAILURE
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP
ADC FAILURE
XXXX - CAB TSOV
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
ADC FAILURE
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
ADC FAILURE
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
ADC FAILURE
XXXX - SEC OLT MISCMP
ADC FAILURE
XXXX
FCECU- CABDCMP OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I

ECS PRESENT
FCECU ANLG I OFLT R CH 2/7
STATUS / ECS PRESENT
FCECU ANLG I OFLT R CH 2/7
STATUS /

XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2 XXXX - ECU DIG CH 2

XXXX - R NAPRSOV XXXX - R NAPRSOV
L DELTA PRESS 2 7 PSI L IB SPOIL - 2 DEG
XXXX - APU DIFF PR XXXX - APU DIFF PR
R DELTA PRESS PSI R IB SPOIL DE
G
XXXX - CAB ACM
L ELEV - DEG XXXX
L OB -SPOIL
CAB ACM - 2 DEG
R ELEV
XXXX - CAB OLT MISCMP - 7 DEG R OB-SPOIL
XXXX CAB OLT MISCMP - 2 DEG
L PFEEL
XXXX - CAB TSOV 7 IN L PTRIM
XXXX - CAB TSOV - DEG
R PFEEL 7 2 IN R PTRIM - DEG
XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2 XXXX - ECU ANLG CH 2
XXXX - R HP BLD SW
RUDDER 7 DE
G XXXX -
AILERON R HP BLD SW - 2 DEG
XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP XXXX - COMP TMP MISCMP
XXXX - SEC
DO NOT OLT
RIG A/CMISCMP
WITH DATA XXXX
DO NOT- SEC OLT
RIG A/CMISCMP
WITH DATA
XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP XXXX - CAB CMP OLT TMP
XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP XXXX - CAB MAN OLT TMP
I I

Figure 27-153.  Task 45-00-27-742-801 CDS System Pages Indications (2 of 2)

27-230 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-231

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Figure 27-154.  Flight Control Electronic Control Unit

27-232 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-00-01 FLIGHT NOTES

CONTROL ELECTRONIC
CONTROL UNIT
INTRODUCTION
The FCECU receives electronic inputs and

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

supplies electronic outputs for all of the
primary and secondary flight control systems.

GENERAL
The FCECU is a single unit divided into
two channels, (referred to as the left and
right channels). The left and right channels
receive inputs from the pilot and/or co-pilot
flight controls.

The two channels function separately from

each other throughout the system. The FCECU
channels communicate with each other on a
cross communication data link.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer to Figure 27-154. Fl i ght Co ntr ol
Electronic Control Unit.

The FCECU is located under the passenger

cabin floor, forward of the rotor burst zone.
Channel 1 (left) is powered by the 28 VDC left
essential bus through the FCS ECU 1 circuit
breaker (M3).

Channel 2 (right) is powered by the 28 VDC

right essential bus through the FCS ECU 2
circuit breaker (L6).

The FCECU is an analog control unit with

the digital hardware for data processing, logic
control and logic monitoring.

Each channel is partitioned into a command

path and a monitor path.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-233

27-234 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Caution Lights
ELEVATOR ELEVATOR ROLL SPLR
FEEL ASYMMETRY INBD GND

#1 RUD PITCH ROLL SPLR

HYD TRIM INBD HYD

DASH 8 Q400
28 VDC RUDDER
SOV
PLA Left
Rudder Hinge
Moment Limiter
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Flap Posn
Left FPIU Lower PCU

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

P Feel Actuator
FLIGHT Left
ADU #1 CONTROL
AHRS #1 ELECTRONIC P Trim Actuator
CONTROL Active Left
UNIT STBY Right
MFD
CHANNEL #1 I/B Spoiler L
IFC #1 (LEFT) I/B Spoiler R LVDTS
A/P Trim
Elevator L
FDR Aileron R

Pilot Trim PSEU Inboard Spoiler Lift

Switches Dump Solenoid Valve
WOW
1
Inboard Spoiler Lift
Pitch Disconnect Dump Solenoid Valve
Relay

ELEVATOR TRIM
RUD 1 SHUTOFF ROLL INBD
(Pilot/Co-Pilot)
Pushoff Switchlights Advisory Lights

fs793a01.cgm

Figure 27-155.  FCECU/Left Channel Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-155. FCECU/Left Channel •• Increases the pressure to the operating
Block Diagram. rudder PCU if one of the rudder PCU
fails or is depressurized
The FCECU functions with the flight control
• Sends signals to the rudder caution
systems listed below:
lights to indicate system malfunctions.
•• Aileron Control System
•• Rudder Control System

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• Elevator Control System
•• Flap Control System
• Spoiler Control System.

Aileron Control System

The FCECU does the following functions:

•• Supplies electrical excitation of the

LVDT attached to the right aileron.
• Receives right aileron position data
from the LVDT. The FCECU transmits
this position data on an ARINC 429
data bus to the FDR through the IFC.

Rudder Control System

The FCECU carries out the functions listed below:

•• Supplies electrical excitation of the

rudder position LVDT
•• Receives position data from the rudder
LVDT. The FCECU transmits this
position to the FDR and EFIS
•• Limits the rudder hinge movement by
regulating the pressure in the rudder
PCU according to aircraft speed
• • Monitors the airspeed signals for a
mismatch condition and sets the
rudder PCU regulated pressure to a
default mode
•• Monitors the regulated pressure in
the rudder PCU for discrepancies and
depressurizes the PCU if it is faulty
•• Depressurizes the relevant rudder PCU
if either of the RUD1 or RUD2 PUSH
OFF switchlight is pushed

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-235

 27-236 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Caution Lights
ROLL SPLR ROLL SPLR SPLR
OUTBD GRD OUTBD HYD OUTBD

RUD #2 RUD
CNTRL HYD

DASH 8 Q400
28 VDC RUDDER
PLA Right SOV
Rudder Hinge
Flap Posn Moment Limiter
Upper PCU
Right FPIU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

P Feel Actuator
Right

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ADU #2 FLIGHT
AHRS #2 CONTROL P Trim Actuator
ELECTRONIC Act/Stby Right
CONTROL
IFC
UNIT EXCITATION
#2 O/B Spoiler L
CHANNEL #2
O/B Spoiler R
(RIGHT) LVDTS
Elevator R
Co-pilot
POSITION Rudder
Trim S/ws
DATA
Flight/Taxi Switch

Maintenance
TO LEFT CHANNEL PSEU Outboard Spoiler
Panel
Lift Dump SOV
WOW
Outboard 2 Outboard Spoiler
Spoiler SOV Lift Dump SOV

ROLL
RUD 2 OUTBD
(Spoiler)
Pushoff Switchlights Advisory Lights
fs792a01.cgm

Figure 27-156.  FCECU/Right Channel Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Elevator Control System NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-156. FCECU/Right Channel
Block Diagram.

The FCECU carries out the following functions:

•• Supplies electrical excitation to the left

and right elevator position LVDT

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

• • Receives position data from the left
and right elevator LVDT. The FCECU
transmits this position data to the
FDR and EFIS
•• Changes the elevator feel forces on the
control columns as a function of airspeed
and acceleration
•• Changes manual pitch trim rate as a
function of airspeed
•• Supplies automatic pitch trim when in
the autopilot mode or when the flaps are
extended or retracted (15° to 35°)
•• Prioritizes all valid pitch trim commands
in the following order: pilot, co-pilot,
and then autopilot
•• Monitors pitch trim actuator failures
and sends a signal to the PITCH TRIM
caution light and the ELEVATOR
TRIM SHUTOFF switchlights
• • Supplies elevator trim position to the
warning tone generator in the IFC. An
aural warning on takeoff is produced
if the elevator trim is outside the
takeoff range
•• Monitors elevator asymmetry and
supplies a signal to the ELEVATOR
ASYMMETRY caution light
•• Monitors elevator feel actuator failures
and supplies a signal to the ELEVATOR
FEEL caution light
• Monitors the airspeed and acceleration
signals for a mismatch condition and
sets the pitch trim and elevator feel to
a default mode.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-237

27-238 27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

PITCH
TRIM

RUDDER HINGE
ELEVATOR

DASH 8 Q400
MOMENT LIMITING
(HML) FEEL
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE
SPOILER
INTERFACE TO
LIFT-DUMP

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CDS

FCECU

BUILT-IN-TEST OUTBOARD
(BIT) SPOILER
LOCKOUT

FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM AURAL
CAUTION AND TAKE-OFF
WARNING WARNING

FLIGHT
CONTROL
SURFACE
POSITION

fss56a01.cgm

Figure 27-157.  FCECU Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Flap Control System •• Flight Control System caution and

warning signals
Refer to Figure 27-157. FCECU Block Diagram.
•• Built-In-Test
The FCECU carries out the listed function: • Maintenance interface to CDS.
• Receives left and right flap position data
from the FPIU for scheduling default
values when airspeed is not valid.

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Spoiler Control System
The FCECU performs the listed functions:

•• Locks out the outboard spoilers for

airspeeds greater than 170 kt (315 km/h)
•• Sends the high side signal to the inboard
and outboard spoilers lift dump valves
to dump the lift from the wings when
the aircraft lands
•• Sends a signal to the spoiler caution
lights to indicate system malfunctions
•• Supplies electrical excitation to all the
spoiler position LVDT
•• Receives position data from all the
spoiler LVDT. The FCECU transmits
this position data to the FDR and EFIS
•• Sends a low side discrete to the magnetic
coil of the FLIGHT/TAXI switch
• Sends a signal to the spoiler advisory
lights.

Refer to Figure 27-157. FCECU Block Diagram.

The FCECU functions of the flight control

systems (FCS) are:

•• Rudder HML
•• Pitch trim
•• Elevator feel
•• Spoiler Lift-dump
•• Outboard spoiler lockout
•• Aural take-off warning
•• Flight control surface position reporting
to the FDR and the PFCSI through IFC

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-239

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Elevator Asymmetry
Elevator Feel Roll Spoiler Inboard Ground.
Pitch Trim Roll Spoiler Outboard Ground.

ROLL SPLR STALL

#1 STAL
T L
PIT H
INBD GND FAIL
SYST FAI
F L
TRIM
STALL
#2 STAL
T L
FAIL
SYST FAI
F L

ROLL SPLR PUSHER PARKING

PARKIN
P G
INBD HYD FAIL
SYST FAI
F L BRAKE

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

#2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

EMER LT
L S
LTS NOSE FUELING
DISARMED STEERING ON

ABIN MAIN BAT

A
PRESS HOT

CAUTION PANEL

Figure 27-158.  Caution and Warning Panel

27-240 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS ROLL SPLR INBD GND

•• If the FCECU senses a loss of lift dump
Caution Lights valve function, or
Refer to Figure 27-158. Caution and Warning •• If the lift dump valves are operated but
Panel. the spoiler panels fail to extend after
landing, or
The FCECU sends signals to the Caution and
Warning panel to illuminate the caution lights • If the spoiler panels extend when the

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

that follow: FCECU carries out the lift dump BIT,
with the FLIGHT/TAXI switch set to
TAXI.
ELEVATOR FEEL
•• Left or Right Pitch Feel Actuator fails, or ROLL SPLR OUTBD GND
•• Airspeed No.1 and Airspeed No.2 •• If the FCECU senses a loss of lift dump
disagree by +/- 17 kts., or valve function, or
• Acceleration No.1 and Acceleration No.2 •• If the lift dump valves are operated but
disagree by +/- 0.35g for > 6 seconds. the spoiler panels fail to extend after
landing, or
PITCH TRIM • If the spoiler panels extend when the
•• One pitch trim motor, or its control card FCECU carries out the lift dump BIT,
fails, or with the FLIGHT/TAXI switch set to
TAXI.
•• Elevator trim shutoff switch light
pressed, or
•• Airspeed No.1 disagrees with Airspeed
No.2 by +/- 17 kts., or
Pitch trim input commands disagree a/c
on ground.

ELEVATOR ASYMMETRY
•• 4.0 ± 1.6° for airspeed > 215 kts., or
• 6.0 ± 1.6° for airspeed < 215 kts.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-241

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

Rudder Control Spoiler Outboard

#1 Rudder Hydraulic Pressure Roll Spoiler Outboard Hydraulic

Roll Spoiler Inboard Hydraulic #2 Rudder Hydraulic Pressure

ROLL SPLR STALL

#1 STAL
T L
INBD GND FAIL
SYST FAI
F L

STALL
#2 STAL
T L
FAIL
SYST FAI
F L

ROLL SPLR PUSHER PARKING

PARKIN
P G
INBD HYD FAIL
SYST FAI
F L BRAKE

INBD OUTBD
ANTISKID ANTISKID

#2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

NOSE FUELING
STEERING ON

MAIN BAT
A
HOT

Figure 27-159.  Caution and Warning Panel

27-242 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 27-159. Caution and Warning NOTES

Panel.

The FCECU sends signals to the Caution and

Warning panel to turn on the caution lights
that follow:

SPLR OUTBD

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• If the FCECU fails to lockout the outboard
spoilers and airspeed is > 185 knots, or
•• If the FCECU locks out the outboard
spoilers and airspeed is < 150 knots, or
•• Airspeed No.1 disagrees with Airspeed
No.2 by +/- 17 kts

ROLL SPLR INBD HYD

•• No.1 hydraulic system pressure is < 900
psi.
• Roll spoiler cable breaks

ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD

•• No.2 hydraulic system pressure is < 900
psi and airspeed is < 165 knots, or
•• If FCECU detects the outboard spoilers
are inadvertently locked out and
airspeed is < 165 knots
• Roll spoiler cable breaks

No.1 RUD HYD

•• No.1 hydraulic system pressure is
< 350+/-50 psi.

No.2 RUD HYD

•• No.2 hydraulic system pressure is
< 350+/-50 psi.

RUD CTRL
•• Airspeed No.1 and Airspeed No.2
disagree by +/- 17 kts., or
•• F C E C U l o s e s i t s a b i l i t y t o l i m i t
hydraulic pressure, or
• Both hydraulic systems fail.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-243

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

LEGEND
1. Roll Outboard Annunciator Light.
GLARESHIELD PANEL
2. Roll Inboard Annunciator Light.

1
NOTE
Left side shown. STI P SHER
Right side similar. SPOILERS SH T O

LIGHT
ENGINE IRE
AP
ROLL IN D DISENG

TA I INHI IT

ELE ATOR TRI TERRAIN

AEI SH T O INHI IT

A RNING
PRESS TO RESET

2
fsz09a02.cgm
A

Figure 27-160.  Roll Spoiler Advisory Lights

27-244 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Advisory Lights NOTES

Refer to Figure 27-160. Roll Spoiler Advisory
Lights.

The FCECU sends signals to illuminate the

following advisory lights:

ROLL OUTBD (spoiler)

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

• Both outboard spoiler LVDT > 65

ROLL INBD (spoiler).

• Both inboard spoiler LVDT > 65

OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE

FCECU
The following is an abbreviated description of
the maintenance practice and is intended for
training purposes only. For a more detailed
description of the practice, refer to the task in
the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2.

•• Open then close the FCS ECU 1 and FCS

ECU 2 CB's to let the system do a BIT
•• M a k e s u r e t h e C D S s h o w s N O
PRESENT FAULTS
•• Apply pressure to No.1 and No.2
hydraulic systems
•• By moving the controls, check the PFCS
for full movement of the following:
°° Inboard and outboard roll spoilers
°° Left and right elevators
°° Rudder
°° Check flap movement on MFD No.2
°° Do an operational test of the pitch
trim system
°° Do an operational test of the ground
spoiler system
°° Do an operational test of the roll
spoiler SPLR1 and SPLR2 PUSH
OFF switchlights
°° Remove hydraulic pressure.

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-245

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

MAINTENANCE Interfaces
CONSIDERATION The FCECU has these interfaces:
System Test
SOURCE PARAMETER
Power-Up Built-In-Test (PBIT) Air Data Units Airspeed

The FCECU does a Power-Up Built-In-Test Attitude Heading And

Acceleration
(PBIT) to verify operation of the hardware Reference System
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

monitors. Any errors found during PBIT will Flap Position

Flap Position
be annunciated by the caution and warning Indication Unit
system. If PBIT is interrupted, the PBIT will Flap Control Unit Flaps In Motion Signal
then be cancelled and, no faults stored. PBIT is
commanded if both WOW inputs are active and Manual Pitch Trim Pilot/Co-pilot Pitch
both PLA microswitches indicate < PLA 47. Switches Trim Command
Pitch Trim Disconnect Engaged/Disengaged
Continuous Built-In-Test (CBIT) Relay Signal

Continuous Built-In-Test (CBIT) constantly Autopilot Pitch Trim And

Flight Guidance
monitors the FCECU hardware performance. Flap Auto Trim
Modules
It monitors actuator performance to the level Commands
required to meet system safety requirements. Power Lever Angle
Flight Idle +12 Signal
Microswitches
CBIT is implemented in the FCECU hardware Flight Or Taxi Mode
and does not involve software. Failures are Flight/Taxi Switch
Signals
annunciated to the flight compartment.
Flight Control Surface
Lvdt
Position
Event-Initiated Built-In-Test (EBIT) Flight Control System
Maintenance Panel
Event-Initiated Built-In-Test (EBIT) is initiated Failures
6.4 seconds after the aircraft has landed and the Rudder Pcu Pressure
Rudder Pcu Pressure
pilot has set the FLIGHT/TAXI switch to TAXI. Sensors
Pseu Wow
The FCECU checks for hidden failures of the
Pushoff Switchlights Switch On/Off Signal
spoiler lift dump solenoids.

27-246 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-00-45 CENTRAL
DATA STORAGE FLIGHT
CONTROLS
INTRODUCTION
The CDS monitors, records, tests, and shows

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

the condition of the:

•• Flight Control System and

• Flap Control System.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 27-161. CDS Interface.

CDS
(IOP 1)

FCECU

Flap Control Unit IOP 2

fsq72a01.cgm

Figure 27-161.  CDS Interface

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-247

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

Refer to Figure 27-162. CDS Ground
Maintenance Toggle Switch Selection.

With the CDS GRD MAINT toggle switch set,

the CDS rotary selector switch is selected to
a system.
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

An amber LED will come on to show that a

system is armed to erase the contents of its
NVRAM.

The NVRAM RESET push-button switch is

pushed for 1 second and then released to erase
the NVRAM. FW
D

The rotary selector switch is set back to OFF

which causes the LED to go out.

The Other System pages must be viewed

again to verify that there are no malfunction
messages shown. AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION

CDS GND MAINT LED CDS GND MAINT Toggle Switch

ENGINE MAINTENANCE CDS GND MAINT PROP DEICE CAL

UNFEATHER A A A
#1 #2
#1 #2 ECS AUTO NVM RESET
ON FAIL PSEU

A A A G
RIG TRIM MAINT DISC
PSS PSEU
OFF MAINT OPER
FLAP
PAA
PROP TEST
DEICE 2 28VDC
A
CPC PROP
DEICE 1
ECS AFR
FLT DEICE
CTL

NVRAM RESET ARM LED CDS Rotary Selector NVM RESET Push Button

Figure 27-162.  CDS Ground Maintenance Toggle Switch Selection

27-248 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• GSB2700008 Rigging Pin Kit
•• GSB2700008-03 Rigging Pin, 0.25 - 3.00 in. (6.35-76.20 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-04 Rigging Pin, 0.25 - 4.50 in (6.35-114.3 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-05 Rigging Pin, 0.25 - 6.00 in. (6.35-152.4 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-05 Rigging Pin, 0.25 - 8.00 in (6.35-203.2 mm) L-Pin

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• GSB2700008-06 Rigging Pin, 0.25 - 8.00 in. (6.35-203.2 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-09 Rigging Pin, 0.1875 - 4.00 in. (4.76-101.6 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-10 Rigging Pin, 0.1875 - 12.0 in (4.71-304.8 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-16D Target - Actuator (Steel)
•• GSB2700008-16D C279TARGET
•• GSB2700008-27 Elevator Tension Regulator Spacer
•• GSB2700008-28 Spoiler Tension Regulator Spacer Tool
•• GSB2700008-29 Rigging Pin, 0.1875 - 3.00 in. (4.7-76.2 mm) L-Pin
•• GSB2700008-32 Target-De-Actuator (Copper)
•• GSB2700009 (or equivalent) Cable Tension Meter
•• GSB3411001 Test Set - Air Data
•• GSB3411011 Air Data Test Set (or equivalent)
•• GSB3411012 AIR DATA KIT
•• GSB3411012 or GSB3411013 Pitot/Static Pressure Test Adapter
•• GSB2000009 Digital Inclinometer
•• GSB2715001 Left Gear Tab Rigging Board
•• GSB2715002 Right Gear Tab Rigging Board
•• GSB2715002 Gear Tab Rigging Tool
•• GSB2715003 Left Elevator Rigging Boards
•• GSB2715004 Right Elevator Rigging Boards
•• GSB2715005 Aileron Rigging Tool
•• GSB2733002 Rigging Fixture - Control Column (half moon)
•• GSB2733003-1 Left AOA Vane Alignment Template
•• GSB2733003-2 Right AOA Vane Alignment Template
•• GSB2000024 Force Meter 0-100 lbf (0-xxx Kgf)
•• GSB2000024 Force Meter 0-100 lbf (0-444.82 N) (may be substituted with commercially
available unit with minimum 40 lbf (177.92 N) capacity)
•• 964-0446-001 Hand-held Download Unit (HHDLU)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-249

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• Commercially available Laptop computer with Flightscape software (or equivalent) installed
•• GSB2715005 Aileron Rigging Tool
•• GSB2400001 Multimeter, Digital Volt/ohm
•• GSB2400001 Digital Multimeter-Hand Held
•• PBA P/N 390600TF2-101 Extend Jam Fixture
•• PBA P/N 390600TF2-103 Retract Jam Fixture
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• PBA P/N 390500TF3-109 Retract Jam Fixture

•• PBA P/N 390500TF3-111 Extend Jam Fixture
•• 376060GSE1-1001 Cable - Rudder PCU Internal Leak Detect Valve Electrical Test
•• 376060GSE1-1001 or Alternate: G700-271105-1 Test Cable
•• GSB2700010 Cable, Interface for rigging and trouble shooting
•• 964-0446-001 Hand-Held Download Unit (HHDLU)
•• GSB2440002 DC Rectifier
•• GSB2440006 DC Rectifier
•• Commercially Available Spring Scale (0 - 50 Lbs, 0 - 22.68 Kg)
•• GSB2900001 Hydraulic Power Unit
•• GSB3240006 or equivalent Tool - Brake Application
•• MHI 02F99205 or equivalent Rudder Sling
•• DHC8PROX-RTP-0102 Target Proximity Sensor De-Actuator Test
•• Commercially Available Force gage, mechanical spring scale
•• GSB27330002 or equivalent Control Column Rigging Tool
•• Commercially Available Wire Pin Removal/Insertion Tool
•• 11-8073-1010 DC Ground Power Unit
•• Commercially Available Hydraulic Power Unit
•• GSB5180001 or GSB5180005 Electrical Bonding Tester
•• Commercially Available Liquid dispenser with 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) needle (Wheller
FD21D, or equivalent)
•• DRUCK 405F Air Data Test Set
•• GPU-600, GSB2440006 DC Ground Power Cart
•• H102, GSB2900001 Hydraulic Ground Power Cart
•• MITUTOYO 950-315 Clinometer
•• Commercially Available Switch Insertion/Removal Tool
•• (2) GSB3411012 or GSB3411013 Pitot/Static Pressure Test Adapter
•• Commercially Available Dial Indicator - 0.001 in. (0.0254 mm) resolution

27-250 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• Hewlett Packard HP4328A or equivalent Milliohmeter

•• GSB2000009 Digital Inclinometer, Protractor
•• GSB2000016 Micrometer Kit, Optical Depth
•• DFM-100 Digital Force Meter, 1-100 LB
•• GSB2750003 or equivalent Flap Drive Adapter
•• CD-8 Cap, Protective Pressure Inlet ¾ -16

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• CD-6 Cap, Protective Pressure Inlet 9/16-18
•• GPN610-U3 Cap, Protective Tube Drain
•• GPN610-U14 Kapsto Cap, Protective
•• Commercially Available Removal Tool, Wire Pin
•• 390700GSE1-1001 (Parker) Alignment Fixture, Spoiler Actuator Installation
•• 390700GSE2-1001 (Parker) Spoiler Lock Collar
•• 18-234 Extraction Tool (Vivisun)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-251

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

27-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for details on these maintenance procedures:

•• AMM 45-00-27-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Flight Control System (FCS)
•• AMM 27-00-01-710-802 O
 perational Test of the Flight Control Electronic Control Unit
(FCECU)
27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• AMM 27-10-00-830-802 Control Column to Control Column Rigging

•• AMM 27-10-00-830-803 Control Column to Aileron Quadrant Rigging
•• AMM 27-10-00-830-804 Aileron Quadrant to Splitter Quadrant Rigging
•• AMM 27-10-00-830-805 Aileron Splitter Quadrant to Aileron Terminal Quadrant Rigging
•• AMM 27-10-00-830-806 Aileron Terminal Quadrant to Aileron Surface Rigging
•• AMM 27-10-00-830-807 Rigging of the Aileron Control System Stops
•• AMM 27-12-01-830-802 Rigging of the Aileron Quadrant Microswitch
•• AMM 27-12-16-830-801 Rigging of the Aileron Geared Tab
•• AMM 27-12-21-830-802 Rigging of the Aileron Position LVDT
•• AMM 12-20-01-640-812 Lubrication of the Aileron and Roll Spoiler Chains
•• FIM 27-10-00-810-801 AIL LVDT FAIL (Status) −Fault Isolation
•• AMM 27-10-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Aileron Control System
•• AMM 27-13-00-710-802 Operational Test of the Aileron Trim System
•• AMM 27-16-00-830-801 Rigging of the Roll Disconnect System
•• AMM 27-16-00-710-802 O
 perational Check of the Roll Disconnect Mechanism (CMR#
271000−106)
•• AMM 27-21-26-000-801 Removal of the Power Control Unit/Actuator
•• AMM 27-21-26-400-801 Installation of the Power Control Unit/Actuator
•• AMM 27-21-00-830-810 Rigging of the Rudder Pedals to the Rudder Forward Quadrants
•• AMM 27-21-00-830-811 Rigging of the Forward Quadrant to the Rudder Mixer Quadrant
•• AMM 27-21-00-830-812 Rigging of the Rudder Mixer Quadrant to the Rudder Aft Quadrant
•• AMM 27-21-00-830-815 Rigging of the Upper Servo Spring Strut Motion Detector
•• AMM 27-21-00-830-809 Rigging of the Rudder PCUs with Hydraulic Power
•• AMM 27-21-00-830-817 Rigging of the Rudder Feel and Summing Unit
•• AMM 27-21-03-820-801 Adjustment of the Rudder Pedal Position−Sensor
•• AMM 27-21-26-830-801 Rigging of the Rudder Power Control Units
•• AMM 27-20-00-710-801 O
 perational Check of the Rudder Control Shut−Off Valves
(CMR#272000−111)

27-252 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.4

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• AMM 27-20-00-710-802 Operational Test of the Rudder Control System

•• AMM 27-20-00-710-803 Operational Check of the Rudder Control System (CMR#272000-108)
•• AMM 27-21-28-710-801 Operational Test of the Rudder Shut–Off Valves
•• AMM 27-22-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Rudder Trim System
•• AMM 27-31-00-750-801 Asymmetry Check of the Elevators
•• AMM 27-31-00-790-801 Elevator Droop Rate Check

27  FLIGHT CONTROLS

•• AMM 27-30-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Elevator Control System
•• AMM 27-30-00-710-803 O
 perational Check of the Elevator Control Pitch Disconnect
Mechanism (MRB# 273000−204)
•• AMM 27-32-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Pitch Feel System
•• AMM 27-33-26-000-801 Removal of the Angle of Attack Transducer
•• AMM 27-33-26-400-801 Installation of the Angle of Attack Transducer
•• AMM 27-33-00-830-801 Rigging of the Stick Pusher System
•• AMM 27-38-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Pitch Disconnect System
•• AMM 27-50-00-760-801 Wing Flaps System, Electrical Checks
•• AMM 45-00-27-742-802 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Flaps System (FLAPS)
•• AMM 27-50-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Wing Flaps
•• AMM 27-51-06-710-801 Operational Test of the Flap Control Module
•• AMM 27-52-00-640-801 Lubrication of the Flap Actuator Ballscrews (MRB #275000−201)
•• AMM 27-61-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Roll Spoiler System
•• AMM 27-61-00-710-803 Operational Test of the Spoiler Jam Detect System
•• AMM 27-61-00-710-804 O
 perational Check of the Roll Spoiler SPLR 1 & SPLR 2 Push
Off Switchlights (MRB #276000−205)
•• AMM 27-61-00-710-805 O
 perational Check of the Roll Spoiler Cable Sensor Assembly
(CMR#276000−106)
•• AMM 27-61-00-710-806 O
 perational Check of the Spoiler Cable Disconnect Sensor
(MRB#276000−208)
•• AMM 27-61-03-720-801 Functional Test of the Spoiler Force Sensor
•• AMM 27-62-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Ground Spoiler System
•• AMM 27-71-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Aileron Gust Lock System

Revision 0.4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 27-253